1MRK502016-UEN B en Application Manual Generator Protection IED REG 670 1.1a

Application manual Generator protection IED REG 670
Innovation
from
ABB
Document ID: 1MRK502016-UEN Issued: December 2007 Revision: B IED product version: 1.1
Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................11
Introduction to the application manual..............................................11 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................11 About the application manual......................................................12 Intended audience.......................................................................12 Related documents......................................................................13 Revision notes.............................................................................13
Section 2
Engineering of the IED...................................................15

Introduction.......................................................................................15 The interface between Signal matrix and Configuration tool.......16 The configurable LEDs...........................................................17 The analog preprocessing function block (SMAI)...................18 Configuration alternatives.................................................................20 Adapting a configuration to satisfy special needs.............................21 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT).............................................................21 Application configuration tool CAP 531.......................................23 Preparing a specific application configuration of the IED.................23 Configuring an IED with CAP531................................................23 Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT).......................................26 Using the Event viewer tool.........................................................26 Setting of the IED.............................................................................26 Authorization.....................................................................................27 Authorization handling in the tool................................................28 Authorization handling in the IED................................................34 Blocking of setting after commissioning of the IED..........................34 How to use the configurable logics blocks........................................35 Some application ideas....................................................................36 Voltage selection.........................................................................36 Fuse failure protection.................................................................37 Automatic opening of a transformer disconnector and closing the ring breakers..........................................................................38 Automatic load transfer from bus A to bus B...............................39 Testing of the IED.............................................................................39 Engineering checklist........................................................................40 How to use the IED in conjunction with PCM 600 toolbox...........40
Section 3
Requirements.................................................................43
Current transformer requirements....................................................43 Current transformer classification................................................43
REG 670
Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Conditions....................................................................................44 Fault current................................................................................45 Secondary wire resistance and additional load...........................45 General current transformer requirements..................................45 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements........................46 Transformer differential protection.........................................46 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards.....................................................................................47 Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR.............................................................................47 Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS (and old British Standard, class X).........................................48 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE.......................48 Voltage transformer requirements....................................................49 SNTP server requirements...............................................................49
Section 4
IED application...............................................................51
General IED application....................................................................51 Analog inputs....................................................................................52 Application...................................................................................52 Setting guidelines........................................................................52 Setting of the phase reference channel..................................52 Setting parameters......................................................................77 Local human-machine interface.......................................................84 Human machine interface............................................................84 LHMI related functions.................................................................85 Introduction.............................................................................85 General setting parameters....................................................85 Indication LEDs...........................................................................85 Introduction.............................................................................85 Setting parameters.................................................................86 Basic IED functions..........................................................................88 Self supervision with internal event list........................................88 Application..............................................................................88 Setting parameters.................................................................88 Time synchronization...................................................................89 Application..............................................................................89 Setting guidelines...................................................................89 Setting parameters.................................................................90 Parameter setting groups............................................................94 Application..............................................................................94 Setting guidelines...................................................................94 Setting parameters.................................................................94
REG 670
Table of contents
Test mode functionality................................................................95 Application..............................................................................95 Setting guidelines...................................................................95 Setting parameters.................................................................95 IED identifiers..............................................................................96 Application..............................................................................96 Setting parameters.................................................................97 Rated system frequency (RFR)...................................................97 Application..............................................................................97 Setting guidelines...................................................................97 Setting parameters.................................................................97 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI).........................................97 Application..............................................................................97 Setting guidelines...................................................................98 Setting parameters.................................................................98 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO).....................................98 Application..............................................................................98 Setting guidelines...................................................................98 Setting parameters.................................................................98 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI).............................................98 Application..............................................................................98 Setting guidelines...................................................................98 Setting parameters.................................................................99 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)........................................99 Application..............................................................................99 Setting guidelines...................................................................99 Setting parameters...............................................................102 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph).......................................104 Application............................................................................104 Setting guidelines.................................................................104 Setting parameters...............................................................105 Authority status (AUTS).............................................................105 Application............................................................................105 Setting parameters...............................................................106 Goose binary receive.................................................................106 Setting parameters...............................................................106 Differential protection......................................................................106 Generator differential protection (PDIF, 87G)............................106 Application............................................................................106 Setting guidelines.................................................................108 Setting parameters...............................................................113 Transformer differential protection (PDIF, 87T).........................115 Application............................................................................115
REG 670
Table of contents
Setting guidelines.................................................................116 Setting example....................................................................123 Setting parameters...............................................................135 Restricted earth fault protection (PDIF, 87N)............................141 Application............................................................................141 Setting guidelines.................................................................147 Setting parameters...............................................................149 High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87).....................150 Application............................................................................150 Connection examples...........................................................157 Setting guidelines.................................................................160 Setting parameters...............................................................168 Impedance protection ....................................................................169 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21...............................................................................................169 Application............................................................................169 Setting guidelines.................................................................182 Setting parameters...............................................................188 Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78).................................................189 Application............................................................................190 Setting guidelines.................................................................192 Setting parameters...............................................................201 Loss of excitation (PDIS, 40).....................................................202 Application............................................................................203 Setting guidelines.................................................................208 Setting parameters...............................................................211 Current protection...........................................................................212 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)...........212 Application............................................................................213 Setting guidelines.................................................................213 Setting parameters...............................................................217 Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)...........217 Application............................................................................217 Setting guidelines.................................................................219 Setting parameters...............................................................227 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)......233 Application............................................................................233 Setting guidelines.................................................................234 Setting parameters...............................................................236 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/ 67N)...........................................................................................236 Application............................................................................237 Setting parameters...............................................................238
REG 670
Table of contents
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N) ............................................................245 Application............................................................................245 Setting guidelines.................................................................246 Setting parameters...............................................................254 Thermal overload protection, two time constants (PTTR, 49).............................................................................................257 Application............................................................................257 Setting guideline...................................................................258 Setting parameters...............................................................261 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)...................................262 Application............................................................................262 Setting guidelines.................................................................263 Setting parameters...............................................................265 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)..............................266 Application............................................................................267 Setting guidelines.................................................................267 Setting parameters...............................................................268 Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32).........................268 Application............................................................................269 Setting guidelines.................................................................271 Setting parameters...............................................................274 Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)...........................275 Application............................................................................276 Setting guidelines.................................................................278 Setting parameters...............................................................281 Voltage protection...........................................................................282 Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)..........................282 Application............................................................................283 Setting guidelines.................................................................283 Setting parameters...............................................................286 Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)............................289 Application............................................................................289 Setting guidelines.................................................................290 Setting parameters...............................................................293 Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)............295 Application............................................................................296 Setting guidelines.................................................................296 Setting parameters...............................................................301 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)........................................303 Application............................................................................303 Setting guidelines.................................................................305 Setting parameters...............................................................309 Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60).................................311
REG 670
Table of contents
Application............................................................................311 Setting guidelines.................................................................313 Setting parameters...............................................................314 95% and 100% Stator earthground fault protection based on 3rd harmonic .............................................................................315 Application............................................................................316 Setting guidelines.................................................................320 Setting parameters...............................................................321 Rotor earthground fault protection.............................................322 Setting guidelines.................................................................322 Frequency protection......................................................................326 Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81).....................................326 Application............................................................................326 Setting guidelines.................................................................327 Setting parameters...............................................................328 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81).......................................329 Application............................................................................329 Setting guidelines.................................................................329 Setting parameters...............................................................330 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81).....................330 Application............................................................................331 Setting guidelines.................................................................331 Setting parameters...............................................................332 Multipurpose protection..................................................................332 General current and voltage protection (GAPC)........................332 Application............................................................................333 Setting guidelines.................................................................338 Setting parameters...............................................................350 Secondary system supervision.......................................................360 Current circuit supervision (RDIF).............................................360 Application............................................................................360 Setting guidelines.................................................................361 Setting parameters...............................................................361 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)................................................361 Application............................................................................362 Setting guidelines.................................................................363 Setting parameters...............................................................365 Control............................................................................................366 Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25).............................................................................................366 Application............................................................................367 Application examples...........................................................371 Setting guidelines ................................................................378 Setting parameters...............................................................384
REG 670
Table of contents
Apparatus control (APC)............................................................386 Application............................................................................386 Interaction between modules...............................................392 Setting guidelines.................................................................394 Setting parameters...............................................................396 Interlocking................................................................................399 Configuration guidelines.......................................................400 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)....................................400 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)..........................405 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO).....................410 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)..................412 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)..........415 Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)................................................................................423 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB).....................................429 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)..............................................430 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking........432 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)..............................................................432 Application............................................................................432 Setting guidelines.................................................................433 Setting parameters...............................................................433 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO).................................................434 Application............................................................................434 Setting guidelines.................................................................435 Setting parameters...............................................................435 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO).........................435 Application............................................................................435 Setting guidelines.................................................................436 Setting parameters...............................................................436 Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)..................436 Application............................................................................436 Setting guidelines.................................................................436 Setting parameters...............................................................437 Logic...............................................................................................437 Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)..........................................................437 Application............................................................................438 Setting guidelines.................................................................442 Setting parameters...............................................................443 Trip matrix logic (GGIO)............................................................443 Application............................................................................443 Setting guidelines.................................................................444 Setting parameters...............................................................444 Configurable logic blocks (LLD).................................................444
REG 670
Table of contents
Application............................................................................444 Setting guidelines.................................................................444 Setting parameters...............................................................445 Fixed signal function block (FIXD).............................................446 Application............................................................................446 Setting parameters...............................................................446 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.....................................446 Application............................................................................446 Setting parameters...............................................................447 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO).......................................................447 Application............................................................................447 Setting parameters...............................................................447 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)...................................447 Application............................................................................447 Setting parameters...............................................................448 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO).......................................................448 Application............................................................................448 Setting parameters...............................................................448 Monitoring.......................................................................................448 Measurements (MMXU)............................................................448 Application............................................................................450 Setting guidelines.................................................................451 Setting parameters...............................................................460 Event counter (GGIO)................................................................474 Application............................................................................474 Setting parameters...............................................................474 Event function (EV)....................................................................474 Application............................................................................475 Setting guidelines.................................................................475 Setting parameters...............................................................476 Measured value expander block................................................478 Application............................................................................478 Setting guidelines.................................................................478 Disturbance report (RDRE).......................................................478 Application............................................................................479 Setting guidelines.................................................................479 Setting parameters...............................................................484 Event list (RDRE)......................................................................496 Application............................................................................496 Setting guidelines.................................................................496 Indications (RDRE)....................................................................497 Application............................................................................497
REG 670
Table of contents
Setting guidelines.................................................................497 Event recorder (RDRE).............................................................498 Application............................................................................498 Setting guidelines.................................................................498 Trip value recorder (RDRE).......................................................498 Application............................................................................498 Setting guidelines.................................................................499 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)...................................................499 Application............................................................................499 Setting guidelines.................................................................500 Metering..........................................................................................500 Pulse counter logic (GGIO).......................................................500 Application............................................................................500 Setting guidelines.................................................................501 Setting parameters...............................................................501 Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)......................502 Application............................................................................502 Setting guidelines.................................................................503 Setting parameters...............................................................504
Section 5
Station communication.................................................507
Overview.........................................................................................507 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................507 Application IEC 61850-8-1.........................................................507 Setting guidelines......................................................................509 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................509 Application............................................................................509 Setting guidelines.................................................................509 Setting parameters...............................................................509 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................509 Application............................................................................509 Setting guidelines.................................................................510 Setting parameters...............................................................510 Setting parameters....................................................................510 LON communication protocol.........................................................511 Application.................................................................................511 Setting parameters....................................................................512 SPA communication protocol.........................................................513 Application.................................................................................513 Setting guidelines......................................................................515 Setting parameters....................................................................515 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................516 Application.................................................................................516 Setting parameters....................................................................522
REG 670
Table of contents
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................526 Application.................................................................................526 Setting guidelines......................................................................526 Setting parameters....................................................................526 Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................541 Application.................................................................................541 Setting guidelines......................................................................543 Setting parameters....................................................................544 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................544 Application.................................................................................544 Setting guidelines......................................................................544 Settings................................................................................544 Setting parameters....................................................................544
Section 6
Remote communication................................................547
Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................547 Application.................................................................................547 Communication hardware solutions.....................................548 Setting guidelines......................................................................549 Setting parameters....................................................................550
Section 7
Configuration................................................................555
Introduction.....................................................................................555 Description of REG 670..................................................................555 Introduction................................................................................555 Description of configuration A20 .........................................555 Description of configuration B30..........................................557 Description of configuration C30..........................................558
Section 8
Setting examples..........................................................561
Setting examples............................................................................561 REG 670 Example 1..................................................................563
Section 9
Glossary.......................................................................565
Glossary.........................................................................................565
10
REG 670
Section 1 Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter introduces the user to the manual as such.
1.1
1.1.1
Introduction to the application manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application manual Technical reference manual Installation and commissioning manual Operators manual Engineering guide
en06000097.vsd
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 11
Section 1 Introduction
The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool. The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850 station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600 and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.2
About the application manual

The application manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Engineering of the IED describes the overall procedure regarding the engineering process of an IED. The chapter Requirements describes current and voltage transformer requirements. The chapter IED application describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The chapter discuss application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application. The chapter Station communication describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system. The chapter Remote communication describes the remote end data communication possibilities through binary signal transferring. The chapter Configuration describes the preconfiguration of the IED and its complements. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
1.1.3
Intended audience
General
The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible who is responsible for specifying the application of the IED.
Requirements
The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.
12
REG 670
Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Related documents

Documents related to REG 670 Operators manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Setting example Identity number 1MRK 502 014-UEN 1MRK 502 015-UEN 1MRK 502 013-UEN 1MRK 502 016-UEN 1MRK 502 019-BEN 1MRK 502 020-WEN
Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products Buyers guide REG 216
1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 080-UEN 1MRK 500 083-WEN 1MRK 500 084-WEN 1KHA001027-UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179-UEN 1MRB520004-BEN
Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation
1.1.5
Revision notes
Revision B Description No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.
REG 670
13
14
Section 2 Engineering of the IED
Section 2
Engineering of the IED

About this chapter
This chapter describes the overall procedure regarding the engineering process of an IED.
2.1
Introduction
The IED 670 includes all the necessary functions to build any application. The functions are available in a software library and there is a basic library of functions always included in any supply that are sufficient for most applications. For special applications there is a number of software options which must be ordered separately. The function library with available basic functions and options are shown in figure below. To allow applications on different voltage levels and station arrangements there is also a choice of hardware to be included. The IED can be ordered in 1/1 resp 1/2 size 19 rack with 6U height cases and with a small or medium size HMI as a local user interface. The cases can be mounted in 19 rack, flushed or wall mounted as preferred. The engineering is done with use of the PCM 600 engineering toolbox. Install the PCM 600 toolbox with the connectivity package for IED 670 series and open it from the Start menu or from the short-cut on the desktop. The PCM 600 platform includes following components: Application Configuration tool Signal matrix tool Parameter setting tool Disturbance recorder tools for upload and viewing Graphical Mimic editing tool Signal monitoring tool Event viewer tool
REG 670
15
Section 2 Engineering of the IED 2.1.1 The interface between Signal matrix and Configuration tool
The complete configuration of an IED 670 includes both the configuration with the graphic configuration tool and the configuration of the hardware done with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT. The Application configuration tool is used to set up the included hardware structure and the software functions. The hardware is set-up under the Edit/Function selector menu where for each location the physical analog and digital IO is defined. The figure 1 shows an example from this set-up.
Figure 1:
The Function selector options allows definition of the specific hardware.
The hardware also includes e.g. the configurable LEDs and the remote end line data communication module LDCM. These are also important parts of the physical interface and will be shown with the signal matrix tool. The graphical configuration includes a number of virtual elements forming the interface between the software functions and the hardware. These function blocks are configured at all interface points where a physical IO is foreseen to be required. These virtual IO blocks are: Analog pre-processing function block SMAI Virtual binary input function block SMBI Virtual binary output function block SMBO
16
REG 670
Figure 2 shows an example for RET 670 of these function blocks configured for use in the signal matrix tool.
en05000530.vsd
Figure 2:
Virtual IO blocks SMBI and SMBO configured in an application configuration
These function blocks will, as the graphical configuration has been compiled, showup in the signal matrix tool when this has been opened. The use of the Signal Matrix tool is described below.
2.1.1.1
The configurable LEDs.

The fifteen configurable LEDs can be connected to virtual inputs or virtual outputs only with the signal matrix tool This means that signals foreseen to be used on an LED such as group signals must be connected through an OR function block to a virtual output for use by the LED. Naturally the same signal can be connected to a physical output e.g. for SCADA signaling. The six first LEDs are red and the remaining nine are yellow.
REG 670
17

2.1.1.2 The analog preprocessing function block (SMAI).
This function block is vital for the IED 670 functionality. Interfaces both to local analog inputs as well as remote analog inputs through the LDCM communication module are connected through this function block. The signals from this block is connected to the different applications. Some important comments for the understanding of the function: The function block can be used for voltage inputs or current inputs. Which of the two is defined as a setting parameter (TYPE input) on the function block. The output AI3P is a general output for all of the phases. It is normally connected to the functions. The only difference is the Disturbance recorder block where the individual channels are connected to individual channels. The four individual outputs are the three phases and the neutral where the neutral is residually summated from the phases if no physical connection is made to the fourth input with the signal matrix tool. If the physical connection is made the physical input is used instead. When e.g. a neutral overcurrent protection is connected to the function block output AI3P it will measure the fourth neutral channel. For each application it can then be decided if this is the residual sum or e.g. if a neutral current transformer is connected there. The physical inputs can be connected phase-phase instead of phase to neutral, where acceptable. The setting of the pre-processing block (under Settings/ GeneralSettings/Analog modules/3PhaseAnalogGroup) Connection Type must then be set to Phase to phase. The pre-processing block will then use the physical values as phase to phase values and calculate the phase to neutral values. The name of the pre-processing block and the names of the four inputs are the names shown on the signal matrix tool and the function block name should be selected for simple understanding what the input means.
18
REG 670
en05000531.vsd
Figure 3:
The analog preprocessing block.
The analog pre-processing blocks can also be configured to have the correct frequency tracking for DFT caculations (i.e. adapt to the signal frequency). This is included in the SMAI function blocks. Each block in a task time group is provided with a possibility to keep track of the frequency for adjustment of the fouriers filter to the correct frequency. In principle each block in the series should have the DFT ref setting for the group set to preferable group positive sequence voltage input, e.g. if DFTReference for PR01 is set to AdDFTRefCh7, the PRO7 positive sequence voltage frequency will then be the frequency reference for group 1. If SMAI block for other task times (e.g.13-24 resp 25-36) also are included they can be given the same reference by connecting the output SPFCOUT to input DFTSPSC on the function blocks SMAI 13 resp 25. Function blocks within these task time groups must then have setting e.g. DFTReference=ExternalDFTRef.
REG 670
19
The first function block in the task time group containing the function block sending the signal must have the setting of the DFT reference output set to e.g. DFTRefExtOut= AdDFTRefCh7. Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
2.2
Configuration alternatives
There are four different software alternatives with which the IED can be managed. The intention is that these configurations shall suit most applications with minor or no changes. The configurations are: Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement. Single breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement. Multi breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement. Multi breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement
The Multi breaker arrangement includes One- and a half, Double breaker and Ring breaker arrangements. The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen for the Single phase tripping arrangements along with Multi-breaker arrangement. The basic ordering includes one Binary input module (16 inputs) and one Binary Output module (24 outputs), sufficient for the default configured IO to trip and close circuit breaker and with possible communication interface. Each of the four alternative solutions is of course possible to re-configure to an userdefined configuration. Optional functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. As the standard delivered hardware only includes one binary input and one binary output module only the key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs in the signal matrix tool. The required total IO must be calculated and specified at ordering and the IO adapted with help of the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). Typical connection diagrams are provided in following appendices available in separate documents, refer to section "Related documents"
20
REG 670
1MRK002801-BA 1MRK002801-CA 1MRK002801-DA 1MRK002801-EA
Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement. Single breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement. Multi breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement. Multi breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.
The diagrams show an example of how to connect the primary apparatuses to the IED when also the control functionality is required. It is intended as a reference for the alternative applications. As there normally is two sub-systems and not always all functions in both there is a need for exchange of data between the sub-systems. The configurations are prepared to cover for the most common applications but not all possibilities. The Application configuration tool CAP 531, which is part of the PCM600 engineering platform, will further to the four arrangements above include also alternatives for each of them with all of the software options configured. These can then be used directly or as assistance where only minor adaptation will be necessary. The detailed configuration diagrams are available in separate documents, refer to section "Related documents" The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with application comments to explain why the signals have been connected in the special way. This is of course for the special application features created not standard functionality.
2.3
Adapting a configuration to satisfy special needs

It is recognized that each application is unique. The IED thus offers full flexibility and simple changes and adjustments can easily be made to the delivered configuration. Note also that special user configurations will be supported and IED can thus be delivered with your specific configuration. ABB is of course glad to assist in developing the adapted configuration. When the IED has been received, or before from the configuration templates, there are two possibilities to adapt to the specific needs.
2.3.1
Signal Matrix Tool (SMT)

The PCM 600 engineering platform includes a Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). From this tool inputs and outputs are available and can be tied together in the desirable way. For example. if more signal outputs are required, outputs from functions can be connected to the physical IO with the signal matrix tool. The signal matrix tool uses information from the compiled application configuration performed with CAP 531. At saving the information will be sent to the SMT tool.
REG 670
21
Open the Signal Matrix Tool by a right click on the IED in the Plant structure of PCM 600. The physical IO will show up on the horizontal axis and the virtual IO on the vertical axis. The user has then full freedom for each application to connect the virtual signal from the graphical configuration to analog or digital IO. The physical IO is set up under Application configuration tool in menu Edit/Function selector. In this menu the included IO boards is edited and must match the ordered hardware. It is commonly required that this menu is edited, the configuration compiled and downloaded and then the PST tool can be used to connect the physical inputs with the virtual IO. This is done by entering an X at the connection point between the two. One virtual signal on the vertical axis can be connected to several physical binary IO. One analog input may also be connected to several preprocessing elements for the analog signals.
Figure 4:
Example (RET 670) from signal matrix tool tabs for binary input defines the connection between the physical and virtual IO.
22
REG 670
This gives the user flexibility to connect any signal he needs to an IO without doing any changes in the graphical configuration. To allow full flexibility a number of logically prepared signals has also been generated.
2.3.2
Application configuration tool CAP 531

The application configuration tool allows free configuration of the IED with additional use of any logic element to create special logic e.g. for Auto Switching of Disconnectors in Multi-breaker arrangements. The logic is created by inserting logic blocks and connecting them together. Interface elements to make signals available in the signal matrix tool can also be added so that in future applications the same configuration can be used and the adaptation made with the signal matrix tool.
en05000532.vsd
Figure 5:
A typical view from the application configuration tool showing an added AND element during wiring.
2.4
2.4.1
Preparing a specific application configuration of the IED

Configuring an IED with CAP531
The application configuration tool can be utilized to prepare an adapted IED with special functions when required. Here we are giving some basic guidelines of how to prepare a configuration. It is advisable to start from one of the four basic configurations and delete and add function blocks and connections in the selected configuration, closest to the application. Refer to the Help in CAP 531 for more information. For the basic configuration available in the ordered IED and the alternative configurations available as templates refer to the chapter "Configuration". The PCM 600 toolbox with the configuration tool CAP 531 shall be installed prior to the below sequence.
REG 670
23
Procedure 1. Open the configuration program CAP 531 under the PCM 600 platform by opening Start/Programs/ABB/PCM 600. The below view will show up.
Figure 6:
Open view for PCM 600
2.
3.
Start the configuration tool under the menu or by clicking the wrench symbol. In the configuration tool open the template to start from under Edit. Note that the IED has default configuration as ordered, open the correct or a more suitable alternative template. Default password is abb Information on how to log on as an administrators is available in Operator's manual. Please refer to section "Related documents". The template will be installed and you can see the worksheets used in the template. Open the worksheets to be addition. Check in the configuration diagrams and verify what you need to change e.g. logic added or IO signals modification. Following guidelines can be given.
24
REG 670
New function blocks are added by selecting the function from the function library. It is also possible to copy an existing one by marking it and copying it using Ctrl+C. The following view is shown.
Figure 7:
Adding a new function block
4. 5.
The new function block is selected and added to the worksheet. Note that all inputs needs to be connected either with a signal or with a True (On) or False (Off) signal. Click the input and take key v or click the var symbol to add a variable on an input or output. Type the name you want to use for the signal. Type True or False for fixed On or Off. This is defined on the outputs On-Off for binary status on the Fixed signals function block. The designations there must be used for fixed binary status.
6.
If the input shall be connected to the output on a function close by, take the line tool and connect the two. In case the connection inputs and outputs are in different sheets, variables names will be used and with the same variable name you connect inputs and outputs. An output can be connected to several inputs, e.g. on IO boards, on Trip function block, on an OR, AND or TIMER function block etc. Inputs cannot be connected to several places without an OR gate. When you select your function blocks e.g. logic elements to build a logic you must, for high speed circuits, keep track of the processing order. The processing number is shown on each function block. A sequence should have raising task numbers not to loose one processor loop, e.g. 1, 3, 8 or even 100 ms.
REG 670
25
7.
8. 9.
You can copy and paste variables and function blocks/logic elements. You will at pasting of e.g. an OR gate be requested to select the new one with the correct sequence number. When you are satisfied with the logic you have created, save, close and click on the IED symbol and Compile the configuration. You will then get warnings and errors for all mistakes. All errors must be corrected, warnings can be checked to see if they are acceptable, mostly due to connection of function blocks with different cycle times. Click on the Errors and Warnings in the Error list to directly open the worksheet where the problem is found. Correct all mistakes, save and compile again. When no errors occur, download the configuration to the IED. You must have the correct IP address and you must have either a straight Ethernet cable with a HUB in between or a crossed Ethernet cable when you are directly connected PC-IED.
2.4.2
Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT)

The Signal Monitoring Tool is opened by right clicking and selecting the tool. It gives access to measured values from Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and Measuring function blocks (MMXU). The status update can with a menu symbol be updated.
2.4.3
Using the Event viewer tool

The Event List tool gives access to the locally stored Event lists. It gives access both to the internal signal event list and to the Disturbance report event list where the last 1000 events are stored in a FIFO (First-In-First-Out) list.
2.5
Setting of the IED

The IED are set using the PCM 600 setting tool. The IED is delivered with a default setting where many parameters are selected to be one of the most likely or suitable settings. However of course all important settings such as currents, impedances and times always need to be set. To simplify the use the tool has a normal user view and an advanced user view. The normal user does not need to set parameters defined as parameters for the advanced user. Switching is simply done from the symbols on the toolbar. Setting can be done locally from the HMI or from the engineering tool. The settings are always under password control and the user must log-in with an authority level to match the settings to be changed. The IED has the settings available in six setting groups and switching between these setting groups can be performed either from physical IO or from a SA system or the SCADA system over the communication link. The special function block ACTGROUP is used for this purpose and this switching is not password controlled.
26
REG 670
The function block includes a definition how many setting groups are used to prevent switching to a not set group. The local setting can be blocked after commissioning by activating a digital input or from SA system as defined in the configuration. Default there is a software switch which can be set to block the setting from the HMI.
Figure 8:
A typical view from the PCM 600 setting tool
A special function block is included for block of setting changes, locally of from the tool. This should be activated from a physical input at the end of commissioning to prevent changes of setting in a commissioned station as setting changes requires new commissioning. If setting changes are required these should be prepared in a separate setting group and tested and activated by a setting group switching.
2.6
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based on the following facts:
REG 670
27
There are two types of points of access to the IED 670: local, through the local HMI remote, through the communication ports
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined as follows:
Access rights Read only Full access Read only + control Control from LHMI, no bypass All settings Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT) User and password administration for the IED
User type Guest SuperUser SPAGuest SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
2.6.1
Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:
28
REG 670
Figure 9:
Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.
By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side panel:
REG 670
29
Figure 10:
User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users and Groups existent in the IED. If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing settings in the User Management Tool database. Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group. If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add, delete and edit users. To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black arrow, see figure 11 on the User subtab:
30
REG 670
Figure 11:
User subtab and creation of a new user.
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Figure 12:
Enter details about the user.
REG 670
31
Figure 13:
Assign the user to a group.
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 14
Figure 14:
No. Description 1 2 3
Operations on users in the users list.
Delete selected user Change password Add another group to the user permissions
The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
32
REG 670
Figure 15:
The Groups subtab.
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab. The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components. Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as from the other tools:
No. Description 1 2 Upload from IED Download to IED
REG 670
33
Section 2 Engineering of the IED 2.6.2 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application manual for more details. Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn, introducing the password assigned in the tool. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message box saying: No user defined! If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings \General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery. If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again. If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.
2.7
Blocking of setting after commissioning of the IED

It is important to ensure that a commissioned station may not be changed without a new commissioning. Settings or configurations may not be changed without a new commissioning with a new test record. To prevent changes a CHANGE LOCK function block is used and activated when commissioning is finalized. This block is preferably enabled by a field contact input from a key switch. This can be done by mapping the ChangeLock input to a binary input in the relay, which is energized by the key switch input or a disconnecting terminal link when commissioning is finalized, see figure 16..
34
REG 670
Alternatively it can be arranged with an internal blocking e.g. by a General switch which can be controlled from the HMI and switched On when commissioning is finalized. It should require a special knowledge to open up the change possibility so it advisable to use this function block. Refer to below figure.
+ Disconnectable terminal or key-switch ChangeLock
en05000754.vsd
Figure 16:
Blocking of setting
For example, the COMBIFLEX key selector or an FT switch can be used for this purpose.
2.8
How to use the configurable logics blocks

The IED has a very powerful logic capability. Logic blocks of each type are available in different task times and task orders. This allows the user to define own logic with all the logic elements and function in the correct sequence. At creating the logic the elements sequence number and task times should always be checked and logic components with the suitable values selected. An example of a logic with increasing sequence number throughout the logic.
en05000537.vsd
Figure 17:
It is important to ensure that the task numbers are in sequence to have a fast processing of logic.
REG 670
35
2.9
Some application ideas

The advanced logic capabilities and the flexible functions give the user a possibility to manage any type of application. Below some examples are given to show the possibilities.
2.9.1
Voltage selection
The Busbar voltage must in many cases be used as reference for line or bay protection. Examples are: Line distance protection where the busbar is provided with three phase voltage transformers and the lines with only single-phase sets for Synchronism check reference. The Synchronism check function in IED 670 has a built-in voltage selection. Bus voltage protection e.g. Over- and Undervoltage, Over- and Underfrequency protection functions in the bay. Voltage reference for metering functions - where three phase voltage transformers does not exist on the object. A voltage selection can be created in IED 670 with a user defined logic where positions of disconnectors (and breakers) are used to create the required voltage selection. An example is shown in figure 18 where the voltage transformers for a double bus system are connected to the line protection function, which may be line distance relays or voltage or frequency relays. Supervision of the fuse/MCB failures can be fed through the same logic and connected to e.g. block operation of undervoltage functions. It is also a possible to block functions when both disconnectors are open.
36
REG 670
Figure 18:
The voltage selection logic for busbar voltage transformers in a double bus arrangement.
2.9.2
Fuse failure protection

It is possible to create a fuse failure protection (60) based on comparison from two fuse groups on the same voltage transformer or two fuses on separate voltage transformers windings or voltage transformers on the same bus. The signal can be used to block protection functions and give alarms. The proposed scheme is based on comparison of not simultaneous occurring negative sequence voltage on the two voltage sources. Overvoltage functions measuring negative sequence voltage and Undervoltage function measuring positive sequence voltages are combined as shown in figure 19. The negative sequence part will detect one and two phase fuse failures and the positive sequence part will detect three phase fuse failures. Due to the combination it can detect failures of fuses as well as MCBs.
REG 670
37
Figure 19:
Arrangement of Multipurpose functions to measure fuse failures
2.9.3
Automatic opening of a transformer disconnector and closing the ring breakers

The available function blocks to create user defined logic can be utilized for many functions. One example is to open the transformer High voltage disconnector at internal transformer faults in multi-breaker arrangements and then close the ring or one- and a half breaker diameter. The logic can include status supervision before the fault was tripped to ensure that the sequence is only closing apparatuses already closed before the fault, information about the fault to ensure it was a transformer fault, check that the disconnector is open before the breaker/s is/are closed and verification that the new status has been reached before next sequence is started. Detailed pictures are not shown here for want of space. Please contact ABB for more details on such special logic schemes.
38
REG 670
Section 2 Engineering of the IED 2.9.4 Automatic load transfer from bus A to bus B
With transformer applications it is sometimes required to automatically transfer the load from one transformer to the other. It includes closing bus tie and closing transformer breakers. It mostly also involves switching back after the normal supply has been restored to the original transformer. The load transfer scheme includes a combination of advance logic checking apparatus positions and the measurement of bus and transformer voltage and the use of Synchronism check device to control the closing. An advanced alternative exists for generating stations where the unit transformer supplies will need to synchronize at switching and this synchronizing is done on a decaying bus voltage on voltage level as well as frequency level depending on the available synchronous and asynchronous machines maintaining the bus voltage. It shall be noticed that the exchange of information between IEDs of the two transformers can be with peer- to-peer communication across IEC61850-8-1 or over LON bus as alternative to a hardwire connection. With the fast Goose IO transfer times are in the level 4 ms which is sufficient also for this type of logic. Detailed pictures are not shown here for want of space. Please contact ABB for more details on such special logic schemes.
2.10
Testing of the IED

The testing requirement is minimized with the use of an advanced internal self supervision. This in, combination with the numerical design and the use of measured values in the substation control, means that the need of scheduled maintenance testing does not exist. However, during commissioning, changes in the system with setting or configuration changes etc. there is a need of simple access to test the IED 670. The test interface is preferably done with test switches from the ABB FT Switch or COMBITEST test system. These COMBITEST test switches and test handles or plugs provide a high amount of IO allowing test of integrated IEDs such as the IED 670 family. Test switch contacts should be provided on selected inputs and outputs to allow verification of setting values such as current, voltage, impedance and set timers. Due to the high amount of functionality some interfaces must be switched off in software. It is then important to ensure that e.g. times to trip can be measured from other signals with test switches. In the connection diagrams for the four configurations, the typical location of test switch contacts is indicated. The outputs without test switches must either be provided with a second test switch or blocked by software. This can be done e.g. by blocking virtual outputs SMBO with In test condition. The In test is with COMBTEST test switches RTXP24 provided by contact 29-30 (early closing) activating a binary input and connected to the test function block. Alternatively a test switch finger from FT can be wired to the binary input to achieve similar function.
REG 670
39
2.11
2.11.1
Engineering checklist
How to use the IED in conjunction with PCM 600 toolbox
The below check list gives a short guideline of how to use the protection and control IED with help of the PCM 600 toolbox. Uploading of disturbance record is not included below but is available from PCM 600. Procedure 1. 2. 3. Select the IED configuration. The IED is available with four alternative configurations as described above. Select and order the IED which best suits the application. There are a number of templates including options for your use. Check which one is the most suitable for your application. Adjust the configuration if required by adjusting the input and outputs with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) in PCM 600. If you have added physical IO compared to the default single Binary input module and Binary output module you need to add this in CAP 531 under Edit/ Function selector. This is required to have the physical IO showing up in the SMT tool. Also decide on how many setting groups you will be using. Select the number of setting groups in CAP 531 on the Activate setting group function block. If more logic adjustments are necessary open the configuration tool CAP 531 and perform the changes, add logic gates, change connections, add connections etc. Save the IED, compile and download to the relay. At compilations you can get warnings and errors. Warnings are normal as e.g. warnings for different cycle times connected which is bound to happen. Errors are defined as mistakes needing to be corrected. Click the error in the error list, this will open up the location on the worksheet with the error and allow you to find the mistake. 6. 7. 8. Set the IED with use of the PCM 600 Parameter Setting Tool PST. Adjust the setting to the values suitable for your application. Remember to also do the general settings. General setting values have only one set and are the basic parameters such as CT and VT ratios etc. Download to the IED, you can download from any level in your structure but ensure to download all parts. The active setting group function block ACGR has a setting parameter where the number of setting groups in use can be set. This is important and will minimize the risk of someone switching to a setting group which has not been verified at commissioning. The default setting is use of one group and this
4.
5.
40
REG 670
setting will also decide how many setting groups are initiated in the parameter setting menu. 9. Test the IED. Use the Debug tool in the CAP 531 configuration tool to see online the status of digital signals. This simplifies the evaluation. Note that faults need to be put on continuously to follow a fault signal as the debug update time is on second level. 10. Check also Measurements/Functions where each function measured result can be seen. This shows mistakes in CT or VT settings, mistakes in setting function ON-OFF etc. If values do not show up the most probably reason is that it is OFF, secondly it can be incorrect configured. If the function is ON, open the CAP, not in debug mode, and upload options from the relay. 11. Click the Red-Green Leaf and update the function block from the occurring list. You will notice if e.g. the function has not been ordered as it will not show up as available. 12. Save, Compile and download again. If that does not take care of the problem, contact ABB SA-T Supportline. Exercise caution when high currents are applied which might thermally stress the relay.
REG 670
41
42
Section 3 Requirements
Section 3
Requirements
About this chapter
This chapter describes current and voltage transformer requirements.
3.1
Current transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured current signal. Saturation of the current transformer (CT) will cause distortion of the current signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been designed to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.
3.1.1
Current transformer classification

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To fulfil the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfil the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below. There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are usually specified and manufactured according to some international or national standards, which specify different protection classes as well. There are many different standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are three different types of CTs: High remanence type CT Low remanence type CT Non remanence type CT
The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic core without any airgap and a remanent flux might remain almost infinite time. In this type of transformers the remanence can be up to around 80% of the saturation flux. Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX, TPS, TPX according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and nongapped class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE. The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made with a small airgap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of the saturation flux. The small airgap has only very limited influence on the other properties of the CT. Class PR, TPY according to IEC are low remanence type CTs. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 43
The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This type of CT has relatively big airgaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically zero level. In the same time, these airgaps reduce the influence of the DC-component from the primary fault current. The airgaps will also decrease the measuring accuracy in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non remanence type CT. Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044 6 standard is used to specify the CT requirements for IED 670. The requirements are also specified according to other standards.
3.1.2
Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator. The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non remanence type CTs (TPZ). The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120 ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Depending on the protection function phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions e.g. close in forward and reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The dependability and security of the protection was verified by checking e.g. time delays, unwanted operations, directionality, overreach and stability. The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for the security, e.g. faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (e.g. TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current transformers of high remanence type (e.g. P, PX, TPS, TPX) the small probability of fully asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at approximately zero voltage (0). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
44
REG 670
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. In addition fully asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.
3.1.3
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.
3.1.4
Secondary wire resistance and additional load

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For earth faults the loop includes both the phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case. The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resistance, the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the calculation for three-phase faults. As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-toearth faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-toearth fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-earth fault can be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden. In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not the dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single secondary wire always can be used in the calculation, for this case.
3.1.5
General current transformer requirements

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data like e.g. maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected with the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is different for different functions and normally settable so each function should be checked.
REG 670
45
The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that is less than 1% (e.g. 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.
3.1.6
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used. The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. Requirements for CTs specified in different ways are given at the end of this section.
3.1.6.1
Transformer differential protection

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
E al E alreq = 30 I nt
Isn S R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 1)
E al E alreq = 2 I tf
Isn S R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 2)
where: Int Itf Ipn Isn Ir The rated primary current of the power transformer (A) Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs and the power transformer (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The rated current of the protection IED (A)
Table continued on next page
46
REG 670
RCT RL
The secondary resistance of the CT (W) The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems. The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and Sr=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
SR
In substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement, the fault current may pass two main CTs for the transformer differential protection without passing the power transformer. In such cases and if both main CTs have equal ratios and magnetization characteristics the CTs must satisfy equation 1 and equation 3.
E al E alreq = If
Isn I pn
S R CT + R L + R I2 r
(Equation 3)
where: If Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs without passing the power transformer (A)
3.1.7
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards

All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with REx 670 IEDs if they fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. From different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By comparing this with the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to some other standards are specified below.
3.1.7.1
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR

A CT according to IEC 60044-1 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max. The value of the E2max is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044-6. Therefore, the CTs according to class P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max that fulfills the following:
E 2 max > max imum of E alreq
(Equation 4)
REG 670
47
3.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS (and old British Standard, class X)
CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting secondary voltage Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044-6. It is not possible to give a general relation between the Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore, the CTs according to class PX, X and TPS must have a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee that fulfills the following:
Eknee Ek EkneeBS Ual > 0.8 (maximum of Ealreq)
(Equation 5)
3.1.7.3
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A rated secondary terminal voltage UANSI is specified for a CT of class C. UANSI is the secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of standardized UANSI values e.g. UANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as follows:
E a lANSI = 20 I s n R C T + U A NSI = 20 I s n R C T + 20 Is n Z b ANSI
(Equation 6)
where: ZbANSI UANSI The impedance (i.e. complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class (W ) The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)
The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfills the following:
E alANSI > max imum of E alreq
(Equation 7)
A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee-point voltage UkneeANSI normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS. UkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044 6. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/IEEE must have a knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following:
EkneeANSI > 0.75 (maximum of Ealreq)
(Equation 8)
48
REG 670
3.2
Voltage transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured input signal. Transients caused by capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) can affect some protection functions. Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used. The capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) should fulfill the requirements according to the IEC 600445 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferroresonance requirements of the CVTs are specified in chapter 7.4 of the standard. The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2 and T3 are specified in chapter 15.5 of the standard. CVTs according to all classes can be used. The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and correct operation with CVTs.
3.3
SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
REG 670
49
50
Section 4 IED application
Section 4
IED application
About this chapter
This chapter describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The chapter discuss application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application.
4.1
General IED application

The REG 670 IED is used for protection, control and monitoring of generators and generator-transformer blocks from relatively small units up to the largest generating units. The IED has a comprehensive function library, covering the requirements for most generator applications. The large number of analog inputs available enables, together with the large functional library, integration of many functions in one IED. In typical applications two units can provide total functionality, also providing a high degree of redundancy. REG 670 can as wll be used for protection and control of shunt reactors. The protection function library includes differential protection for generator, block, auxiliary transformer and the whole generator block. Stator earth fault protection, both traditional 95% protection as well as 100% 3rd harmonic based stator earth fault protection are included. The 100% protection uses a differential voltage approach giving high sensitivity and a high degree of security. Well proven algorithms for pole slip, underexcitation, rotor earth fault, negative sequence current protections, etc. are included in the IED. The generator differential protection in the REG 670 IED adapted to operate correctly for generator applications where factors as long DC time constants and requirement on short trip time have been considered. As many of the protection functions can be used as multiple instances there are possibilities to protect more than one object in one IED. It is possible to have protection for an auxiliary power transformer integrated in the same IED having main protections for the generator. The concept thus enables very cost effective solutions. The REG 670 IED also enables valuable monitoring possibilities as many of the process values can be transferred to an operator HMI. The wide application flexibility makes this product an excellent choice for both new installations and for refurbishment in existing power plants. Serial data communication is via optical connections to ensure immunity against disturbances.
REG 670
51
The wide application flexibility makes this product an excellent choice for both new installations and the refurbishment of existing installations.
4.2
4.2.1
Analog inputs
Application
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading. VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).
4.2.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
4.2.2.1
Setting of the phase reference channel

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference
Example
The setting PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if a phase-to-earth voltage (usually the L1 phase-to-earth voltage connected to VT channel number 7 of the analog card) is selected to be the phase reference.
52
REG 670

Setting of current channels
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See figure 20
Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse
Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd
Figure 20:
Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670.
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. The following examples show the principle.
Example 1
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects
REG 670
53
Line
Ip
Transformer
Ip
Ip
Line
Reverse Forward
Is
Transformer protection
Definition of direction for directional functions Is
Line protection
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000753.vsd
Figure 21:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670
The figure 21 shows the most normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that the protection is looking towards the line.
Example 2
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT
54
REG 670
Transformer Line
Reverse Forward
Transformer protection
Definition of direction for directional functions
Line protection
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000460.vsd
Figure 22:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670.
This example is similar to example 1 but the transformer is feeding just one line and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same current from the same CT that is feeding two IEDs. With these settings the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the line.
Example 3
One IED used to protect two objects
REG 670
55
Transformer Line
Forward Reverse
Transformer and Line protection
Definition of direction for directional line functions
en05000461.vsd
Figure 23:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670
In this example one IED includes both transformer and line protection and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input channels the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look towards the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is the transformer in this case. When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction it shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind and check if it is acceptable for the application in question. If the IED has a sufficient number of analog current inputs an alternative solution is shown in figure 24. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to protect the line.
56
REG 670
Transformer Line
Reverse Forward
Transformer and Line protection
Definition of direction for directional line functions
Setting of current input for transformer functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input for transformer functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input for line functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000462.vsd
Figure 24:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670.
REG 670
57
Busbar
Busbar Protection 1
en06000196.vsd
Figure 25:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters for REB 670
For busbar protection it is possible to set the CTStarPoint parameters in two ways. The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject. The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject. Regardless which one of the above two options is selected busbar differential protection will behave correctly.
58
REG 670
The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/1 A CT the following setting shall be used: CTprim=1000 (value in A) CTsec=1 (value in A).
Examples how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most commonly used CT connections
Figure 26 defines the marking of current transformers terminals commonly used around the world:
P1 (H1)
S1 (X1)
ISec
P2 (H2)
S2 (X2)
IPri
x P2 (H2) a) b)
S2 (X2)
x P1 (H1) c)
S1 (X1)
en06000641.vsd
Figure 26:
Where: a) b) and c)
Commonly used markings of CT terminals
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that for this two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values: 1A 5A
However in some cases the following rated secondary currents are as well used: 2A 10A
IED 670 fully supports all of these rated secondary values. It is recommended to:
REG 670
59
use 1A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with 1A and 2A secondary rating use 5A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with 5A and 10A secondary rating
Figure 27 gives an example how to connect the star connected three-phase CT set to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
L1 L2 L3
Example how to connect starwye connected three-phase CT set to IED 670
IED 670
3 1 IL1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AI01 (I) AI02 (I) AI03 (I) AI04 (I) AI05 (I) AI06 (I)
IL2
IL1
IL3
4
#3Ph I Star #IL1 #IL2 #IL3 #IR #2
CT 600/5 Star Connected
IL2 IL3 IR
9 10 11 12
Protected Object
en06000642.vsd
Figure 27:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point towards the protected object
Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from star connected three-phase CT set to three CT inputs in IED 670. shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth inputs in IED 670. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made the IED 670 will still calculate this current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
60
REG 670
3)
is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered. CTprim=600A CTsec=5A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already measured towards the protected object). 4) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs. is a connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current is not connected to IED 670. In that case the pre-processing block will calculate it by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
5)
6)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in figure 28:
REG 670
61
L1
L2
L3
IED 670
6 3 IR 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
IL2
IL1
IL3
4
#3Ph I Star #IL1 #IL2 #IL3 #IR #2
IL3 IL2 CT 800/1 Star Connected IL1
Protected Object
en06000644.vsd
Figure 28:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point from the protected object
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered: CTprim=800A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=FromObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180) in order to insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the protected object.
Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to IED 670
Figure 29 gives an example how to connect the delta connected three-phase CT set to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
62
REG 670
L1
L2
L3
IED 670
5
IL2
IL1
IL3
2 1 IL1-IL2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 AI06 (I) AI05 (I) AI04 (I) AI03 (I) AI02 (I) AI01 (I)
3
#3Ph I Delta #IL1-IL2 #IL2-IL3 #IL3-IL1 #Not used #2
CT 600/5 in Delta DAB Connected
IL2-IL3 IL3-IL1
Protected Object
en06000645.vsd
Figure 29:
Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from delta connected three-phase CT set to three CT inputs in IED 670. is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered. CTprim=600/1.732=346A CTsec=5A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already measured towards the protected object). Table continued on next page
REG 670
63
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs. shows that the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block shall not be connected in SMT. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4) 5)
Another alternative is ti have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 30:
L1 L2 L3
IED 670
5
IL2
IL3
IL1
2 3 IL1-IL3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
#3Ph I Delta #IL1-IL2 #IL2-IL3 #IL3-IL1 #Not used #2
CT 800/1 in Delta DCA Connected
AI01 (I) AI02 (I) AI03 (I) AI04 (I)
IL2-IL1 IL3-IL2
4 AI05 (I) AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000646.vsd
Figure 30:
Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered:
64
REG 670
CTprim=800/1.732=462A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already measured towards the protected object).
Example how to connect single-phase CT to IED 670
Figure 31 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
IED 670
Protected Object
2
1 2 AI01 (I) AI02 (I) AI03 (I)
L1
L2
L3
3 4 5 6 7
3
AI04 (I) AI05 (I) AI06 (I)
#NP Current #Not used #Not used #Not used #INP #2
CT 1000/1
1 INP
8 9 10 11
INP
12
4
INP
en06000647.vsd
Figure 31:
Connections for single-phase CT input
REG 670
65
Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in IED 670. is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered. For connection a) shown in figure 31: CTprim=1000A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already measured towards the protected object). For connection b) shown in figure 31: CTprim=1000A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180o) in order to insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the protected object. 3) 4) 5) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this CT input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
As the IED uses primary system quantities the main VT ratios must be known. This is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel. The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phaseto-earth voltage from the VT.
Setting of voltage channels
Example
Consider a VT with the following data:
132kV 110V 3 3
(Equation 9)
66
REG 670
The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=110 (value in V)
Figure 32 defines the marking of voltage transformers terminals commonly used around the world.
Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most commonly used VT connections
+
UPri
+
USec
A (H1)
a (X1)
A (H1)
da (X1)
A (H1)
a (X1)
a)
N (H2)
b)
n (X2)
N (H2)
c)
dn (X2)
B (H2)
d)
b (X2)
en06000591.vsd
Figure 32:
Where: a) b) c) d)
Commonly used markings of VT terminals
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-earth connected VT is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta connected VT is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase connected VT
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values: 100 V 110 V 115 V 120 V
IED 670 fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the following examples.
Examples how to connect three phase-to-earthground connected VTs to IED 670
Figure 33 gives an example how to connect the three phase-to ground connected VTs to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
REG 670
67
L1 L2 L3 66kV 3
IED 670
2 3 5
110V 3
13 14 15 16 17 18 AI08 (U) AI09 (U) AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U) AI07 (I)
#3Ph-E VTs #UL1 #UL2 #UL3 #Not used #1
66kV 3
19
110V 3
20 21 22 23 24
66kV 3
110V 3
en06000599.vsd
Figure 33:
Three phase-to-ground connected VTs

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-earth voltages to three VT inputs in IED 670 is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered: VTprim=66 kV VTsec= 110 V Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.
66 110
66 = 3 110 3
68
REG 670
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Uo inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first three input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively the fourth input channel can be connected to open delta VT input, as shown in figure 35. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4)
5)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the following settings shall be set as shown here: VBase=66 kV (i.e. rated Ph-Ph voltage) If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Example how to connect two phase-to-phase connected VTs to IED 670
Figure 34 gives an example how to connect the two phase-to-phase connected VTs to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670. It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels (i.e. rated primary voltage below 40 kV).
REG 670
69
L1 L2 L3
13.8kV 120V 13.8kV 120V
IED 670
2 3 1
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 AI12 (U) AI11 (U) AI10 (U) AI09 (U) AI08 (U) AI07 (I)
#3Ph-Ph VTs #UL1L2 #UL2L3 #UL3L1 #Not Used #1
en06000600.vsd
Figure 34:
Two phase-to-phase connected VTs

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect secondary side of two phase-to-phase VTs to three VT inputs in IED 670 is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered: VTprim=13.8 kV VTsec=120 V Please note that inside IED 670 only ratio of these two parameters is used.
70
REG 670
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4) 5)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the following settings shall be set as shown here: ConnectionType=Ph-Ph VBase=13.8 kV If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high impedance earthedgrounded or unearthedungrounded
Figure 35 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo3Vo to the IED. In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo3Vo will be equal to:
3Uo = 3 U Ph - Ph = 3 U Ph - E
(Equation 11)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E. Therefore, three series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal to three times the individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (i.e. 110/3V in this particular example). Figure 35 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
REG 670
71
L1 L2 L3
6.6kV 3
IED 670
2
13
110V 3
14 15 16 17 18
AI07 (I) AI08 (U) AI09 (U)
6.6kV 3
19 20 21 22 23 24
3
AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U)
#3Uo Voltage #Not Used #Not Used #Not Used #3Uo #1
110V 3
+3Uo
6.6kV 3
110V 3
en06000601.vsd
Figure 35:
Open delta connected VT in high impedance earthed power system

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670. Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED! is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
3 6.6 = 11.43kV
VT sec = 3
110 3
= 110V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
3 6.6 110
6.6 = 3 110 3
72
REG 670
3) 4) 5)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low impedance earthedgrounded or solidly earthedgrounded power systems
Figure 36 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo to the IED. In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will be equal to:
3Uo = U Ph - Ph 3 = U Ph - E
(Equation 15)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E Therefore, three series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (i.e. 115V or (115/1.732)V as in this particular example). Figure 36 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
REG 670
73
L1 L2 L3
138 kV 3
IED 670
2
13 14 15 16 17 18 AI08 (U) AI09 (U)
115V 3
AI07 (I)
138kV 3
19 20 21 22 23 24
3
AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U)
#3Uo Voltage #Not used #Not used #Not used #3Uo #1
115V 3
+3Uo
138 kV 3
115V 3
en06000602.vsd
Figure 36:
Open delta connected VT in low impedance earthed power system

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670. Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED! is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
138 3
= 138kV
VT sec =
115 3
= 115V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
138 115
138 = 3 115 3
74
REG 670
3) 4) 5)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
Example how to connect the neutral point VT to IED 670
Figure 37 gives an example how to connect the neutral point VT to IED 670. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional toUo to the IED. In case of a solid ground fault in high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems the primary value of Uo voltage will be equal to:
Uo = U Ph - Ph 3 VPh - Ph 3 = U Ph - E = VPh - Gnd
(Equation 19)
Vo =
Figure 37 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
REG 670
75
IED 670
Protected Object
2
13 14 AI07 (I) AI08 (I) AI09 (I)
L1
L2
L3
15 16 17 18 19 20
3
AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U)
#NP Voltage #Not used #Not used #Not used #UNP #1
21 22 23
Uo
24
6.6 kV 3
100V
en06000603.vsd
Figure 37:
Neutral point connected VT

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect the secondary side of neutral point VT to one VT input in IED 670. Please note that +Uo shall be connected to the IED! is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
6.6 3
= 3.81kV
VT sec = 100V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of the neutral point VT. Table continued on next page
76
REG 670
3) 4) 5)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4.2.3
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 1:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef
General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range 1 - 24 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation
Table 2:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current
CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2
1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec2
1 - 10
REG 670
77

Parameter CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 Range 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject Step 1 Default 3000 ToObject Unit A Description Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec8 CTprim8
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
78
REG 670

Parameter CTStarPoint9 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec12 CTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
Table 3:
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec2
1 - 10
REG 670
79

Parameter CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 Range 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject Step 1 Default 3000 ToObject Unit A Description Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec8 CTprim8
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
80
REG 670

Parameter CTStarPoint9 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05
1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00
A A V kV V kV V kV
Table 4:
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec3 CTprim3
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
REG 670
81

Parameter CTStarPoint4 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05
1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00
A A V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV
82
REG 670
Table 5:
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I (TB40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
REG 670
83
4.3
4.3.1
Local human-machine interface

Human machine interface
The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability. The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects. The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality: Status indication LEDs Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool Liquid crystal display (LCD) Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset An isolated RJ45 communication port
Figure 38:
Example of medium graphic HMI
84
REG 670
Section 4 IED application 4.3.2

4.3.2.1
LHMI related functions

Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with: function block LHMI (LocalHMI) function block HLED (LEDMonitor) setting parameters
4.3.2.2
General setting parameters

Table 6:
Parameter Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat
Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Step 10 Default English 60 On Unit Min Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of autorepeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram
ContrastLevel DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont
1 1 -
0 0 Latest on top IEC
% -
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
REG 670
85
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to Technical reference manual.
4.3.3.2
Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax
Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Unit s s Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Sequence type for LED 2
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
86
REG 670

Parameter SeqTypeLED8 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description sequence type for LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
REG 670
87
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
Basic IED functions

Self supervision with internal event list
Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex design with many included functions. The included self-supervision function and the INTernal signals function block provide good supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault. Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through the software communication. Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated. Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the status changes for the: built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order). external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).
Events are also generated: whenever any setting in the IED is changed.
The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot be modified. The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during commissioning and fault tracing. The information can only be retrieved with the aid of a Station Monitoring System (SMS). The PC can be connected either to the port at the front or at the rear of the IED.
4.4.1.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
88
REG 670

4.4.2.1
Time synchronization
Application
Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in the system possible. Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation. In the IED 670 IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources: BIN (Binary Minute Pulse) GPS SNTP
Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages: Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond. Fine time messages are sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The setting tells the IED which of these that shall be used to synchronize the IED. It is possible to set several time-sources, i.e. for instance both SNTP and GPS, and in that case the IED will automatically choose the time-source that will provide the best accuracy. At a given point in time, only one time-source will be used.
4.4.2.2
Setting guidelines
System time The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond. Synchronization The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization (TIME) are set via the local HMI or the PCM 600 tool. TimeSynch When the source of time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from the PCM 600 tool. The setting alternatives are: FineSyncSource which can have the following values:
REG 670
89
Off SPA LON BIN (Binary Minute Pulse) GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP
CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values: Off SPA LON SNTP DNP
The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called TIMEMINSYNC. The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds).
4.4.2.3
Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
90
REG 670
Table 8:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Off SPA LON SNTP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Off
SyncMaster
Off
Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization
TimeAdjustRate
Fast
Table 9:
Parameter ModulePosition
General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range 3 - 16 Step 1 Default 3 Unit Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection
BinaryInput
1 - 16
BinDetection
PositiveEdge NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Table 10:
Parameter ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add
General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Unit Description Server IP-address Redundant server IPaddress
REG 670
91
Table 11:
Parameter MonthInYear
General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default March Unit Description Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts
92
REG 670
Table 12:
Parameter MonthInYear
General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default October Unit Description Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends
Table 13:
Parameter NoHalfHourUTC
General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range -24 - 24 Step 1 Default 0 Unit Description Number of half-hours from UTC
Table 14:
Parameter SynchType TimeDomain Encoding
Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Unit Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
REG 670
93

4.4.3.1
Parameter setting groups

Application
Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios. Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the conditions in the power system. Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pretested settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals. A function block, SGC, (available in CAP 531) defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each application. Only the number of setting groups set will be available in PST for activation with the ACGR function block.
4.4.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting ActiveSetGrp, which is set via from the local HMI or from the PCM600 tool, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The active group can also be selected with configured input to the function block SGC. The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal SETCHGD when an active group has changed, is set with the parameter t. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.
4.4.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 15:
Parameter t
General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range 0.0 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit s Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed
94
REG 670
Table 16:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp
General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Step Default SettingGroup1 Unit Description ActiveSettingGroup
NoOfSetGrp
No
Number of possible setting groups to switch between
4.4.4
4.4.4.1
Test mode functionality

Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex configuration with many included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature to individually block a single, several or all functions. This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct functionality and to check parts of the configuration etc.
4.4.4.2
Setting guidelines
Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the Test mode: On state. If, at the end of one test, you took off the IED from the Test mode, but the functions are still shown being in the test mode, check your configuration you might have the input on the TEST function block activated.
4.4.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 17:
Parameter TestMode
Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode
EventDisable CmdTestBit
Off Off
REG 670
95

4.4.5.1
IED identifiers
Application
The IED identifier function is divided into two parts. One part handles factory defined settings and the other part handles customer specific settings.
Factory defined settings
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under: Diagnostics/IED status/Product Identifiers The following identifiers are available: IEDType Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670 Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.1.r01 Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51 Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.1.r01) there can be one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in between releases. Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line protection). ProductDef FirmwareVer
IEDMainFunType
SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate
Customer specific settings
The customer specific settings are used to give the IED an unique name and address. The settings are used by a central control system, for instance micro scada, to communicate with the IED. The customer specific identifiers are found in the local HMI under: Settings/General settings/Power system/Identifiers The settings can also be made from the PCM600 tool. For more information about the available identifiers, refer to section "Setting parameters".
96
REG 670

4.4.5.2 Setting parameters
Table 18:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber
General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Unit Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
Rated system frequency (RFR)

Application
The rated system frequency is set under General settings/Power system/Primary Values in PCM 600 parameter setting tree.
4.4.6.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)" for description on frequency tracking.
4.4.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 19:
Parameter Frequency
General settings for the RatedFreq (RFR--) function

Range 50.0 - 60.0 Step 10.0 Default 60.0 Unit Hz Description Rated system frequency
4.4.7
4.4.7.1
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Application
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
REG 670
97

4.4.7.2 Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBI available to the user in PST. However, the user must give a name to the SMBI instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.7.3
Setting parameters
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Application
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.8.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBO available to the user in PST. However, the user must give a name to the SMBO instance and the SMBO outputs, directly in the CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.8.3
Setting parameters
4.4.9
4.4.9.1
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

Application
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (please see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.9.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMMI available to the user in PST. However, the user must give a name to the SMMI instance and the SMMI inputs, directly in the CAP tool.
98
REG 670

4.4.10
4.4.10.1
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Application
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block PreProc, as it is also named) is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.10.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM 600). Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates, etc. 244 values in total). Besides the block group name, the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names that can be set directly in CAP, the user has several settings available in PST: DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid for function block PR01, PR13, PR25 only. Reference DFT block for external output (SPFCOUT function output). DFTReference: Reference DFT block for that specific instance of the SMAI. These DFT reference block settings decide which DFT block will be used as reference in the calculation of frequency and other values (Internal DFTRef will use set system frequency. GrpnAdDFTRef will use calculated frequency from the selected group block, ExternalDFTRef will use input DFTSPFC as frequency reference.) ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the SMAI (if it is Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected Ph-N or Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated. Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph +N; negation means rotation with 180 of the vectors. UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n). MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
REG 670
99
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Examples of adaptive frequency tracking
Task time group 1 SMAI instance 3 phase group PR01 1 PR02 2 PR03 3 PR04 4 PR05 5 PR06 6 PR07 7 PR08 8 PR09 9 PR10 10 PR11 11 PR12 12 Task time group 2 SMAI instance 3 phase group PR13 1 PR14 2 PR15 3 PR16 4 PR17 5 PR18 6 PR19 7 PR20 8 PR21 9 PR22 10 PR23 11 PR24 12 Task time group 3 SMAI instance 3 phase group PR25 1 PR26 2 PR27 3 PR28 4 PR29 5 PR30 6 PR31 7 PR32 8 PR33 9 PR34 10 PR35 11 PR36 12
en07000197.vsd
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh4
Figure 39:
SMAI instances as organized in different task time groups and the corresponding parameter numbers
The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the actual application. Example 1
100
REG 670
PR13SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY
07000198.vsd
Figure 40:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference
Assume instance PR07 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking. Observe that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type. For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 39 for numbering): PR01: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh7 to route PR07 reference to the SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR01 to use PR07 as reference (see Figure 40) PR02 PR12: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR02 PR12 to use PR07 as reference. For task time group 2 this gives the following settings: PR13 PR24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (PR07) For task time group 3 this gives the following settings: PR25 PR36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (PR07) Example 2
REG 670
101
07000199.vsd
Figure 41:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT reference.
Assume instance PR16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 39 for numbering): PR01 PR12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (PR16) For task time group 2 this gives the following settings: PR13: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh4 to route PR16 reference to the SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 for PR13 to use PR16 as reference (see Figure 41) PR14 PR24: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 to use DFTSPFC input as reference (PR16) For task time group 3 this gives the following settings: PR25 PR36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (PR16)
4.4.10.3
Setting parameters
102
REG 670
Table 20:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference for external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ph-N 1
Ch
Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 21:
Parameter Negation
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
REG 670
103
Table 22:
Parameter DFTReference
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ph-N 1
Ch
Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 23:
Parameter Negation
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
4.4.11
4.4.11.1
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Application
The analog summation block SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
4.4.11.2
Setting guidelines
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks. The summation block has several settings. SummationType: Summation type (Group 1+ Group2, Group 1 Group 2, Group 2Group 1 or (Group1 + Group 2)). DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref, Grp1AdDFTRef or External DFT ref) as above.
104
REG 670
FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n). UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n).
4.4.11.3
Setting parameters
Table 24:
Parameter SummationType
Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 (Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref Step Default Group1+Group2 Unit Description Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 25:
Parameter FreqMeasMinVal
Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit % Description Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
4.4.12
4.4.12.1
Authority status (AUTS)

Application
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
The two outputs of the AUTS function block can be used in the configuration for different indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same purpose.
REG 670
105

4.4.13
4.4.13.1
Goose binary receive

Setting parameters
Table 26:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On
4.5
4.5.1
Differential protection
Generator differential protection (PDIF, 87G)
Function block name: GDPx ANSI number: 87G IEC 61850 logical node name: GENPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Id>
4.5.1.1
Application
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large fault currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and stator core. The large short circuit currents cause large current forces, which can damage other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-turbine shaft. The short circuit can also initiate explosion and fire. When a short circuit occurs in a generator there is a damage that has to be repaired. The severity and thus the repair time are dependent on the degree of damage, which is highly dependent on the fault time. Fast fault clearance of this fault type is therefore of greatest importance to limit the damages and thus the economic loss. To limit the damages in connection to stator winging short circuits, the fault clearance time must be as fast as possible (instantaneous). Both the fault current contributions from the external power system (via the generator and/or the block circuit breaker) and from the generator itself must be disconnected as fast as possible. A fast reduction of the mechanical power from the turbine is of great importance. If the generator block
106
REG 670
is connected to the power system close to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain the transient stability of the non-faulted generators. Normally the short circuit fault current is very large, i.e. significantly larger than the generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases close to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current. The fault current fed from the generator itself can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. This is normally the case at running up of the generator, before synchronisation to the network. Therefore it is desired that the detection of generator phase-to-phase short circuits shall be relatively sensitive, thus detecting small fault currents. It is also of great importance that the generator short circuit protection does not trip for external faults, when large fault current is fed from the generator. In order to combine fast fault clearance, sensitivity and selectivity the generator current differential protection is normally the best alternative for phase-to-phase generator short circuits. The risk of unwanted operation of the differential protection, caused by current transformer saturation, is a universal differential protection problem. If the generator is tripped in connection to an external short circuit this will first give an increased risk of power system collapse. Besides that there will be a production loss for every unwanted trip of the generator. There is therefore a great economic value to prevent unwanted disconnection of power generation. The generator application gives a special situation, where the short circuit fault current with a large DC component, can have the first zero crossing of the current, after several periods. This is due to the long DC time constant of the generator (up to 150 ms), see figure 42. The generator differential protection is also well suited to give fast, sensitive and selective fault clearance if used for shunt reactors and small busbars.
REG 670
107
I(t)
en06000312.vsd
Figure 42:
Zero crossing of the current
4.5.1.2
Setting guidelines
The generator differential protection in REG 670 makes evaluation in different subfunctions in the differential function. 1. 2. 3. Percentage restrained differential analysis DC, 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis Internal/external fault discriminator Adaptive frequency tracking must be properly configure and set for the analog preprocessing blocks (SMAI) in order to insure proper operation of the generator differential protection function.
General settings
CurrRated: CurrRated is the rated current of the generator, set in primary A. InvertCT2Curr: It is normally assumed that the secondary winding of the CT:s of the generator are earthed towards the generator, as shown in figure 43. In this case the parameter InvertCT2Curr is set to false(0).
108
REG 670
xx06000430.vsd
Figure 43:
Position of current transformers
If the generator differential protection is used in a transformer protection IED the direction of CT is refereed to the transformer differential protection. This might give wrong reference direction of the generator terminal side CT. This can be adjusted by setting the parameter InvertCT2curr to 1 Operation: The generator differential protection function is set on or off with this setting. The characteristic of the restrain differential protection is shown in figure 44. The characteristic is defined by the settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IdMin EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3
Percentage restrained differential operation
REG 670
109
operate current [ times I1r ] 5
Operate unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate conditionally
2 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 SlopeSection3
1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3
Restrain 4 5
EndSection1 EndSection2
restrain current [ times I1r ]
en05000187.vsd
Figure 44:
Operate - restrain characteristic
slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain
(Equation 22)
IdMin: IdMin is the constant sensitivity of section 1. This setting can normally be chosen to 0.10 times the generator rated current. In section 1 the risk of false differential current is very low. This is the case, at least up to 1.25 times the generator rated current. EndSection1 is proposed to be set to 1.25 times the generator rated current. In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current transformers. EndSection2 is proposed to be set to about 3 times the generator rated current. The SlopeSection2, defined as the percentage value of DIdiff/DIBias, is proposed to be set to 40%, if no deeper analysis is done. In section 3, a more pronounced slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false differential currents related to current transformer saturation. The SlopeSection3, defined as the percentage value of DIdiff/DIBias, is proposed to be set to 80 %, if no deeper analysis is done.
110
REG 670
IdUnre: IdUnre is the sensitivity of the unrestrained differential protection function. The choise of setting value can be based on calculation of the largest short circuit current from the generator at fault in the external power system (normally three phase short circuit at the busbar to which the generator block is connected). IdUnre is set as a multiple of the generator rated current. OpCrossBlock: OpCrossBlock is set on, activation of the harmonic blocking in one phase. If the function is set on, activation of the harmonic blocking in one phase will block the other phases too. OpNegSeqDiff: OpNegSeqDiff is set on or off for activation of the negative sequence differential functions, both the internal/external fault discrimination and the sensitive negative sequence differential current function. It is recommended to have this function enabled. IMinNegSeq: IMinNegSeq is the setting of the smallest negative sequence current when the negative sequence based functions shall be active. This sensitivity can normally be set down to 0.04 times the generator rated current, to enable very sensitive protection function. As the sensitive negative sequence differential protection function is blocked at high currents the high sensitivity does not give risk of unwanted function. NegSeqROA: NegSeqROA is the Relay Operate Angle as described in figure 45.
Negative sequence subfunctions
REG 670
111
90 120 60
150
30
External Fault Zone 180
Internal Fault Zone ROA
CT1 I- : Reference 210 330
240 270
300
en06000433.vsd
Figure 45:
NegSeqROA: NegSeqROA determines the boundary between the internal- and external fault regions
The default value 60 is recommended for high degree of dependability and security.
HarmDistLimit: HarmDistLimit is the total harmonic distortion (2nd and 5th harmonic) for the harmonic restrain pick-up. The default limit 10% can be used in normal cases. In special application, for example close to power electronic converters, a higher setting might be used to prevent unwanted blocking. TempIdMin: If the binary input raise pick-up (DESENSIT) is activated the operation level of IdMin is increased to the TempIdMin.
Other additional options
112
REG 670
UnrestrainedLimit
TempIdMin IdMin
1 SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3
Restrain 4 5
en06000637.vsd
Figure 46:
The value of TempIdMin
(Equation 23)
AddTripDelay: If the input DESENSIT is activated also the operation time of the protection function can be increase be the setting AddTripDelay. OperDCBiasing: OperDCBiasing is set on or off for activation of the option where also the DC component of the differential function influence the sensitivity of the biased differential protection. If enabled the DC component of the differential current will be included in the bias current with a slow decay. The option can be used to increase security if the DC time constant is very long, thus giving risk of current transformer saturation, even if the fault current is small. It is recommended to set OperDCBiasing on if the current transformers on the two sides of the generator is of different make with have different operating characteristics. It is also recommended to set the parameter on for all shunt reactor applications.
4.5.1.3
Setting parameters
REG 670
113
Table 27:
Parameter IBase
Basic general settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range 100.0 - 100000.0 Step 0.1 Default 5000.0 Unit A Description Rated current of protected generator, Amperes Invert CT 2 curr., yes (1) or no (0). Default is no (0).
InvertCT2Curr
No Yes
No
Table 28:
Parameter Operation IdMin
Basic parameter group settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 1.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.25 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Section 1 sensitivity, multiple of generator rated current Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of generator rated current Negative Sequence Differential Enable Off/On Neg. sequence curr. limit, as multiple of gen. rated curr.
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
OpNegSeqDiff
No Yes 0.02 - 0.20
Yes
IMinNegSeq
0.01
0.04
IB
Table 29:
Parameter EndSection1
Advanced parameter group settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, multiple of generator rated current End of section 2, multiple of generator rated current Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Operation On / Off for cross-block logic between phases Operate Angle of int/ ext neg. seq. fault discriminator, deg (Total) relative harmonic distorsion limit, percent
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
OpCrossBlock
No Yes 30.0 - 120.0
Yes
NegSeqROA
0.1
60.0
Deg
HarmDistLimit
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
10.0
114
REG 670

Parameter TempIdMin Range 1.0 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 2.0 Unit IdMin Description Temp. Id pickup when input raisePickUp=1, multiple of IdMin Additional trip delay, when input raisePickUp=1 Operation DC biasing On / Off
AddTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
OperDCBiasing
Off On
Off
4.5.2
Transformer differential protection (PDIF, 87T)

Table 30: Transformer differential protection, two winding
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Function block name: T2DxANSI number: 87T IEC 61850 logical node name: T2WPDIF
3Id/I
Table 31:
Transformer differential protection, three winding

Function block name: T3DxANSI number: 87T IEC 61850 logical node name: T3WPDIF
3Id/I
4.5.2.1
Application
The transformer differential protection is a unit protection. It serves as the main protection of transformers in case of winding failure. The protective zone of a differential protection includes the transformer itself, the bus-work or cables between the current transformer and the power transformer. When bushing current transformers are used for the differential relay, the protective zone does not include the bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. In some substations there is a current differential protection for the busbar. Such a busbar protection will include the bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and will cause immediate damage. Short-circuits and earth-faults in windings and terminals will normally be detected by the differential protection. Interturn faults, which are flashovers between conductors within the same physical winding, is also possible to
REG 670
115
detect if a large enough number of turns are short-circuited. Interturn faults are the most difficult transformer winding faults to detect with electrical protections. A small interturn fault including just a few turns will result in an undetectable amount of current until it develops into an earth-fault. For this reason it is important that the differential protection has a high level of sensitivity and that it is possible to use a sensitive setting without causing unwanted operations for external faults. It is important that the faulty transformer be disconnected as fast as possible. As the differential protection is a unit protection it can be designed for fast tripping, thus providing selective disconnection of the faulty transformer. The differential protection should never operate on faults outside the protective zone. A transformer differential protection compares the current flowing into the transformer with the current leaving the transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by the differential protection must take into consideration changes to voltages, currents and phase angles. Traditional transformer differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for correction of the phase shift and ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm as implemented in the IED compensate for both the turns-ratio and the phase shift internally in the software. No auxiliary current transformers are necessary. The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external faults if the turn-ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. However, there are several different phenomena other than internal faults that will cause unwanted and false differential currents. The main reasons for unwanted differential currents are: mismatch due to varying tap changer positions different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current transformers zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer normal magnetizing currents magnetizing inrush currents overexcitation magnetizing currents
4.5.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Transformer differential protection function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). Refer to the Setting parameters tables, in section "Setting parameters"
Inrush restraint methods
With a combination of the second harmonic restraint and the waveform restraint methods it is possibly to get a protection with high security and stability against inrush effects and at the same time maintain high performance in case of heavy internal faults even if the current transformers are saturated. Both these restraint methods are used by RET 670. The second harmonic restraint function has a settable level. If the ratio of the second harmonic to fundamental harmonic in the differential current is above
116
REG 670
the settable limit, the operation of the differential protection is restrained. It is recommended to set parameter I2/I1Ratio = 15% as default value in case no special reasons exist to choose other value. Overexcitation current contains odd harmonics, because the waveform is symmetrical about the time axis. As the third harmonic currents cannot flow into a delta winding, the fifth harmonic is the lowest harmonic which can serve as a criterion for overexcitation. The overexcitation on the delta side will produce exciting currents that contain a large fundamental frequency component with little odd harmonics. In this application the fifth harmonic limit must be set to a relatively low value. IED 670 differential protection function is provided with a fifth harmonic restraint to prevent the protection from operation during an overexcitation condition of a power transformer. If the ratio of the fifth harmonic to fundamental harmonic in the differential current is above a settable limit the operation is restrained. It is recommended to use I5/I1Ratio = 25% as default value in case no special reasons exist to choose another setting. Transformers likely to be exposed to overvoltage or underfrequency conditions (i.e. generator step-up transformers in power stations) should be provided with an overexcitation protection based on V/Hz to achieve trip before the core thermal limit is reached.
Overexcitation restraint method
Cross-blocking between phases
Basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block operation (i.e. tripping) of the other two phases due to the properties of the differential current in that phase (i.e. waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In the algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via the setting parameter OpCrossBlock. When parameter OpCrossBlock is set to On, cross blocking between phases will be introduced. There is not any time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set bias characteristic will be able to cross-block other two phases if it is self-blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias characteristic cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. In should be noted that this is the default (i.e. recommended) setting value for this parameter. When parameter OpCrossBlock is set to Off, any cross blocking between phases will be disabled.
Restrained and unrestrained differential protection
To make a differential relay as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential protections have been developed and are now adopted as the general practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic sensitivity. The bias current can be defined in many different ways. One classical way of defining the bias current has been Ibias = (I1 + I2) / 2, where I1 is the magnitude of the power transformer primary current, and I2 the magnitude of the power transformer secondary current. However, it has been found that if the bias current is defined as the highest power transformer current this will reflect the
REG 670
117
difficulties met by the current transformers much better. The differential protection function uses the highest current of all restrain inputs as bias current. For applications where the power transformer rated current and the CT primary rated current can differ considerably, (applications with T-connections), measured currents in the T connections are converted to pu value using the rated primary current of the CT, but one additional "measuring" point is introduced as sum of this two T currents. This summed current is converted to pu value using the power transformer winding rated currents. After that the highest pu value is taken as bias current in pu. In this way best possible combination between sensitivity and security for differential protection function with T connection is obtained. The main philosophy behind the principle with the operate bias characteristic is to decrease the operate sensitivity when the current transformers have difficult operating conditions. This bias quantity gives the best stability against an unwanted operation of the overall differential protection. The usual practice for transformer protection is to set the bias characteristic to a value of at least twice the value of the expected spill current under through faults conditions. These criteria can vary considerably from application to application and are often a matter of judgment. The second slope is increased to ensure stability under heavy through fault conditions which could lead to increased differential current due to saturation of current transformers. Default settings for the operating characteristic with IdMin = 0.3pu of the power transformer rated current can be recommended as a default setting in normal applications. If the conditions are known more in detail, higher or lower sensitivity can be chosen. The selection of suitable characteristic should in such cases be based on the knowledge of the class of the current transformers, availability of information on the on load tap changer (OLTC) position, short circuit power of the systems, etc. Transformers can be connected to buses in such ways that the current transformers used for the differential protection will be either in series with the power transformer windings or the current transformers will be in breakers that are part of the bus, such as a breaker-and-a-half or a ring bus scheme. For current transformers with primaries in series with the power transformer winding, the current transformer primary current for external faults will be limited by the transformer impedance. When the current transformers are part of the bus scheme, as in the breaker-and-a-half or the ring bus scheme, the current transformer primary current is not limited by the power transformer impedance. High primary currents may be expected. In either case, any deficiency of current output caused by saturation of one current transformer that is not matched by a similar deficiency of another current transformer will cause a false differential current to appear. Differential protection can overcome this problem if the bias is obtained separately from each set of current transformer circuits. It is therefore important to avoid paralleling of two or more current transformers for connection to a single restraint input. Each current connected to RET 670 is available for biasing the differential protection function. Unrestrained operation level has default value of IdUnre = 10pu, which is typically acceptable for most of the standard power transformer applications. However in the following cases these setting need to be changed accordingly: When CT from "T-connection" are connected to IED, as in the breaker-and-ahalf or the ring bus scheme, special care shall be taken in order to prevent REG 670
118
unwanted operation of transformer differential relay for through-faults due to different CT saturation of "T-connected" CTs. Thus if such uneven saturation is a possibility it is typically required to increase unrestrained operational level to IdUnre = 20-25pu For differential applications on HV shunt reactors, due to a fact that there is no heavy through-fault conditions, the unrestrained differential operation level can be set to IdUnre = 1.75pu
Overall operating characteristic of transformer differential protection is shown in figure 47 below:

UnrestrainedLimit
1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3
Restrain 4 5
en05000187.vsd
Figure 47:
Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics

and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings: 1. 2.
IdMin EndSection1
REG 670
119
3. 4. 5.
EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3
Elimination of zero sequence currents
A differential protection may operate unwanted due to external earth faults in cases where the zero sequence current can flow only on one side of the power transformer but not on the other side. This is the situation when the zero sequence current cannot be properly transformed to the other side of the power transformer. Power transformer connection groups of Wye/Delta(Yd) or Delta/Wye(Dy) type cannot transform the zero sequence current. If a delta winding of a power transformer is earthed via an earthing transformer inside the zone protected by the differential protection there will be an unwanted differential current in case of an external earth fault. To make the overall differential protection insensitive to external earth faults in these situations the zero sequence currents must be eliminated from the power transformer terminal currents, so that they do not appear as the differential currents. This had once been achieved by means of interposing auxiliary current transformers. The elimination of zero sequence current is done numerically and no auxiliary transformers or zero sequence traps are necessary. Instead it is necessary to eliminate the zero sequence current from every individual winding by proper setting of setting parameters ZSCurrSubtrWx=Off/On.
External/Internal fault discriminator
The internal/external fault discriminator operation is based on the relative position of the two phasors (in case of two-winding transformer) representing W1 and W2 negative-sequence current contributions, defined by matrix expression see Technical reference manual. It practically performs directional comparison between these two phasors. In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called IMinNegSeq, is settable in the range from 1% to 20% of the differential protections base current, which is in our case the power transformer HV side rated current. The default value is 4%. Only if magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit, the relative position between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for IMinNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check, as well guarantee stability of the algorithm, when power transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA represents the so-called Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in the range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 1 degree. The 120 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
default value is 60 degrees. The default setting somewhat favors security in comparison to dependability. If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current contributions from the HV side and LV side of the power transformer using the following two rules: If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are in phase, the fault is internal (i.e. both phasors are within internal fault region) If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are 180 degrees out of phase, the fault is external (i.e. HV phasors is outside internal fault region)
Therefore, under all external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees. During internal fault, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on HV and LV side of power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value. As the internal/external fault discriminator has proved to be very reliable, it has been given a great power. If, for example, a fault has been detected, i.e. PICKUP signals set by ordinary differential protection, and at the same time the internal/external fault discriminator characterized this fault as internal, then any eventual block signals produced by either the harmonic or the waveform restraints, are ignored. This assures the response times of the new and advanced differential protection below one power system cycle (i.e. below 20 ms for 50 Hz system) for all internal faults. Even for heavy internal faults with severely saturated current transformers new differential protection operates well below one cycle because the harmonic distortions in the differential currents do not slow down the differential protection operation. Practically, an unrestrained operation is achieved for all internal faults. External faults happen ten to hundred times more often than internal ones. If a disturbance has been detected and the internal/external fault discriminator characterized this fault as external fault, the additional criteria are posed on the differential algorithm before its trip is allowed. This assures high algorithm stability during external faults. However, in the same time the differential relay is still capable to trip for evolving faults. The principle of the internal/external fault discriminator can be extended to power transformers and autotransformers with three windings. If all three windings are connected to their respective networks, then three directional comparisons can be done, but only two comparisons are necessary in order to positively determine the position of the fault with respect to the protected zone. The directional comparisons, which are possible, are: W1 - W2, W1 - W3, and W2 - W3. The rule applied by the internal / external fault discriminator in case of three-winding power transformers is:
REG 670
121
If all comparisons indicate an internal fault, then it is an internal fault. If any comparison indicates an external fault, then it is an external fault
If one of the windings is not connected, the algorithm automatically reduces to the two-winding version. Nevertheless, the whole power transformer is protected, inclusive the non-connected winding.
On-line compensation for on-load tap-changer movement
Transformer differential function in IED 670 has a built-in facility to on-line compensate for on-load tap-changer operation. The following parameters which are set under general settings are related to this compensation feature: Parameter LocationOLTC1 defines the winding where first OLTC (i.e. OLTC1) is physically located. The following options are available: Not Used / Winding 1 / Winding 2 / Winding 3. When value Not Used is selected the differential function will assume that OLTC1 doesnt exist and it will disregard all other parameters related to first OLTC Parameter LowTapPosOLTC1 defines the minimum end tap position for OLTC1 (typically position 1) Parameter RatedTapOLTC1 defines the rated (e.g. mid) position for OLTC1 (e.g. 11 for OLTC with 21 positions) This tap position shall correspond to the values for rated current and voltage set for that winding Parameter HighTapPsOLTC1 defines the maximum end tap position for OLTC1 (e.g. 21 for OLTC with 21 positions) Parameter TapHighVoltTC1 defines the end position for OLTC1 where highest no-load voltage for that winding is obtained (e.g. position with maximum number of turns) Parameter StepSizeOLTC1 defines the voltage change per OLTC1 step (e.g. 1.5%)
The above parameters are defined for OLTC1. Similar parameters shall be set for second OLTC designeated with OLTC2 in the parameter names, for 3winding differential protection. Differential protection continuously monitors the level of the fundamental frequency differential currents and gives an alarm if the pre-set value is simultaneously exceeded in all three phases. This feature can be used to monitor the integrity of OLTC compensation within the differential function. The threshold for the alarm pickup level is defined by setting parameter IdiffAlarm. This threshold should be typically set in such way to obtain operation when OLTC measured value within differential function differs for more than two steps from the actual OLTC position. To obtained such operation set parameter IdiffAlarm equal to two times the OLTC step size (e.g. typical setting value 2% to 4%). Set the time delayed defined by parameter tAlarmDelay two times longer than the OLTC mechanical operating time (e.g. typical setting value 10s).
Differential current alarm
122
REG 670

Open CT detection
Transformer differential function in RET 670 has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. This feature can block the unexpected operation created by the transformer differential protection function in case of open CT secondary circuit under normal load condition. An alarm signal can also be issued to substation operational personal to make remedy action once the open CT condition is detected. The following settings parameters are related to this feature: Setting parameter OpenCTEnable enables/disables this feature Setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay defines the time delay after which the alarm signal will be given Setting parameter tOCTReset defines the time delay after which the open CT condition will reset once the defective CT circuits have been rectified Once the open CT condition has been detected, then all the differential protection functions are blocked except the unrestraint (instantaneous) differential protection
The outputs of open CT condition related parameters are listed below: OpenCT: Open CT detected OpenCTAlarm: Alarm issued after the setting delay OpenCTInput: Open CT in CT group inputs (1 for input 1 and 2 for input 2) OpenCTPhase: Open CT with phase information (1 for phase L1, 2 for phase L2, 3 for phase L3)
Transformer differential function in IED 670 has a built-in, advanced switch on to fault feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode. When SOTFMode=On this feature is enabled. However it shall be noted that when this feature is enabled it is not possible to test 2nd harmonic blocking feature by simply injecting one current with superimposed second harmonic. In that case the switch on to fault feature will operate and differential protection will trip. However for real inrush case the differential protection function will properly restrain from operation. For more information about operating principles of the switch on to fault feature please read the Technical Reference Manual.
Switch on to fault feature
4.5.2.3
Setting example Introduction

Differential protection for power transformers has been used for decades. In order to correctly apply transformer differential protection proper compensation for:
REG 670
123
power transformer phase shift (i.e. vector group compensation) CT secondary currents magnitude difference on different sides of the protected transformer (i.e. ratio compensation) zero sequence current elimination (i.e. zero sequence current reduction) shall be done. In the past this was performed with help of interposing CTs or special connection of main CTs (i.e. delta connected CTs). With numerical technology all these compensations are done in relay software.
This document will demonstrate how this compensation shall be done for RET 670. The differential transformer in RET 670 is capable to provide differential protection for all standard three-phase power transformers without any interposing CTs. It has been designed with assumption that all main CTs will be star connected. For such applications it is then only necessary to enter directly CT rated data and power transformer data as they are given on the power transformer nameplate and differential protection will automatically balance itself. However RET 670 can as well be used in applications where some of main CTs are connected in delta. In such cases the ratio for main CT connected in delta shall be intentionally set for sqrt(3)=1.732 times smaller than actual ratio of individual phase CTs (e.g. instead of 800/5 set 462/5) In case the ratio is 800/2.88A, often designed for such typical delta connections, set the ratio as 800/5 in the relay. At the same time the power transformer vector group shall be set as Yy0 because the RET 670 shall not internally provide any phase angle shift compensation. The necessary phase angle shift compensation will be provided externally by delta connected main CT. All other settings should have the same values irrespective of main CT connections. It shall be noted that irrespective of the main CT connections (i.e. star or delta) on-line reading and automatic compensation for actual on-load tap-changer position can be used in RET 670. These are internal compensation within the differential function. The protected power transformer data are always entered as they are given on the nameplate. Differential function will by itself correlate nameplate data and select proper reference windings.
Typical main CT connections for transformer differential protection
Three most typical main CT connections used for transformer differential protection are shown in figure 48. It is assumed that the primary phase sequence isL1-L2-L3.
124
REG 670
IL1 L1 Protected Transformer Winding
IL2
L2
IL3
L3
IL3-IL2
IL2-IL1
IL1-IL3
IL3-IL1
IL2-IL3
CT Star Connected
CT in Delta DAC Connected
CT in Delta DAB Connected
IL1-IL2
IL3
IL2
IL1
en06000549.vsd
Figure 48:
Commonly used main CT connections for Transformer differential protection.
For star connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the differential relay: are directly proportional to the measured primary currents are in phase with the measured primary currents contain all sequence components including zero sequence current component
For star connected main CTs, the main CT ratio shall be set in RET 670 as it is in actual application. The StarPoint parameter, for the particular star connection shown in figure 48, shall be set ToObject. If star connected main CTs have their star point away from the protected transformer this parameter should be set FromObject. For delta DAC connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the differential relay: are increased sqrt(3) times (i.e. 1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs lag by 30 the primary winding currents (i.e. this CT connection rotates currents by 30 in clockwise direction) do not contain zero sequence current component
For DAC delta connected main CT ratio shall be set for sqrt(3) times smaller in RET 670 than the actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter, for this particular connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAC connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in figure 48. For delta DAB connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the differential relay:
REG 670
125
are increased sqrt(3) times (i.e. 1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs lead by 30 the primary winding currents (i.e. this CT connection rotates currents by 30 in anti-clockwise direction) do not contain zero sequence current component
For DAB delta connected main CT ratio shall be set for sqrt(3) times smaller in RET 670 then the actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter, for this particular connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAB connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in figure 48. For more detailed info regarding CT data settings please refer to the three application examples presented in section "Application Examples with RET 670".
Application Examples with RET 670
Three application examples will be given here. For each example two differential protection solutions will be presented: First solution will be with all main CTs star connected. Second solution will be with delta connected main CT on Y (i.e. star) connected sides of the protected power transformer.
For each differential protection solution the following settings will be given: 1. 2. Input CT channels on the RET 670 TRM modules. General settings for the transformer differential protection where specific data about protected power transformer shall be entered.
Finally the setting for the differential protection characteristic will be given for all presented applications. Example 1: StarWye-delta connected power transformer without tap charger Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 49.
126
REG 670
CT 300/5 Star
CT 300/5 in Delta (DAC)
20.9 MVA 69/12.5 kV YNd1 (YDAC)
20.9 MVA 69/12.5 kV YNd1 (YDAC)
CT 800/5 Star
CT 800/5 Star
en06000554.vsd
Figure 49:
Two differential protection solutions for star-delta connected power transformer
For this particular power transformer the 69 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead by 30 degrees the 12.5 kV side phase-to- earth no-load voltages. Thus when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main HV CTs in delta, as shown in the right-hand side in figure 49, it must be ensured that the HV currents are rotated by 30 in clockwise direction. Thus the DAC delta CT connection must be used for 69 kv CTs in order to put 69 kV & 12.5 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of RET 670 for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following: 1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in RET 670. 2. For second solution make sure that HV delta connected CTs are DAC connected. 3. For star connected CTs make sure how they are stared (i.e. earthed) to/from protected transformer. 4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs see table 32.
REG 670
127
Table 32:
Setting parameter CTprim CTsec CTStarPoint
CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Selected value for both solutions 800 5 ToObject
5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 33.
Table 33:
Setting parameter CTprim
CT input channels used for the HV side CTs

Selected value for both solution 1 (star connected CT) 300 Selected value for both solution 2 (delta connected CT)
300 3
= 173
CTsec CTStarPoint
5 From Object
5 ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 25. 6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection function, see table 34.
Table 34:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 LocationOLTC1 Other Parameters
1) 2)
General settings of the differential protection function

Select value for both solution 1 (starwye connected CT) 69 kV 12.5 kV 175 A 965 A STAR (Y) delta=d 1 [30 deg lag] On Off No No Not used Not relevant for this application. Use default value. Selected value for both solution 2 (delta connected CT) 69 kV 12.5 kV 175 A 965 A STAR (Y) star=y 1) 0 [0 deg] 1) Off 2) Off No No Not used Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
To compensate for delta connected CTs Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta
128
REG 670

Delta-starwye connected power transformer without tap charger Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 50.
CT 400/5 Star
CT 400/5 Star
60 MVA 115/24.9 kV Dyn1 (DABY)
60 MVA 115/24.9 kV Dyn1 (DABY)
CT 1500/5 Star
CT 1500/5 in Delta (DAB)
en06000555.vsd
Figure 50:
Two differential protection solutions for delta-star connected power transformer
For this particular power transformer the 115 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead for 30 the 24.9 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages. Thus when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main 24.9 kV CTs in delta, as shown in the right-hand side in figure 50, it must be ensured that the 24.9 kV currents are rotated by 30 in anti-clockwise direction. Thus, the DAB CT delta connection (see Figure 1) must be used for 24.9 kV CTs in order to put 115 kV & 24.9 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of RET 670 for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following: 1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in RET 670. 2. For second solution make sure that LV delta connected CTs are DAB connected. 3. For star connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (i.e. earthed) to/from protected transformer. 4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 35. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 129
Table 35:
Setting parameter CTprim CTsec CTStarPoint

Selected value for both solutions 400 5 ToObject
5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs, see table "CT input channels used for the LV side CTs".

Setting parameter CTprim Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution (star connected CT) 2 (delta connected CT) 1500
1500 3
CTsec CTStarPoint 5 ToObject 5
= 866
ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 26. 6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection function, see table36.
Table 36:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 Rated VoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 LocationOLTC1 Other parameters
1) 2)
General settings of the differential protection

selected value for both Solution 1 (star conected CT) 115 kV 24.9 kV 301 A 1391 A Delta (D) star=y 1 [30 deg lag] Off On No No Not Used Not relevant for this application. Use default value. Selected value for both Solution 2 (delta connected CT) 115 kV 24.9 kV 301 A 1391 A STAR (Y) 1) star=y 0 [0 deg] 1) Off On 2) No No Not Used Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
To compensate for delta connected CTs. Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.
130
REG 670

Star-starWye-wye connected power transformer with on-load tap-changer and tertiary not loaded delta winding Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 51. It shall be noted that this example is applicable for protection of autotransformer with not loaded tertiary delta winding as well.
CT 200/1 Star
CT 200/1 in Delta (DAB) 31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA 110111.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV YNyn0(d5)
31.5/31.5/(10.5) M 110111.5% /36.75/( YNyn0(d5)
CT 500/5 Star
CT 500/5 in Delta (DAB)
en0600055
Figure 51:
Two differential protection solutions for star-star connected transformer.
For this particular power transformer the 110 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages are exactly in phase with the 36.75 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages. Thus, when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main CTs in delta, both set of CTs must be identically connected (i.e. either both DAC or both DAB as shown in the right-hand side in figure 51) in order to put 110 kV & 36.75 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of RET 670 for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following: 1. Check that HV CTs are connected to 1 A CT inputs in RET 670. 2. Check that LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in RET 670. 3. When delta connected CTs are used make sure that both CT sets are identically connected (i.e. either both DAC or both DAB).
REG 670
131
4. For star connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (i.e. earthed) towards or away from the protected transformer. 5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 37.
Table 37:

Selected value for both solution 1 (star connected CTs) 200 Selected value for both Solution 2 (delta connected CTs)
200 3
CTsec CTStarPoint 1 FromObject 1
= 115
ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 27. 6. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs
Table 38:

Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2 (star connected) (delta connected) 500
500 3
CTsec CTStarPoint 5 ToObject 5
= 289
ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 28. 7. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection function, see table 39
Table 39:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 Table continued on next page
General settings of the differential protection function

Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2 (star connected) (delta connected) 110 kV 36.75 kV 165 A 495 A STAR (Y) 110 kV 36.75 kV 165 A 495 A STAR (Y)
132
REG 670

Setting parameter ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 LocationOLT1 LowTapPosOLTC1 RatedTapOLTC1 HighTapPsOLTC1 TapHighVoltTC1 StepSizeOLTC1 Other parameters
1)
Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2 (star connected) (delta connected) star=y 0 [0 deg] On On No No Winding 1 (W1) 1 12 23 23 1.5% Not relevant for this application. Use default value. star=y 0 [0 deg] Off 1) Off 1) No No Winding 1 (W1) 1 12 23 23 1.5% Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.
Summary and conclusions
RET 670 can be used for differential protection of three-phase power transformers with main CTs either star or delta connected. However the relay has been designed with assumption that all main CTS are star connected. RET 670 can be used in applications where main CTs are delta connected. For such applications the following shall be kept in mind: 1. 2. 3. Ratio for delta connected CTs shall be set sqrt(3)=1.732 times smaller then actual individual phase CT ratio. Power transformer vector group shall be typically set as Yy0 because the compensation for power transformer actual phase shift is provided by external delta CT connection. Zero sequence current is eliminated by main CT delta connection. Thus on sides where CTs are connected in delta the zero sequence current elimination shall be set to Off in RET 670.
The following table summarizes the most commonly used star-delta vector group around the world and provides information about required type of main CT delta connection on the star sides of the protected transformer.
REG 670
133

IEC vector group ANSI designation Positive sequence no-load voltage phasor diagram Required delta CT connection type on star side of the protected power transformer and internal vector group setting in RET 670 DAC/Yy0
YNd1
YDAC
Dyn1
DABY
DAB/Yy0
YNd11
YDAB
DAB/Yy0
Dyn11
DACY
DAC/Yy0
YNd5
YD150
DAB/Yy6
Dyn5
DY150
DAC/Yy6
134
REG 670

Table 40:
Parameter RatedVoltageW1
Basic general settings for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default 400.00 Unit kV Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
RatedVoltageW2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
231.00
kV
RatedCurrentW1
1 - 99999
577
RatedCurrentW2
1 - 99999
1000
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
ZSCurrSubtrW1
On
Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, Tbranch 2, on transf. W1 side Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 2, YES / NO
ZSCurrSubtrW2
On
TconfigForW1
No
CT1RatingW1
3000
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
TconfigForW2
No Yes
No
REG 670
135

Parameter CT1RatingW2 Range 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default 3000 Unit A Description CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
LocationOLTC1
Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) 1
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC 1 RatedTapOLTC1
0 - 10
1 - 100
HighTapPsOLTC1
11
1 - 100
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
Table 41:
Parameter Operation SOTFMode tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm
Basic parameter group settings for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function

Range Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 Step 0.001 0.01 Default Off On 10.000 0.20 Unit s %IB Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1 rated current End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in %
IdMin
0.10 - 0.60
0.01
0.30
IB
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
0.01
1.25
IB
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
136
REG 670

Parameter SlopeSection3 Range 30.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 Default 80.0 Unit % Description Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this level to be used Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
15.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
CrossBlockEn
Off On Off On 0.02 - 0.20
On
NegSeqDiffEn
On
IMinNegSeq
0.01
0.04
IB
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
0.1
60.0
Deg
OpenCTEnable
Off On 0.100 - 10.000
On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.001
3.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Table 42:
Parameter RatedVoltageW1
Basic general settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default 400.00 Unit kV Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 3 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A
RatedVoltageW2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
231.00
kV
RatedVoltageW3
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
10.50
kV
RatedCurrentW1
1 - 99999
577
REG 670
137

Parameter RatedCurrentW2 Range 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default 1000 Unit A Description Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Rated current of transformer winding 3 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or D-delta Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
RatedCurrentW3
1 - 99999
7173
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW3
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
ClockNumberW3
5 [150 deg lag]
Phase displacement between W3 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
ZSCurrSubtrW1
On
Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W3 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, Tbranch 2, on transf. W1 side
ZSCurrSubtrW2
On
ZSCurrSubtrW3
On
TconfigForW1
No
CT1RatingW1
3000
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
138
REG 670

Parameter TconfigForW2 Range No Yes 1 - 99999 Step Default No Unit Description Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 2, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 3, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W3 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W3 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage Transformer winding where OLTC2 is located OLTC2 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC2 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6)
CT1RatingW2
3000
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
TconfigForW3
No Yes 1 - 99999
No
CT1RatingW3
3000
CT2RatingW3
1 - 99999
3000
LocationOLTC1
Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 1
Not Used
0 - 10
1 - 100
HighTapPsOLTC1
11
1 - 100
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
LocationOLTC2
Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 1
Not Used
0 - 10
1 - 100
REG 670
139

Parameter HighTapPsOLTC2 Range 11 Step 1 Default 1 - 100 Unit Description OLTC2 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC2 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC2 step in percent of rated voltage
TapHighVoltTC2
1 - 100
StepSizeOLTC2
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
Table 43:
Parameter Operation SOTFMode
Basic parameter group settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 Step Default Off On Unit Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault feature Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr. usually W1 curr. Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator
tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm
0.001 0.01
10.000 0.20
s %IB
IdMin
0.10 - 0.60
0.01
0.30
IB
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
CrossBlockEn
On
NegSeqDiffEn
On
IMinNegSeq
0.01
0.04
IB
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
0.1
60.0
Deg
140
REG 670
Table 44:
Parameter EndSection1
Advanced parameter group settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. End of section 2, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
15.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
OpenCTEnable
Off On 0.100 - 10.000
On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.001
3.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
4.5.3
Restricted earth fault protection (PDIF, 87N)

Function block name: REFxANSI number: 87N IEC 61850 logical node name: REFPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IdN/I
4.5.3.1
Application
Break-down of the insulation between a phase conductor and earth in an effectively or low impedance earthed power system results in a large fault current. A breakdown of the insulation between a transformer winding and the core or the tank may result
REG 670
141
in a large fault current which causes severe damage to the windings and the transformer core. A high gas pressure may develop, damaging the transformer tank. Fast and sensitive detection of earth faults in a power transformer winding can be obtained in solidly earthed or low impedance earth networks by the restricted earth fault protection. The only requirement is that the power transformer winding is connected to earth in the neutral (star) point (in case of Wye(Star)-connected windings) or via separate earthinging transformer (in case of delta-connected windings). The restricted earth fault function is used as a unit protection function. It protects the power transformer winding against the faults involving earth. However, it should be noted that the earth faults are the most likely and common type of fault. Restricted earth fault protection is the fastest and the most sensitive protection a power transformer winding can have and will detect faults such as: earth faults in the transformer winding when the network is earthed through an impedance earth faults in the transformer winding in solidly eartheded network when the point of the fault is close to the winding neutral(star) point. interturn faults
The restricted earth fault protection is not affected, as differential protection, with the following power transformer related phenomena: magnetizing inrush currents overexcitation magnetizing currents on load tap changer external and internal phase faults which do not involve earth symmetrical overload conditions
Because of its properties the restricted earth fault protection is often used as a main protection of the transformer winding for all faults involving earth.
Application examples Transformer winding, solidly earthed

The most common application is on a solidly eartheded transformer winding. The connection is shown in figure 52.
142
REG 670
REFx I3PW1CT1 INd> I3P
en05000210.vsd
Figure 52:
Connection of restricted earth fault function for a fully insulated, directly (solidly) eartheded transformer
Transformer winding, earthedgrounded through Z-0 earthingZig-Zag grounding transformer
A common application is for low reactance earthed transformer where the earthing is through separate Z-0earthinging transformers. The fault current is then limited to typical 800 to 2000 A for each transformer. The connection of a REF for this application is shown in figure 53.
REG 670
143
REFx I3P INd> I3PW1CT1

en05000211.vsd
Figure 53:
Connection of restricted earth fault function for a fully insulated transformer, earthed with a Z-0 earthing transformer
Autotransformer winding, solidly earthedgrounded
Autotransformers can be protected with a REF protection. The complete transformer will then be connected including HV side, neutral connection and the LV side. The connection of a REF for this application is shown in figure 54.
144
REG 670
REFx I3PW1CT1 INd> I3PW2CT1 I3P
en05000212.vsd
Figure 54:
Connection of restricted earth fault function for an autotransformer, solidly earthed
Reactor winding, solidly earthedgrounded
Reactors can be protected with a REF protection. The connection of a REF for this application is shown in figure 55.
REG 670
145
en05000213.vsd
Figure 55:
Connection of restricted earth fault function for a reactor, solidly earthed
Multi-breaker applications
Multi-breaker arrangements including ring-, one and a half breakerbreaker-and-ahalf, double breaker and mesh corner arrangements will have multiple current transformers on the phase side. The REF function block has inputs to allow two current inputs from each side of the transformer the second winding set is then basically only applicable for Autotransformers. A typical connection for an autotransformer, which is the maximum case, is shown in figure 56.
146
REG 670
REFx I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 INd> I3P
en05000214.vsd
Figure 56:
Connection of restricted earth fault function in multi-breaker arrangements
CT earthinggrounding direction
To make Restricted Earth Fault protection to work, the main CT's are always supposed to be Wye(star) connected. The main CT's neutral(star) formation can be done in any way (i.e. either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally the restricted earth fault function will always use reference directions towards the protected transformer. Thus the IED will always measure the primary currents on all sides and in the neutral of the power transformer with the same reference direction towards the power transformer windings. The earthing can therefore be freely selected for each of the involved current transformers.
4.5.3.2
Setting guidelines Setting and configuration

The signals are configured by use of the CAP configuration tool and the SignalMatrix tool forming part of the PCM 600 tool. The setting parameters for the overexcitation function are set at the local HMI (Human Machine Interface) or by use of the PST (Parameter Setting Tool) forming part of PCM 600 tool installed on a PC connected to the control or protection unit.
REG 670
147

Recommendation for analog inputs I3P (should be NI or SI) Connect the neutral current here
I3PW1CT1: Phase currents for winding 1 first current transformer set. I3PW1CT2: Phase currents for winding1 second current transformer set for multibreaker arrangements. When not required configure input to "REAL ZERO" I3PW2CT1: Phase currents for winding 2 first current transformer set. Used at Autotransformers. When not required configure input to "REAL ZERO" I3PW2CT2: Phase currents for winding 2 second current transformer set for multibreaker arrangements. Used in Autotransformers. When not required configure input to "REAL ZERO" Recommendation for input signals Refer to the default factory configuration for examples of configuration. BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the function. Can be used e.g. to for a limited time block the operation during special service conditions. Recommendation for output signals Refer to the default factory configuration for examples of configuration. START: The start output indicates that the level IdMin has been reached. It can be used to initiate time measurement. TRIP: The trip output is activated after the operate time for the IdMin level has been reached. The output signal is used to trip the circuit breaker. DIROK: The output is activated when the directional criteria has been fulfilled. Output can be used for information purpose normally during testing. It can e.g. be checked from the debug tool or wired as an event to an event log. BLK2H: The output is activated when the function is blocked due to too high level of second harmonic. Output can be used for information purpose normally during testing. It can e.g. be checked from the debug tool or wired as an event to an event log.
Setting parameters
Operation: The operation of the restricted earth fault function can be switched OnOff. IBase: The Ibase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) current on which all percentage settings are based. Normally the protected power transformer winding rated current is used but alternatively the current transformer rated current can be set. IdMin: The setting gives the minimum operation value. The setting is in percent of the Ibase value. The neutral current must always be bigger than or equal to half of 148 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
this value. A normal setting is 10% of power transformer rated current for the winding it has been connected to. CTFactorPri1: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 and but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be ICRated/Ibase (Ibase is normally transformer rated current). CTFactorPri2: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 and but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be ICRated/Ibase (Ibase is normally transformer rated current). CTFactorPri3: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 and but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be ICRated/Ibase (Ibase is normally transformer rated current). CTFactorPri4: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 and but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be ICRated/Ibase (Ibase is normally transformer rated current)
4.5.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 45:
Parameter Operation IBase IdMin CTFactorPri1
Basic parameter group settings for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function

Range Off ON 1 - 99999 4.0 - 100.0 1.0 - 10.0 Step 1 0.1 0.1 Default Off 3000 10.0 1.0 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Maximum sensitivity in % of Ibase CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/ MVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/ MVrated current)
CTFactorPri2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTFactorSec1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTFactorSec2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
REG 670
149
Table 46:
Parameter ROA
Advanced parameter group settings for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function

Range 60 - 90 Step 1 Default 60 Unit Deg Description Relay operate angle for zero sequence directional feature
4.5.4
High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Function block name: HZDxANSI number: 87 IEC 61850 logical node name: HZPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IdN
4.5.4.1
Application
The high impedance differential protection can be used as: Autotransformer differential protection Restricted earth fault protection T-feeder protection Tertiary (or secondary busbar) protection Tertiary connected reactor protection Generator differential protection at block connected generators.
The application will be dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of breakers, available independent cores on CTs etc.
150
REG 670
IdN
3Id
3Id
3Id
3Id/I>
3Id
3Id/I>
3Id G
en05000163.vsd
3Id 3Z<
3Id 3Z<
xx05000738.vsd
REG 670
151

Figure 57: Different applications of a high impedance differential protection function
The basics of the high impedance principle
The high impedance principle has been used through many years for differential protection due to the capability to manage through faults also with heavy CT saturation. The principle is based on the CT secondary current circulating between involved current transformers and not through the relay due to its high impedance, normally in the range of hundreds of ohms and sometimes above a kOhm.. When a fault occurs the current cannot circulate and is forced through the differential circuit causing operation.
IdN
en05000164.vsd
Figure 58:
The high impedance principle for one phase with three current transformer inputs
For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will feed current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the relay. The calculations are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating voltage UR is calculated according to equation 29
UR > IF max ( Rct + Rl )

where: IFmax Rct RI is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side, is the current transformer secondary resistance and is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.
(Equation 29)
152
REG 670
The maximum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the relay is set higher than the highest achieved value (setting U>Trip). As the loop resistance is the value to the connection point from each CT it is advisable to do all the CT core summations in the switchgear to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower setting values and also a better balanced scheme. The connection in to the control room can then be from the most central bay. For an internal fault circulation is not possible and due to the high impedance the current transformers will immediately saturate and a rms voltage depending on the size of current transformer saturation voltage will be developed across the relay. Due to the fast saturation very high peak voltages can be achieved. To prevent the risk of flashover in the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The voltage limiter is a voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil). Based on the above calculated operating voltage the relay stabilizing resistor must be selected. The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800Ohms or 2200Ohms (depending on ordered alternative) with a shorting link to allow adjustment to the required value. Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the UR voltage calculated. A higher resistance value will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a lower sensitivity. The function has an operating current range 20 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs and 100 mA to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used to calculate the required value of current at the set U>Trip and SeriesResitor values. The CT inputs used for high impedance differential protection, shall be set to have ratio 1:1 The table below shows the operating voltages for different resistances and the related operating current. Adjust as required based on this table or to values in between as required for the application. Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value compared to the total value. Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum U>Trip with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by adjusting the resistor to a higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for reference.
Table 47:
Operating voltage 20 V 40 V 60 V
Operating voltages for 1A

Stabilizing resistor R 1000 2000 3000 Operating Stabilizing current level 1 resistor R A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.020 A -1000 1500 Operating Stabilizing current level 1 resistor R A -0.040 A 0.040 A --600 Operating current level 1 A --0.100 A
REG 670
153

Operating voltage 80 V 100 V 150 V 200 V Stabilizing resistor R 4000 5000 6000 6800 Operating Stabilizing current level 1 resistor R A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.029 A 2000 2500 3750 5000 Operating Stabilizing current level 1 resistor R A 0.040 A 0.040 A 0.040 A 0.040 A 800 1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 1 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A
Table 48:
Operating voltage 20 V 40 V 60 V 80 V 100 V 150 V 200 V
5 A input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Stabilizing resistor R1 200 400 600 800 1000 1500 2000 Operating Stabilizing current level 5 resistor R1 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 100 200 300 400 500 750 1000 Operating Stabilizing current level 5 resistor R1 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A -100 150 800 1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 5 A -0.400 0.400 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A
The current transformer saturating voltage must be at least 2*U>Trip to have sufficient operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of U>Trip. When you have selected the R value and set the U>Tripvalue the sensitivity of the scheme IP can be calculated. The relay sensitivity is decided by the total current in the circuit according to equation 30.
IP = n ( IR + Ires + lmag )
where: n IP Ires Imag is the CT ratio is the current through the relay, is the current through the voltage limiter and is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (e.g. 4 for Restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-4 for Autotransformer differential protection etc.). (Equation 30)
It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (relays, Metrosil and resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement shall be insensitive to DC component in fault current to allow a use of only the AC components of the fault current in the above calculations. The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in figure 65 154 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670

Series resistor thermal capacity The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Preferable theU>Trip2/ SeriesResistorshould always be lower than 200 W to allow continuos activation on during testing. If this value is exceeded, testing should be done with transient faults.
REG 670
155
Rl Rct R Rres UR
Rl Rct
I>
Protected Object a) Through load situation UR
b) Through fault situation
UR
c) Internal faults UR
en05000427.vsd
156
REG 670

Figure 59: The high impedance principle for one phase with two current transformer inputs
4.5.4.2
Connection examples
WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!
Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection
Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for threephase high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection scheme with 670 series are shown in figure CT connections for High Impedance Differential Protection
L1 (A) L2 (B) L3 (C)
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8
CT 1200/1 Star/Wye Connected
9 10
10 11 12
Protected Object
N L3 (C) L2 (B) L1 (A) N L3 (C) L2 (B)
IED 670
4 5
CT 1200/1 Star/Wye Connected
L1 (A)
X1
11
12
13
14
3
1 1 1 1 1 3 3 R4 R5 R6 R1 R2 2 U 2 U 2 U 4 4 R3 3 2 4 1
L1 (A)
L2 (B)
L3 (C)
3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors
Figure 60:
CT connections for High Impedance Differential Protection
Number 1 shows the scheme earthing point. Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exist in such scheme. Number 2 shows the three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils. Number 3 shows the necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set. Shown connections are applicable for both types of three-phase plate.
REG 670
157
Number 4 shows the position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential relay. Number 5 shows the necessary connection for setting resistors. Shown connections are applicable for both types of three-phase plate. Number 6 shows that the factory made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set shall be removed for installations with 670 series. This star point is required for RADHA schemes only! Number 7 shows how to connect three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in IED 670. Number 8 shows a TRM module where these current inputs are located. Note that the CT ratio for high impedance differential protection application must be set as one! Thus for main CTs with 1A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim=1A and CTsec=1A; while for main CTs with 5A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim=5A and CTsec=5A. The parameter CTStarPoint shall be always left to the default value ToObject. Number 9 shows three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block (10). For high impedance differential protection preprocessing function block in 3ms task shall be used. Number 10 shows the preprocessing block which has a task to digitally filter the connected analogue inputs. Preprocessing block outputs AI1, AI2 and AI3 shall be connected to three instances of high impedance differential protection function blocks (e.g. HZD1, HZD2 and HZD3 function blocks in the configuration tool).
Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection
Restricted earth fault (REF) protection is a typical application for one-phase high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for high impedance based REF protection scheme with 670 series are shown in figure CT connections for Restricted Earth Fault Protection
158
REG 670
L1 (A)
L2 (B)
L3 (C)
1
7
CT 1500/5 Star/Wye Connected 6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Protected Object
L1 (A) L2 (B) L3 (C)
N
IED 670
4 1
N
CT 1500/5
X1
3 5
4 2 1 R1 R2 3 1
2 U
en07000194.vsd
1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor
Figure 61:
CT connections for Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Number 1 shows the scheme earthing point. Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exist in such scheme. Number 2 shows the one-phase plate with setting resistor and metrosil. Number 3 shows the necessary connection for the metrosil. Shown connections are applicable for both types of one-phase plate. Number 4 shows the position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential relay. Number 4 shows the position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential relay. Number 5 shows the necessary connection for setting resistor. Shown connections are applicable for both types of one-phase plate. Number 6 shows how to connect the REF high impedance scheme to one CT input in IED 670. Number 7 shows a TRM module where this current input is located. Note that the CT ratio for high impedance differential protection application must be set as one! Thus for main CTs with 1A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim=1A and CTsec=1A; while for main CTs with 5A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim=5A and CTsec=5A. The parameter CTStarPoint shall be always left to the default value ToObject. Number 8 shows a connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connects this current input to first input channel of the preprocessing function block (10). For high impedance differential protection preprocessing function block in 3ms task shall be used. Number 9 shows the preprocessing block which has a task to digitally filter the connected analogue inputs. Preprocessing block output AI1 shall be connected 159
REG 670
to one instances of high impedance differential protection function block (e.g. HZD1 function block in the configuration tool).
4.5.4.3
Setting guidelines
The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different application descriptions below.
Configuration
The configuration is done in CAP531 graphical configuration tool. Signals from e.g. check criterias are connected to the inputs as required for the application. BLOCK input is used to block the function e.g. from an external check criteria. BLKTR input is used to block the function tripping e.g. from an external check criteria. The alarm level will be operative.
Settings of protection function
Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched On-Off. U>AlarmAlarmPickup: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a divider from the calculated sensitivity of the differential level. A typical setting is 10% of U>Trip tAlarm: Set the time for the alarm. Mostly this output is also used to short-circuit the differential circuit at the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds. U>Trip: Set the trip level according to the calculations in the examples for each application example. The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to achieve stability. Values can be 20-200 V dependent on the application. Series resistor: Set the value of the stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value according to the examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible to the calculated example. Measure the value achieved and set this value here. Note! The value shall always be a high impedance. This means e.g. for 1A circuits say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say bigger than 100 ohms (2500 VA). This ensures that the current will circulate and not go through the differential circuit at through faults.
T-feeder protection
In many busbar arrangements such as one-and a half breaker, ring breaker, mesh corner etc there will be a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current transformers in the transformer bushings. It is often required to separate the zones so the zone up to the bushing is covered from one differential function and the transformer from another. The high impedance differential function in REx670 allows this to be done efficiently, see figure 62.
160
REG 670
3Id
en05000165.vsd
3Id
xx05000739.vsd
Figure 62:
The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-feeder and the transformer differential protection for the transformer
REG 670
161
Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the rated current so that a low value can be used on the resistor. Caution: It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
Setting example
Basic data: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance: 2000/1 A 20 VA 5P20 6.2 ohms <100 m 2.5mm2(one way) gives 2*0,8 ohm at 75 C<200 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the farthest CT) to be limited to appx 0.2 Ohms at 75deg C gives loop resistance 2*0.2 = 0.4 Ohms. Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA
Max fault current:
Calculation:
UR >
4000 2000
( 6.2 + 1.6 ) = 156V
Select a setting of U>Trip=200 V. The current transformer knee point voltage can roughly be calculated from the rated values, considering knee point voltage to be about 70% of the accuracy limit voltage.
E 5 P > ( 20 + 6.2 ) 20 = 524V

i.e. bigger than 2*U>Trip
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application does not need to be so sensitive select SeriesResistor= 2000 ohm which gives a relay current of 100 mA. Calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, ignoring the current drawn by the nonlinear resistor.
162
REG 670
IP =
2000 1
(100 0 + 20 0 + 3 10 -60 ) 10 -3 approx.220 A

(Equation 33)
where 200mA is the current drawn by the relay circuit and 50mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 200*2 is used and the top current used. Then the rms current is calculated by dividing with2. Use the maximum value from the curve. It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of turns) are the most important factors.
Tertiary reactor protection
For many transformers there can be a secondary system for local distribution and/or shunt compensation. The high impedance differential function can be used to protect the tertiary reactor for phase as well as earth faults if the earthing is direct or low impedance.
REG 670
163
3Id
en05000176.vsd
Figure 63:
Application of the high impedance differential function on an autotransformer.
Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
164
REG 670

Basic data: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance: 100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 10 VA 5P20 0.26 ohms <50 m 2.5mm2 (one way) gives 1*0.4 ohm at 75 C Note! Only one way as the system earthing is limiting the earth fault current. If high earth fault currents exists use two way cable. The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor reactance and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor e.g. 800 A.
Max fault current:
Calculation:
UR >
800 1000
( 0.26 + 0.4 ) = 5.28V
Select a setting of U>Trip=20 V. The current transformer saturation voltage at 5% error can roughly be calculated from the rated values.
E 5P >
10 + 0.26 20 5 = 66V 25
i.e. bigger than 2* U>Trip.
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is required to be so sensitive so select SeriesResistor= 200 ohm which gives a relay current of 100 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 36 which gives an acceptable value. A little lower sensitivity could be selected by using a lower resistance value.
IP = 100 5 (100 0 + 5 0 + 2 100 -60 ) approx.5 A
(Equation 36)
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 20*2 is used and the top current used. Then the rms current is calculated by dividing with 2. Use the maximum value from the curve.
Restricted earth fault protection
For solidly earthed systems a Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is often provided as a complement to the normal transformer differential relay. The advantage with the REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 165
restrictedearth fault relays is their high sensitivity. Sensitivities of 2-8% can be achieved whereas the normal differential relay will have sensitivities of 20-40%. The level for high impedance restricted earth fault function is dependent of the current transformers magnetizing currents. Restricted earth fault relays are also very quick due to the simple measuring principle and the measurement of one winding only. The connection of a restricted earth fault relay is shown in figure 64. It is connected across each directly or low ohmic earthed transformer winding in the figure. It is quite common to connect the Restricted earth fault relay in the same current circuit as the transformer differential relay. This will due to the differences in measuring principle limit the differential relays possibility to detect earth faults. Such faults are then only detected by the REF function. The mixed connection using the high impedance differential function should be avoided and the low impedance scheme should be used instead.
IdN
en05000177.vsd
Figure 64:
Application of the high impedance differential function as a restricted earth fault relay for an YNd transformer.
Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced. 166 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670

Basic data: Transformer rated current on HV winding: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Cable loop resistance: Max fault current: 250 A 300/1 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 10 VA 5P20 <50 m 2.5mm2 (one way) gives 2*0.4 ohm at 75 C The maximum through fault current is limited by the transformer reactance, use 15*rated current of the transformer
Calculation:
UR > 15
250 300
( 0.66 + 0.8 ) = 18.25V
Select a setting of U>Trip=20 V. The current transformer saturation voltage at 5% error can roughly be calculated from the rated values.
E 5 P > (10 + 0.66 ) 20 = 213.2V

i.e. bigger than 2* U>Trip
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is required to be so sensitive so select SeriesResistor= 1000 ohm which gives a relay current of 20 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 39 which is acceptable as it gives around 10% minimum operating current.
IP =
300 1
( 20 0 + 5 0 + 4 20 -60 ) approx.25.5 A
(Equation 39)
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 20*2 is used and the top current used. Then the rms current is calculated by dividing with 2. Use the maximum value from the curve.
Alarm level operation
The high impedance differential protection function has a separate alarm level which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current transformer circuit. The setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the operating voltage U>Trip.
REG 670
167
As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of the function is normally high which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short circuits or open current transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor can be selected to achieve a sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or a separate criteria can be added to the operation, a check zone. This can be another IED with the same high impedance differential function, it could be a check that the fault is there with a earth overcurrent function or neutral point voltage function etc. For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output should be used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding continuous high voltage in the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the shorting and alarm is activated.
Figure 65:
Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the average range of current is: 0.0110 mA.
4.5.4.4
Setting parameters
Table 49:
Parameter Operation U>Alarm
Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function

Range Off On 2 - 500 Step 1 Default Off 10 Unit V Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms
tAlarm U>Trip
0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900
0.001 1
5.000 100
s V
SeriesResistor
10 - 20000
250
ohm
168
REG 670
4.6
4.6.1
Impedance protection
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21
Function block name: ZMHx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMHPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.6.1.1
Application Introduction
To maintain proper operation in electric power systems, the main transmission system must hold together at various areas. Practical all produced electric energy is transmitted over transmission and sub transmission lines and this is a reason why the operational reliability of the transmission network is of vital importance to the individual consumer. The transmission lines are the most widely spread part of the power system and overhead lines are the least protected parts from environmental influences. The number of line faults is consequently very high compared to the number of faults on the other elements in the power system. Additionally to this is the fact that faults on transmission lines are faults most likely to cause damages also to the equipment and structures not belonging to the power system. Therefore the clearing of line fault is subjected to stringent authority regulations. Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system. The distance protection function in IED 670 is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.
System earthinggrounding
The type of system earthing plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 169

Solid earthedgrounded networks In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
xx05000215.vsd
Figure 66:
Solidly earthed network.
The earth fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the earth fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth fault current at single line to earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 40:
3I 0 =
3 UL1 UL1 = Z 1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z 1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 40)
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase to earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage. The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring technique to detect earth fault. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.
170
REG 670

Effectively earthedgrounded networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth fault factor "fe" is less than 1.4. The earth fault factor is defined according to equation 41.
fe =
Vmax Vpn
(Equation 41)
Where: Vmax Vpn is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single line to earth fault. is the phase to earth fault fundamental frequency voltage before fault.
Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 42 and equation 43.
X 0 < 3 X 1
(Equation 42)
R 0 R1
(Equation 43)
The magnitude of the earth fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring element to detect earth fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case. High impedance earthedgrounded networks In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor. This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed. What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth fault current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude of 3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution. The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to the formula below:
3I 0 = IR 2 + ( IL - IC ) 2
(Equation 44)
REG 670
171
Where: 3I0 IR IL IC is the earth fault current (A) is the current through the neutral point resistor (A) is the current through the neutral point reactor (A) is the total capacitive earth fault current (A)
The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:
wL =
1 3 w C
(Equation 45)
Ic
Ic
Ic
IR
IL
en05000216.vsd
Figure 67:
High impedance earthing network.
The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compare to solid earthed networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed networks, some system operators do not clear single line to earth faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults. To handle this type phenomena a separate function called phase preference logic is needed, which is not common to be used in transmission applications. In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth fault current might not give start of the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive earth fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single line to earth fault.
Fault infeed from remote end
All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings.
172
REG 670
With reference to figure 68, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:
VA = IA p ZL + ( IA + IB ) Rf
If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the relay at A side
(Equation 46)
ZA =
Va IA + IB = p ZL + ZA IA IA
(Equation 47)
The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source impedances at local and remote end.
EsA
ZSA
VA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
VA B ZSB
EsB
Z<
Rf
Z<
en05000217.vsd
Figure 68:
Influence of fault infeed from remote end.
The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment for the Mho circle is illustrated to the left in figure 69. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of cause not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings i.e. to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection i.e. the ability to detect resistive faults.
REG 670
173
jX
jX
Load Load
Load Load
Load Load No operation
Load Load
en06000403.vsd
Figure 69:
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic
The mho function in REL 670 has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right in figure 69. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for line to earth faults at remote end. For example for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd(see figure 70) for the load encroachment function, the zone reach can be expanded according to the right in figure 70 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. The part of the load encroachment sector that comes inside the mho circle will not cause a trip if the load encroachment function is activated for the zone measurement. This is valid in both directions.
174
REG 670
RLd ArgLd ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd
ArgLd
en06000404.vsd
Figure 70:
Load encroachment characteristic
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be switched off. The main settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the mho phase selector function PHSM. The operation of load encroachment function is always activated. To deactivate the function , the setting of RLdFw and RLdRv must be set to a value much higher than the maximal load impedance.
Short line application
The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std C37.113-1999. ). The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source impedance at the protected lines terminal to the protected lines impedance (SIR). SIRs of about 4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with SIRs greater than 0.5 and less than 4. In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see table 50.
REG 670
175
Table 50:
Line category
Definition of short and very short line

Un 110 kV Un 500 kV 5-25 km 25-50 km
Very short line Short line
1.1-5.5 km 5.5-11 km
The use of load encroachment algorithm in REL 670 mho function improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance (see previous right figure 4). For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that the voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching. Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications so the load encroachment function could be switched off (LoadEncMode = Off). This will increase the possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.
Long transmission line application
For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance i.e. to avoid load encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for line to earth fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded. What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is noted in table 51.
Table 51:
Line category Long lines Very long lines
Definition of long lines

Un 110 kV 77 km - 99 km > 99 km Un 500 kV 350 km - 450 km > 450 km
As mentioned in the previous chapter, the possibility to use the binary information from the load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated). The possibility to also use blinder together with load encroachment algorithm will considerable increase the security but might also lower the dependability since the blinder might cut off a larger part of the operating area of the circle (see right figure 5 in previous chapter). It is recommended to use at least one of the load discrimination function for long heavy loaded transmission lines.
Parallel line application with mutual coupling
176
REG 670

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.
One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. The mho distance protection within the REL 670 IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single-phaseto-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.
REG 670
177

Parallel line applications This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation modes: 1. 2. 3. parallel line in service. parallel line out of service and earthed. parallel line out of service and not earthed.
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 71.
A Z0m
Z<
Figure 71:
Z<
en05000221.vsd
Class 1, parallel line in service.
The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 72.
Z0 - Z0m Z0m C Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
Figure 72:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar.
If the current on the parallel line have negative sign compare to the current on the protected line i.e. the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compare to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach. Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% i.e. the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%. 178 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line terminal closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive under-reach scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthedgrounded
A Z0m
Z<
Figure 73:
Z<
en05000222.vsd
The parallel line is out of service and earthed.
When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends on the bus bar side of the line CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 73.
A
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m
I0
Z0 Z0m
99000039.vsd
Figure 74:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends.
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 48.
Z0 E = Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 48)
2 2
The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is a recommendation to use a separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerable when the line is in operation.
REG 670
179

Parallel line out of service and not earthedgrounded
A Z0m
Z<
Figure 75:
Z<
en05000223.vsd
Parallel line is out of service and not earthed.
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthe, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 75 The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m Z0 Z0m

99000040.vsd
I0
B
Figure 76:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed.
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 49.
1 (2 Z1 + Z0 E + R f 2 Z 0m 3 KU = = 11 Z0 (2 Z1 + Z0 + 3R f (2 Z1 + Z0 ) + R f 3
This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions.
(Equation 49)
Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.
180
REG 670

Tapped line application
A IA T Z< Z< -IB IB B
IC
Z< C
en05000224.vsd
Figure 77:
Example of tapped line with Auto transformer.
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end" i.e. increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will be
ZA = ZAT +
IA + IC ZTB IA
(Equation 50)
ZC = ZTrf + ( ZCT +
IA + IC U2 ZTB ) ( ) 2 IC U1
(Equation 51)
Where: ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault divided by the relay current. For the relay at C, the impedance on REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 181
the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 77), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the relays, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1 settings i.e. without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.
4.6.1.2
Setting guidelines General

The settings for the distance protection function are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analogue input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in the distance protection function. The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the relay and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
The setting values of all parameters that belong to the mho distance protection within the REL 670 protection IED, must correspond to the parameters of the protected line and be coordinated to the selectivity plan for the network.
182
REG 670
Use different setting groups for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. In this way it is possible to optimize the settings for each system condition
Setting of zone1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your application. We recommend to compensate the setting for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earth fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
Setting of overreaching zone
The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the relay location. The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances: The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
If the requirements in the bullet list above gives a zone2 reach that gives nonselectivity between the overreaching zone and the shortest outgoing line at the remote end, the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted wit a simple example below. If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 11, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the relay at point A senses the impedance:
IA + I B I B - Z CF Zm = Z AC + --------------- ZC F = Z AC + 1 + ---I A IA
(Equation 52)
REG 670
183
Z AC
Z CD
IA
Z CF
I A+ IB Z< IB
en05000457.vsd
Figure 78:
Setting of reverse zone
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line terminal for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 53 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed etc.
Zrev 1.2 ( ZL - Z2rem )
(Equation 53)
Where: ZL Z2rem is the protected line impedance is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line.
In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.
Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service Setting of zone1 With reference to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. Parallel line in service setting of zone2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single-phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 72 in section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling". 184 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0 E = R0 + R0m
X 0 E = X 0 + X 0m
(Equation 54)
(Equation 55)
Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:
K 0 = 1Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 56)
If needed, enlarge the zone reach due to the reduction by mutual coupling, Consider also the influence on the zone reach due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines. Parallel line is out of service and earthedgrounded in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single-phase-to-earth faults. The equivalent impedance will be according to equation 48 The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function or blinder function is not activated (BlinderMode=Off). The load encroachment function will not be activated if RLdFw and RLdRv is set to a value higher than expected minimal load impedance. If the load encroachment or blinder function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the relay boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
U Z loadmin = -----S
2
Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function
(Equation 57)
Where: U S is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV is the maximum apparent power in MVA.
The load impedance [/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the maximum load current:
REG 670
185
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
(Equation 58)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions. To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set impedance reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance. For setting of the earth fault loop, the following formula can be used:
ZPE 1.6 Z Load 2(1 - cos( b ))
(Equation 59)
where: Zload jPE = magnitude of minimum load impedance = 180-2g =1802(ArgPE-QLoad)
The formula is derived by trigonometric analyze of the figure xx below. The lengh of the vector from the origin O to the point F on the circle is defined by the law of cosine. The result gives the maximum diameter (RFPE) for which the load impedance touch the circle with the given load condition. An extra margin of 20% is used to give respect distance between the calculated
jX
rc
ZPE/2
(Ref)
? O
oa |Zl d|/ 2
F ArgLd Load
d|
R
Ohm/phase
|Zl
oa
en06000406.vsd
Figure 79:
Definition of the setting condition to avoid load encroachment for earth fault loop
186
REG 670
In similar way we can define the maximum setting for phase-to-phase fault by trigonometric analyze of the same figure 79.The formula to avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements will thus be according to equation 60.
ZPP 1.6
Z Load 2 (1 - cos(j PP))

(Equation 60)
where: jPP = 1802(ArgPP-QLoad)
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element or blinder is activated for the protection zones. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of the power swing detection function.
Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, refer to section "".
Setting of minimum operating currents
The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base current for the analogue input channels. The value have been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of terminal base current. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
Setting of directional mode
Setting of the directional mode is by default set to forward by setting the parameter DirMode to Forward. The selection of Offset mho can be used for sending block signal in blocking Teleprotection scheme, switch onto fault application etc. The Reverse mode might be use in comparison schemes where it is necessary to absolute discriminate between forward and reverse fault.
Setting of direction for offset mho
If offset mho has been selected, one can select if the offset mho shall be NonDirectional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter OfffsetMhoDir.
REG 670
187
When forward or reverse operation is selected, then the operation characteristic will be cut off by the directional lines used for the quadrilateral characteristic. The setting is by default set to Non-Directional.
Setting of timers for distance protection zones
The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E (tPE) and for the ph-ph (tPP) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
4.6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 52:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase DirMode
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Off ON 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Offset Forward Reverse Off ON OverReach Underreach Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000 Step 1 0.05 Default ON 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off/On Base current Base voltage Direction mode
LoadEnchMode ReachMode OpModePE
Off OverReach ON
Load enchroachment mode Off/On Reach mode Over/ Underreach Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Earth loop Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhaseEarth loop Magnitud of earth return compensation factor KN Angle for earth return compensation factor KN Reverse reach of the phase to earth loop(magnitude)
ZPE
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
ZAngPE
10 - 90
80
Deg
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
KNAng
-180 - 180
-15
Deg
ZRevPE
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
188
REG 670

Parameter tPE Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Delay time for operation of phase to earth elements Minimum operation phase to earth current Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhasePhase elements Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to phase Minimum operation phase to phase current
IMinOpPE OpModePP
10 - 30 Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000
1 -
20 ON
%IB -
ZPP
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
ZAngPP
10 - 90
85
Deg
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%UB
Table 53:
Parameter OffsetMhoDir
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Non-directional Forward Reverse Off ON Off ON Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Direction mode for offset mho Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Phph
OpModetPE
ON
OpModetPP
ON
4.6.2
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function block name: ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
<
REG 670
189

4.6.2.1 Application
Normally the generator operates synchronously with the power system, i.e. all the generators in the system have the same angular velocity and approximately the same phase angle difference. If the phase angle between the generators gets too large the stable operation of the system cannot be maintained. In such a case the generator loses the synchronism (pole slip) to the external power system. The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons. A short circuit occurs in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, so the synchronism cannot be maintained. The relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip, relative to the external power system, is shown in figure 80.
en06000313.vsd
Figure 80:
Relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip relative to the external power system
The relative angle of the generator is shown for different fault duration at a threephase short circuit close to the generator. As the fault duration increases the angle swing amplitude increases. When the critical fault clearance time is reached the stability cannot be maintained.
190
REG 670
Un-damped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too weak the amplitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost. At the moment of pole slip there will be a centre of this pole slip, which is equivalent with distance protection impedance measurement of a threephase. If this point is situated in the generator itself, the generator should be tripped as fast as possible. If the locus of the out of step centre is located in the power system outside the generators the power system should, if possible, be split into two parts, and the generators should be kept in service. This split can be made at predefined locations (trip of predefined lines) after function from pole slip protection in the line protection IED.
en06000314.vsd
Figure 81:
Undamped oscillations causing pole slip
The relative angle of the generator is shown a contingency in the power system, causing un-damped oscillations. After a few periods of the oscillation the swing amplitude gets to large and the stability cannot be maintained. If the excitation of the generator gets too low there is a risk that the generator cannot maintain synchronous operation. The generator will slip out of phase and operate as an induction machine. Normally the under-excitation protection will detect this state
REG 670
191
and trip the generator before the pole slip. For this fault the under-excitation protection and the pole slip protection will give mutual redundancy. The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator block. At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine shaft. In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron. At asynchronous operation the generator will absorb a significant amount of reactive power, thus risking overload of the windings.
The pole slip protection function shall detect out of step conditions and trip the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the pole slip is inside the generator. If the centre of pole slip is outside the generator, situated out in the power grid, the first action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails there should be operation of the generator pole slip protection, to prevent further damages to the generator block.
4.6.2.2
Setting guidelines
Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, according to equation 61.
IBase = SN 3 U N
(Equation 61)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-phase) in kV measureMode: The voltage and current used for the impedance measurement is set by the parameter measureMode. The setting possibilities are: positive sequence voltage and current, impedance in the measurement loop L1-L2, impedance in the measurement loop L2-L3 or impedance in the measurement loop L3-L1. If all phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED the positive sequence alternative is recommended (default). Further settings can be illustrated in figure 82.
192
REG 670
Zone 1 EB Xd XT
Zone 2 EA
ZS
REG 670 jX
ZA
Pole slip impedance movement ZC TripAngle
Zone 2 Zone 1 WarnAngle f R
ZB
en06000548.vsd
Figure 82:
Settings for the Pole slip detection function
The impedance ZA is the forward impedance as show in figure 82. ZA should be the sum of the transformer impedance XT and the equivalent impedance of the external system ZS. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, according to equation 62.
UBase Z Base = IBase 3
(Equation 62)
The impedance ZB is the reverse impedance as show in figure 82. ZB should be equal to the generator transient reactance X'd. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, see equation 62.
REG 670
193
The impedance ZC is the forward impedance giving the borderline between zone 1 and zone 2. ZC should be equal to the transformer reactance ZT. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, see equation 62. The angle of the impedance line ZB ZA is given as anglePhi in degrees. This angle is normally close to 90. startAngle: An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for startAngle. The default value 110 is recommended. It should be checked so that the points in the impedance plane, corresponding to the chosen startAngle does not interfere with apparent impedance at maximum generator load. tripAngle: If a pole slip has been detected: change of rotor angle corresponding to slip frequency 0.2 8 Hz, the slip line ZA ZB is crossed and the direction of rotation is the same as at start, a trip is given when the rotor angle gets below the set tripAngle. The default value 90 is recommended. n1Limit: The set parameter n1Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA ZB is within zone 1, i.e. the node of the pole slip is within the generator transformer block. The default value 1 is recommended to minimize the stress on the generator and turbine at out of step conditions. n2Limit: The set parameter n2Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA ZB is within zone 2, i.e. the node of the pole slip is in the external network. The default value 3 is recommended give external protections possibility to split the network and thus limit the system consequencies. tReset: The parameter tReset gives the time for the function to reset after start when no pole slip been detected. The default value 5 s is recommended.
Setting example for line application
In case of out of step conditions this shall be detected and the line between substation 1 and 2 shall be tripped.
ZA = forward source impedance
ZB
Line impedance = ZC
IED 670
en07000014.vsd
Figure 83:
Line application of pole slip protection
If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB ZA this is the detection criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 84.
194
REG 670
ZA
ZC anglePhi R Apparent impedance at normal load
ZB
en07000015.vsd
Figure 84:
Impedances to be set for pole slip protection
The setting parameters of the protection is: ZA: ZB: ZC: The source impedance in the forward direction The source impedance in the reverse direction The line impedance in the forward direction The impedance phase angle
anglePhi:
Use the following data: UBase: 400 kV SBase set to 1000 MVA Short circuit power at station 1 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance) Short circuit power at station 2 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance Line impedance: 2 + j20 ohm
With all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED, it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence. The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:
REG 670
195
ZBase =
UBase 2 SBase
400 2 1000
= 160ohm
(Equation 63)
ZA = Z (line ) + Zsc ( station 2) = 2 + j 20 + j
400
5000
= 2 + j 52ohm
(Equation 64)
This corresponds to:
ZA =
2 + j 52 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.325 pu = 0.32588 pu

(Equation 65)
Set ZA to 0.32.
ZB = Zsc ( station1) = j
400 2 5000
= j 32ohm
(Equation 66)
ZB =
j 32 160
= j 0.20 pu = 0.2090 pu
(Equation 67)
Set ZB to 0.2 This corresponds to:
ZC =
2 + j 20 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.12684 pu

(Equation 68)
Set ZC to 0.13 and anglePhi to 88 The warning angle (startAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 2000 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:
Z=
U S
400
2000
= 80ohm
(Equation 69)
Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 85.
196
REG 670
ZA Zload R ZB
en07000016.vsd
Figure 85:
Simplified figure to derive startAngle
angleStart arctan
ZB Zload
+ arctan
ZA Zload
= arctan
32 80
+ arctan
52 80
= 21.8 + 33.0 55
(Equation 70)
In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin. Set startAngle to 110 For the tripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90 to assure limited stress for the circuit breaker. In a power system it is desirable to split the system into predefined parts in case of pole slip. The protection is therefore situated at lines where this predefined split shall take place. Normally the n1Limit is set to 1 so that the line will be tripped at the first pole slip. If the line shall be tripped at all pole slip situations also the parameter n2Limit is set to 1. In other cases a larger number is recommended.
REG 670
197

Setting example for generator application
In case of out of step conditions this shall be checked if the pole slip centre is inside the generator (zone 1) or if it is situated in the network (zone 2).
ZA ZB ZC
en07000017.vsd
Figure 86:
Generator application of pole slip protection
If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB ZA this is the detected criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 87.
X ZA
ZC anglePhi R Apparent impedance at normal load
ZB
en07000015.vsd
Figure 87:
Impedances to be set for pole slip protection
The setting parameters of the protection are: ZA ZB ZC The source impedance in the forward direction The generator transient reactance The block transformer reactance
198
REG 670
anglePhi
The impedance phase angle
Use the following generator data: UBase: 20 kV SBase set to 200 MVA Xd": 25%
Use the following block transformer data: UBase: 20 kV (low voltage side) SBase set to 200 MVA ek: 15%
Short circuit power from the external network without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance). We have all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED. Therefore it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence. The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:
ZBase =
UBase
SBase
20
200
= 2.0ohm
(Equation 71)
ZA = Z (transf ) + Zsc (network ) = j
202 202 0.15 + j = j 0.38ohm 200 5000
(Equation 72)
ZA =
j 0.38 2.0
= j 0.19 pu = 0.1990 pu
(Equation 73)
Set ZA to 0.19
ZB = jX d = j
20 2 200
0.25 = j 0.5ohm
(Equation 74)
REG 670
199
ZB =
j 0.5 2.0
= j 0.25 pu = 0.2590 pu
(Equation 75)
Set ZB to 0.25
ZC = jX T = j 202 0.15 = j 0.3ohm 200
(Equation 76)
ZC =
2 + j 20 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.12684 pu

(Equation 77)
Set ZC to 0.15 and anglePhi to 90. The warning angle (startAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 200 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:
Z=
U S
20
200
= 2ohm
(Equation 78)
Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 88.
200
REG 670
ZA Zload R ZB
en07000016.vsd
Figure 88:
Simplified figure to derive startAngle
angleStart arctan
ZB Zload
+ arctan
ZA Zload
= arctan
0.25 2
+ arctan
0.19 2
= 7.1 + 5.4 13
(Equation 79)
In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin. Set startAngle to 110. For the tripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90 to assure limited stress for the circuit breaker. If the centre of pole slip is within the generator block set n1Limit to 1 to get trip at first pole slip. If the centre of pole slip is within the network set n2Limit to 3 to get enable split of the system before generator trip.
4.6.2.3
Setting parameters
REG 670
201
Table 54:
Parameter IBase
Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.1 - 99999.9 Step 0.1 Default 3000.0 Unit A Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-tophase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1) Invert current direction
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
0.1
20.0
kV
MeasureMode
PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 No Yes
PosSeq
InvertCTcurr
No
Table 55:
Parameter Operation OperationZ1 OperationZ2 ImpedanceZA ImpedanceZB ImpedanceZC AnglePhi StartAngle TripAngle N1Limit N2Limit
Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 72.00 - 90.00 0.0 - 180.0 0.0 - 180.0 1 - 20 1 - 20 Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1 Default Off On On 10.00 10.00 10.00 85.00 110.0 90.0 1 3 Unit % % % Deg Deg Deg Description Operation On / Off Operation Zone1 On / Off Operation Zone2 On / Off Forward impedance in % of Zbase Reverse impedance in % of Zbase Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase Angle of the slip impedance line Rotor angle for the start signal Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals Count limit for the trip1 signal Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 56:
Parameter ResetTime
Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Time without slip to reset all signals
4.6.3
202
Loss of excitation (PDIS, 40)

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
Function block name: UEXx ANSI number: 40 IEC 61850 logical node name: LEXPDIS
Z<
4.6.3.1
Application
There are limits for the under-excitation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the external power system. The machine may lose the synchronism and starts to operate like an induction machine. Then, the reactive consumption will increase. Even if the machine does not lose synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time. The under-excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the synchronous machine. The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator winding and even the iron core. A generator connected to a power system can be represented by an equivalent single phase circuit as shown in figure 89. For simplicity the equivalent shows a generator having round rotor, (XdXq).
I, (P, Q) + E j Xd + V j Xnet + Enet -
en06000321.vsd
Figure 89:
where: E Xd Xnet Enet
A generator connected to a power system, represented by an equivalent single phase circuit
represents the internal voltage in the generator, is the stationary reactance of the generator, is an equivalent reactance representing the external power system and is an infinite voltage source representing the lumped sum of the generators in the system.
The active power out from the generator can be formulated according to equation 80:
REG 670
203
P=
E E net sin d X d + X net
(Equation 80)
where: The angle is the phase angle difference between the voltages E and Enet.
If the excitation of the generator is decreased (loss of field), the voltage E becomes low. In order to maintain the active power output the angle must be increased. It is obvious that the maximum power is achieved at 90. If the active power cannot be reached at 90 static stability cannot be maintained. The complex apparent power from the generator, at different angles is shown in figure 90. The line corresponding to 90 is the static stability limit. It must be noticed that the power limitations shown below is highly dependent on the network impedance.
Q
70 80 P 90
en06000322.vsd
Figure 90:
The complex apparent power from the generator, at different angles
To prevent damages to the generator block, the generator should be tripped at underexcitation. A suitable area, in the PQ-plane, for protection operation is shown in figure 91. In this example limit is set to a small negative reactive power independent of active power.
204
REG 670
70 80 P 90
Underexcitation Protection Operation area
en06000450.vsd
Figure 91:
Suitable area, in the PQ-plane, for protection operation
Often the capability curve of a generator describes also the under-excitation capability of the generator, see figure 92.
REG 670
205
Q [pu] Motor 0.8 0.6

8 0. g gin S lag
Generator
A B
Overexcited
d te Ra
VA
f. p.
37o 0.6
o
Underexcited -0.3 -0.5
0.2 0.4 Rate dM VA p.
0.8
P [pu] F Xe=0.2
18 f. 0 . 95 l ead i ng
C F
E D
Xs=0
en06000451.vsd
Figure 92:
where: AB BC CD BH EF Xs
Capability curve of a generator
= Field current limit = Stator current limit = End region heating limit of stator, due to leakage flux = Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation = Steady-state limit without AVR = Source impedance of connected power system
The under-excitation protection can be based on directional power measurement or impedance measurement. The straight line in the P-Q plane can be transferred into the impedance plane by using the relation shown in equation 81.
Z= V V V * V 2 V 2 S V2 P V 2 Q = = * = * = 2 + j 2 = R + jX * 2 I I V S S S P +Q P + Q2
(Equation 81)
The straight line in the PQ-diagram will be equivalent with a circle in the impedance plane, see figure 93. In this example the circle is corresponding to constant Q, i.e. characteristic parallel with P-axis.
206
REG 670
Underexcitation Protection Operation area
en06000452.vsd
Figure 93:
The straight line in the PQ-diagram, equivalent with a circle in the impedance plane
The protection in REG 670 is realised by two impedance circles and a directional restrain possibility as shown in figure 94.
REG 670
207
Underexcitation Protection Restrain area R
Z1, Fast zone Z2, Slow zone
en06000453.vsd
Figure 94:
The protection in REG 670, realized by two impedance circles and a directional restrain possibility
4.6.3.2
Setting guidelines
Here is described the setting when there are two zones activated of the protection. Zone Z1 will give a fast trip in case of reaching the dynamic limitation of the stability. Zone 2 will give a trip after a longer delay if the generator reaches the static limitation of stability. There is also a directional criterion used to prevent trip at close in external faults in case of zones reaching into the impedance area as shown in figure 94. Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enable/Disable. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated Current in A, see equation 82.
IBase = SN 3 U N
(Equation 82)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-phase) in kV. measureMode: The voltage and current used for the impedance measurement is set by the parameter measureMode. The setting possibilities are: positive sequence 208 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
voltage and current, impedance in the measurement loop L1-L2, impedance in the measurement loop L2-L3 or impedance in the measurement loop L3-L1. If all phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED the positive sequence alternative is recommended (default). OperationZ1, OperationZ2: With the parameters OperationZ1 and OperationZ2 each zone can be set On/Off. For the two zones the impedance settings are made as shown in figure 95.
X
R -XoffsetZ1 or -XoffsetZ2
Z1diameter or Z2diameter
Z1 or Z2
en06000460.vsd
Figure 95:
Impedance settings for the fast (Z1) and slow (Z2) zone
The impedances are given in pu of the base impedance according to equation 83.
(Equation 83)
XOffsetZ1 and XOffsetZ2, offset of impedance circle top along the X axis, are given negative value if X < 0.
REG 670
209
XOffsetZ1: It is recommended to set XOffsetZ1= -X-Xdd/2 and Z1diameter = 1.1 Xd - X-Xdd/2 . DelayZ1: DelayZ1 is the setting of trip delay for Z1 and this parameter is recommended to set 0.0 s. It is recommended to set XOffsetZ2 equal to Xe (the equivalent impedance of the external network) and Z2diamater equal to 1.1 Xd + Xe. DelayZ2: DelayZ2 is the setting of trip delay for Z2 and this parameter is recommended to set 2.0 s not to risk unwanted trip at oscillations with temporary apparent impedance within the characteristic. DirSuperv: The directional restrain characteristic allows impedance setting with positive X value without the risk of unwanted operation of the under-excitation function. To enable the directional restrain option the parameter DirSuperv shall be set On. XoffsetDirLine, DirAngle: The parameters XoffsetDirLine and DirAngle are shown in figure 96. XoffsetDirLine is set in pu of the base impedance according to equation 84.
(Equation 84)
XoffsetDirLine is given a positive value if X > 0. DirAngle is set in degrees with negative value in the 4th quadrant.
210
REG 670
Underexcitation Protection Restrain area
XoffsetDirLine DirAngle
en06000461.vsd
Figure 96:
The parameters XoffsetDirLine and DirAngle
4.6.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 57:
Parameter IBase
Basic general settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range 0.1 - 99999.9 Step 0.1 Default 3000 Unit A Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-tophase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
0.1
20
kV
MeasureMode
PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1
PosSeq
REG 670
211
Table 58:
Parameter Operation OperationZ1 XoffsetZ1
Basic parameter group settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range Off On Off On -1000.00 1000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 Step 0.01 Default Off On -10.00 Unit % Description Operation Off / On Operation Off/On zone Z1 Offset of Z1 circle top point along X axis in % of Zbase Diameter of imedance circle for Z1 in % of Zbase Trip time delay for Z1 Operation Off/On zone Z2 Offset of Z2 circle top point along X axis in % of Zbase Diameter of imedance circle for Z2 in % of Zbase Trip time delay for Z2
Z1diameter
0.01
100.00
tZ1 OperationZ2 XoffsetZ2
0.00 - 6000.00 Off On -1000.00 1000.00 0.01 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
0.01 On -10.00
s %
Z2diameter
0.01
200.00
tZ2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Table 59:
Parameter invertCTcurren
Advanced general settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range No Yes Step Default No Unit Description Invert CT current
Table 60:
Parameter DirSuperv
Advanced parameter group settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range Off On -1000.00 3000.00 -180.0 - 180.0 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On for additional directional criterion Offset of directional line along X axis in % of Zbase Angle between directional line and Raxis in degrees
XoffsetDirLine
0.01
0.00
DirAngle
0.1
-13.0
Deg
4.7
4.7.1
Current protection
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)
212
REG 670
Function block name: IOCxANSI number: 50 IEC 61850 logical node name: PHPIOC
3I>>
4.7.1.1
Application
Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electric power from production to consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electric power at each end of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger the stability of a complete system. The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at constant amount of transmitted electric power): The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions. The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease of transmitted power is high. The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.
The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for which very high fault currents are characteristic. For this reason instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (IOC), which can operate in 10 ms for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in some of the IED. Refer to the ordering information for more details.
4.7.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the phase overcurrent protection function (IOC) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM 600). This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation. Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth conditions.
REG 670
213
Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection. The setting parameters are described below: IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. If possible to find a suitable value the rated current of the protected object is chosen. OpMode: This parameter can be set to 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. The setting controls the minimum number of phase currents that must be larger than the set operate current IP>> for operation. Normally this parameter is set to 1 out of 3 and will thus detect all fault types. If the protection is to be used mainly for multi phase faults, 2 out of 3 should be chosen. IP>>: Set operate current in % of IBase. StValMult: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to the set factor StValMult.
Meshed network without parallel line
The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-toearth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 97, apply a fault in B and then calculate the relay through fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B.
ZA
I fB ZL
ZB
~
99000474.vsd
Relay Fault
Figure 97: Through fault current from A to B: IfB
Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be calculated, figure 98. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.
214
REG 670
ZA
I fA ZL
ZB
~
99000475.vsd
Relay Fault
Figure 98: Through fault current from B to A: IfA
The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB )
(Equation 85)
A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1, 3 I min
(Equation 86)
The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear, IF in figure 99.
IF
ZA
ZL
ZB
~
99000476.vsd
Relay Fault
Figure 99: Fault current: IF
REG 670
215
The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the primary base current value, IBase. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:
I >>=
Is x100 IBase
(Equation 87)
Meshed network with parallel line
In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 100 where the two lines are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in figure 100 will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open. A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM ) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-toearth faults) is calculated.
Line 1 A C ZL1 B ZB Fault ZL2 IM Relay

Figure 100:
99000477.vsd
ZA M
Line 2
Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM
The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )
(Equation 88)
Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1.3 Im in
(Equation 89)
216
REG 670
The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the relay has to clear. The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the primary base current value, IBase. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:
I >>= Is x100 IBase
(Equation 90)
4.7.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 61:
Parameter Operation IBase OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IP>>
200
%IB
Table 62:
Parameter StValMult
Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level
4.7.2
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Function block name: TOCxANSI number: 51/67 IEC 61850 logical node name: OC4PTOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3I> 4 4 alt
4.7.2.1
Application
The phase overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are:
REG 670
217
Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure. Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines. Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others. Back-up short circuit protection of power generators. If VT inputs are not available or not connected, function parameter DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time delays are needed. TOC can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The flexibility of each step of the TOC function is great. The following options are possible: Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be necessary. Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic. Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used. For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal to the function. Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore
218
REG 670
the TOC function have a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current. The phase overcurrent protection is often used as protection for two and three phase short circuits. In some cases it is not wanted to detect single-phase earth faults by the phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation of earth fault protection. Therefore it is possible to make a choice how many phases, at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3 single-phase earth faults are not detected.
4.7.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (TOC) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection. MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS) signals Operation: Off/On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current of the protected object. UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is give as a phase-to-phase voltage and this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. Normally the setting should be chosen to the rated phase-to-phase voltage of the voltage transformer feeding the protection IED. AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop current has the angle RCA the direction to fault is forward. AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional function, see figure 101. IminOpPhSel: Minimum current for phase selection set in % of IBase. This setting should be less than the lowest step setting. Default setting is 7%. StartPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting possibilities are: 1 of 3, 2 of 3 and 3 of 3. Default setting is 1 of 3. 2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% I steps of 1%. Default setting is 20%. HarmRestrain: Off/On, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.
REG 670
219
Reverse
Uref RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 101:
Directional function characteristic
DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/ forward/reverse. Characteristx: Selection of time delay characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available according to table 63.
Table 63:
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse Table continued on next page
Settings for each step (x = 1-4)
Inverse time delay characteristics

Curve index No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
220
REG 670

Curve name ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic) Curve index No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19
The different characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. Ix>: Operation phase current level for step x given in % of IBase. tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. Setting range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic. IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0 txMin: Minimum operation time for IEC inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k. ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 64.
Table 64:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset (constant time) ANSI Reset (inverse time)
Reset possibilities
Curve index no. 1 2 3
REG 670
221
The delay characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1-4 and 6-8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9-14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given. HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On. tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 91 for the time characteristic equation.
A + B IxMult t [s] = i p -C in >

For more information, please refer to the Technical reference manual.
(Equation 91)
tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual.
Second harmonic restrain
If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function. The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below.
222
REG 670
2ndHarmStab: The rate of second harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5-100% in step of 1%. The default setting is 20%. HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Off/On, disable or enable the 2nd harmonic restrain. The four-step phase overcurrent protection can be used in different ways, depending on the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below. The pick up current setting inverse time protection or the lowest current step constant inverse time protection must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be taken to the protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in figure 102.
Current I
Line phase current Pick-up current
Reset current
The relay does not reset
Time t
en05000203.vsd
Figure 102:
Pick up and reset current for an overcurrent protection
The lowest setting value can be written according to equation 92.

I pu 1.2 I max k
(Equation 92)
where: 1.2 is a safety factor,
REG 670
223
k Imax
is the resetting ratio of the protection, and is the maximum load current.
The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found. The current setting must be valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic that the setting values are updated not more often than once every five years. In many cases this time interval is still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that different equipment on the line can withstand. Study components such as line conductors, current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment. There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be detected by the phase overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can be written according to equation 93.
I pu 0.7 I sc min
where: 0.7 Iscmin is a safety factor and is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.
(Equation 93)
As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval stated in equation 94.
1.2
I max I pu 0.7 I sc min k
(Equation 94)
The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to
I high 1.2 kt I sc max

where:
(Equation 95)
224
REG 670
1.2 kt Iscmax
is a safety factor, is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current and can be considered to be less than 1.1 is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.
The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault time is so short so that equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload, at the same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection. In the figure below is shown how the time-versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.
en05000204.wmf
Figure 103:
Fault time with maintained selectivity
The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection. To assure selectivity between different protective protections, in the radial network, there have to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the shortest possible time difference between we must have knowledge about operation time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. These time
REG 670
225
delays can vary significantly between different pieces of equipment. The following time delays can be estimated:
protection operation time: protection resetting time: Breaker opening time: 15-60 ms 15-60 ms 20-120 ms
Example
Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as shown in the figure below. We study a fault located at another line from the station B. The fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED A1 must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be described using a time axis, see figure 104.
A1
B1
Feeder
I>
I>
Time axis
t=0 The fault occurs
t=t1 Protection B1 trips
t=t2 Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 Protection A1 resets

en05000205.vsd
Figure 104:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
Sequence of events during fault
is the fault occurs, is the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent. Operation time of this protection is t1, is the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1 and is the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.
To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger that the time t3. There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. Therefor a safety margin has to be included. With 226 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to equation 96.
Dt 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
where it is considered that: the operation time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms the breaker open time the resetting time of protection A1 the additional margin is 100 ms is 40 ms and is 40 ms
(Equation 96)
4.7.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 65:
Parameter MeasType
Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range DFT RMS Step Default DFT Unit Description Selection between DFT and RMS measurement
Table 66:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA AngleROA StartPhSel
Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 Not Used 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Step 1 0.05 1 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3 Unit A kV Deg Deg Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
DirMode1
Non-directional
REG 670
227

Parameter Characterist1 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
I1>
1000
%IB
Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
t1 k1
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.000 0.05
s -
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode2
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Non-directional
Characterist2
ANSI Def. Time
I2>
500
%IB
Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase
228
REG 670

Parameter t2 k2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 Step 0.001 0.01 Default 0.400 0.05 Unit s Description Definitive time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 3
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
DirMode3
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Non-directional
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
I3>
250
%IB
Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
t3 k3
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.800 0.05
s -
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode4
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse
Non-directional
REG 670
229

Parameter Characterist4 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
I4>
175
%IB
Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4
t4 k4
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
2.000 0.05
s -
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Table 67:
Parameter IMinOpPhSel
Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 7 Unit %IB Description Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
230
REG 670

Parameter tACrv1 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain1
Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000
Off
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
REG 670
231

Parameter tTRCrv2 Range 0.005 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain2
Off
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain3
Off
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.001
0.020
232
REG 670

Parameter tPCrv4 Range 0.005 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain4
Off On
Off
4.7.3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Function block name: IEFxANSI number: 50N IEC 61850 logical node name: EFPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IN>>
4.7.3.1
Application
In many application, when fault current is limited to a defined value by the object impedance, an instantaneous earth fault protection can provide fast and selective tripping.
REG 670
233
The instantaneous residual overcurrent (IEF), which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in the IED.
4.7.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the instantaneous residual overcurrent protection function (IEF) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM 600). Some guidelines for the choice of setting parameter for the instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (IEF) function is given. The setting of the function is limited to the operation residual current to the protection (IN>>). The basic requirement is to assure selectivity, i.e. the IEF function shall not be allowed to operate for faults at other objects than the protected object (line). For a normal line in a meshed system single phase to earth faults and phase to phase to earth faults shall be calculated as shown in figure 105 and figure 106. The residual currents (3I0) to the protection are calculated. For the fault at the remote line end this fault current is IfB. In this calculation the operational state with high source impedance ZA and low source impedance ZB should be used. For the fault at the home busbar this fault current is IfA. In this calculation the operational state with low source impedance ZA and high source impedance ZB should be used.
ZA
I fB ZL
ZB
~
99000474.vsd
Relay Fault
Figure 105: Through fault current from A to B: IfB
234
REG 670
ZA
I fA ZL
ZB
~
99000475.vsd
Relay Fault
Figure 106: Through fault current from B to A: IfA
The function shall not operate for any of the calculated currents to the protection. The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfA )
(Equation 97)
A safety margin of 5% for the maximum static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to inaccuracy of instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum primary current setting (Is) is:
Is 1, 3 Imin
(Equation 98)
In case of parallel lines with zero sequence mutual coupling a fault on the parallel line, as shown in figure 107, should be calculated.
Line 1 A C ZL1 B ZB Fault ZL2 IM Relay

Figure 107:
99000477.vsd
ZA M
Line 2
Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM
REG 670
235
The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will in this case be:
I m in M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
(Equation 99)
Where: IfA and IfB have been described for the single line case.
Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) is:
Is 1, 3 Imin
(Equation 100)
Transformer inrush current shall be considered. The setting of the protection is set as a percentage of the base current (IBase). The setting parameters are described below: IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. If possible to find a suitable value the rated current of the protected object is chosen. IN>>: Set operate current in % of IBase. StValMult: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to the set factor StValMult.
4.7.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 68:
Parameter Operation IBase IN>>
Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase
Table 69:
Parameter StValMult
Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level
4.7.4
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)
236
REG 670
Function block name: TEFxANSI number:51N/ 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: EF4PTOC
IN 4 4 alt
4.7.4.1
Application
The residual overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are: Earth fault protection of feeders in effectively earthed distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure. Back-up earth fault protection of transmission lines. Sensitive earth fault protection of transmission lines. The residual overcurrent protection can have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase to earth faults compared to distance protection. Back-up earth fault protection of power transformers Earth fault protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time delays are needed. TEF can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The flexibility of each step of the TEF function is great. The following options are possible: Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for earth fault line protection in meshed and effectively earthed transmission systems. The directional residual overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of earth faults on transmission lines. The directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided by setting. Voltage polarizing (-3U0) is most commonly used but alternatively Current polarizing where current in transformer neutrals providing the neutral (zero sequence) source (ZN) is used to polarize (IN*ZN) the function. Dual polarizing where both voltage and current components is allowed to polarize can also be selected. Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
REG 670
237
range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic. Normally it is required that the residual overcurrent function shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used. For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up level for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor INnMultto the residual current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal ENMULTn to the function. Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This inrush current can have residual current components. The phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the cycle. There is a risk that inrush current will give a residual current that reaches level above the pick-up current of the residual overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore the TEF function has a possibility of second harmonic restrain HarmRestrainn if the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
4.7.4.2
Setting parameters
Table 70:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod
Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 65 Voltage Unit A kV Deg Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization
UPolMin
%UB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm
238
REG 670

Parameter XNPol Range 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 0.01 Default 40.00 Unit ohm Description Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN amplitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4) SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF +undertime) Select signal that shall activate SOTF Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF Switch-onto-fault active time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 1
IN>Dir
1 - 100
10
%IB
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
BlkParTransf UseStartValue
Off On IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF +UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
Off IN4>
SOTF
Off
ActivationSOTF
Open
StepForSOTF HarmResSOTF
Step 2 Off
tSOTF t4U DirMode1
0.001 0.001 -
0.200 1.000 Non-directional
s s -
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
REG 670
239

Parameter IN1> Range 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default 100 Unit %IB Description Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 2
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain1
Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
On
DirMode2
Non-directional
Characterist2
ANSI Def. Time
IN2>
50
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
240
REG 670

Parameter HarmRestrain2 Range Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default On Unit Description Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 3
DirMode3
Non-directional
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
IN3>
33
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
t3 k3
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.800 0.05
s -
IN3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain3
Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse
On
DirMode4
Non-directional
REG 670
241

Parameter Characterist4 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Time delay curve type for step 4
IN4>
17
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain4
Off On
On
Table 71:
Parameter ActUnderTime
Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range CB position CB command Step Default CB position Unit Description Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/ CBCommand) Time delay for under time Reset curve type for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1
tUnderTime ResetTypeCrv1
0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 -
0.300 Instantaneous
s -
tReset1
0.001
0.020
242
REG 670

Parameter tPCrv1 Range 0.005 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Reset curve type for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000
Instantaneous
tReset2 tPCrv2
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
REG 670
243

Parameter tTRCrv2 Range 0.005 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Reset curve type for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Reset curve type for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
tReset3 tPCrv3
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
tReset4 tPCrv4
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
244
REG 670

Parameter tBCrv4 Range 0.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
4.7.5
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Function block name: SDExANSI number: 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: SDEPSDE IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.7.5.1
Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I03U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
REG 670
245
A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive back-up protection. In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.
4.7.5.2
Setting guidelines
The sensitive earthground fault protection is intended to be used in high impedance earthed systems, or in systems with resistive earthing where the neutral point resistor gives an earth fault current larger than what normal high impedance gives but smaller than the phase to phase short circuit current. In a high impedance system the fault current is assumed to be limited by the system zero sequence shunt impedance to earth and the fault resistance only. All the series impedances in the system are assumed to be zero. In the setting of earth fault protection, in a high impedance grounded system, the neutral point voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the earth fault current will be
246
REG 670
calculated at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated as:
U0 = U phase 1+ 3 Rf Z0
(Equation 101)
Where Uphase Rf Z0 is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault, is the resistance to earth in the fault point and is the system zero sequence impedance to earth
The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

I j = 3I 0 = 3 U phase Z0 + 3 R f
(Equation 102)
The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system earthing. In an isolated system (without neutral point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling between the phase conductors and earth:
Z 0 = - jX c = - j 3 U phase Ij
(Equation 103)
Where Ij is the capacitive earth fault current at a non-resistive phase to earth fault
In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance grounded system) the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:
Z0 = - jX c 3R n - jX c + 3R n
(Equation 104)
Where Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor
REG 670
247
In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or more transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:
Z 0 = - jX c // 3R n // j3X n = 9R n X n X c
3X n X c + j3R n ( 3X n - X c )
(Equation 105)
Where Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil. If the Petersen coil is well tuned we have 3Xn = Xc In this case the impedance Z0 will be: Z0 = 3Rn
Now consider a system with an earthing via a resistor giving higher earth fault current than the high impedance earthing. The series impedances in the system can no longer be neglected. The system with a single phase to earth fault can be described as in figure 108.
Source impedance Zsc (pos. seq)
ZT,1 (pos. seq) ZT,0 (zero seq)
RN
U0A 3I0
Substation A
ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq) ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)
U0B
Substation B
ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq) ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)
Phase to earth fault

en06000654.vsd
Figure 108:
Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting
The residual fault current can be written:
248
REG 670
3I 0 =
3U phase 2 Z1 + Z 0 + 3 R f
(Equation 106)
Where Uphase Z1 Z0 Rf is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point. Z1 = Zsc+ZT,1+ZlineAB,1+ZlineBC,1 is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point. Z0 = ZT,0+3RN+ZlineAB,0+ZlineBC,0 is the fault resistance.
The residual voltages in stations A and B can be written:

U 0 A = 3I 0 ( Z T ,0 + 3R N )
U OB = 3I 0 (Z T ,0 + 3R N + Z lineAB,0 )
(Equation 107)
(Equation 108)
The residual power, measured by the sensitive earth fault protections in A and B will be:
S0 A = 3U 0 A 3I 0
S0 B = 3U 0 B 3I 0
(Equation 109)
(Equation 110)
The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum sensitivity in the characteristic angle RCA. The apparent residual power component in the characteristic angle, measured by the protection, can be written:
S0 A ,prot = 3U 0 A 3I 0 cos j A
(Equation 111)
S0 B,prot = 3U 0 B 3I 0 cos j B
(Equation 112)
The angles A and B are the phase angles between the residual current and the residual voltage in the station compensated with the characteristic angle RCA. The protection will use the power components in the characteristic angle direction for measurement, and as base for the inverse time delay. The inverse time delay is defined as:
REG 670
249
t inv =
kSN (3I 0 3U 0 cos f (reference)) 3I 0 3U 0 cos f (measured)

(Equation 113)
In the setting of the function a number of parameters shall be given. The function can be set On/Off with the setting of Operation The setting IBase gives the base current in A. Normally the primary rated current of the CT feeding the protection should be chosen. The setting UBase gives the base voltage in kV. Normally the system phase to earth voltage is chosen. The setting SBase gives the base voltage in kVA. Normally IBase*UBase is chosen. With the setting OpMode the principle of directional function is chosen. With OpMode set to 3I0cosFi the current component in the direction equal to the characteristic angle RCADir is measured. The characteristic is for RCADir equal to 0 is shown in figure 109.
Uref RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref) 3I0 cos -3U0=Uref
en06000648.vsd
Figure 109:
Characteristic for RCADir equal to 0
The characteristic is for RCADir equal to -90 is shown in figure 110.
250
REG 670
Uref
RCA = -90, ROA = 90
3I0 3I0 cos = ang(3I0) ang(Uref) -3U0
en06000649.vsd
Figure 110:
Characteristic for RCADir equal to -90
With OpMode set to 3U03I0cosFi the apparent residual power component in the direction is measured. With OpMode set to 3I0 and Fi the function will operate if the residual current is larger than the setting INDir> and the residual current angle is within the sector RCADir ROADir. The characteristic for RCADir = 0 and ROADir = 80 is shown in figure 111.
REG 670
251
RCA = 0 ROA = 80
Operate area 3I0 80 -3U0
en06000652.vsd
Figure 111:
Characteristic for RCADir = 0 and ROADir = 80
DirMode is set Forward or Reverse to set the direction of the trip function from the directional residual current function. All the directional protection modes have a residual current release level setting INRel> which is set in % of the base current. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault current to be detected. All the directional protection modes have a residual voltage release level setting UNRel> which is set in % of the base voltage. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault residual voltage to be detected. tDef is the definite time delay, given in s, for the directional residual current protection if definite time delay is chosen. tReset is the reset time for definite time delay, given in s. With a tReset time of several periods there is increased possibilities to clear intermittent earth faults correctly. The setting shall be much shorter than the set trip delay. The characteristic angle of the directional functions RCADir is set in degrees. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The relay open angle ROADir is set in degrees. For angles differing more than ROADir from RCADir the function from the protection is blocked. The setting can be used to prevent unwanted function for non-faulted feeders, with large capacitive earth fault current contributions, due to CT phase angle error. 252 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
INCosPhi> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set INCosPhi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the active or capacitive earth fault current at required sensitivity of the protection. SN> is the operate power level for the directional function when OpMode is set INUNCosPhi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the active or capacitive earth fault residual power at required sensitivity of the protection. If the time delay for residual power is chosen the delay time is dependent on two setting parameters. SRef is the reference residual power, given in % of SBase. kSN is the time multiplier. The time delay will follow the following expression:
t inv = kSN Sref 3I 0 3U 0 cos j (measured)
(Equation 114)
INDir> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set IN and Phi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the earth fault current at required sensitivity of the protection. OpINNonDir> is set On to activate the non-directional residual current protection. INNonDir> is the operate current level for the non-directional function. The setting is given in % of IBase. This function can be used for detection and clearance of crosscountry faults in a shorter time than for the directional function. The current setting should be larger than the maximum single phase residual current out on the protected line. TimeChar is the selection of time delay characteristic for the non-directional residual current protection. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available:
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse Table continued on next page Curve index nr. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
REG 670
253
IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
13 14 15 17 18 19
The different characteristics are described in the Technical referens manual, chapter Time inverse characteristics. tPCrv, tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is:
A t[ s ] = + B InMult i p -C in >
Further description can be found in chapter xx.
(Equation 115)
tINNonDir is the definite time delay for the non directional earth fault current protection, given in s. OpUN> is set On to activate the trip function of the residual voltage protection. tUNNonDir is the definite time delay for the trip function of the residual voltage protection, given in s.
4.7.5.3
Setting parameters
Table 72:
Parameter IBase UBase SBase
Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Unit A kV kVA Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase
254
REG 670
Table 73:
Parameter Operation OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Unit Description Operation Off / On Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of nondirectional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for nondirectional residual over current, in sec
DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir
1 0.1 1
Forward -90 0.0 90
Deg Deg Deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
INDir>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
5.00
%IB
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir>
Off On
Off
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
0.01
10.00
%IB
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
REG 670
255

Parameter TimeChar Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default IEC Norm. inv. Unit Description Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
tMin
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of nondirectional residual overvoltage protection Set level for nondirectional residual over voltage, in %Ub Time delay for nondirectional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpUN>
Off On
Off
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
20.00
%UB
tUNNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
0.01
3.00
%UB
Table 74:
Parameter RotResU
Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0 deg 180 deg Step Default 180 deg Unit Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary
256
REG 670
Table 75:
Parameter tReset
Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.040 Unit s Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve
tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv
0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1
1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000
IEC Reset
tPRCrv
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
4.7.6
Thermal overload protection, two time constants (PTTR, 49)

Function block name: TTRxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: TRPTTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.7.6.1
Application
Transformers in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum load current (power) level. If the current exceeds this level the losses are higher than expected. As a consequence the temperature of the transformer will increase. If the temperature of the transformer reaches too high values the equipment might be damaged:
REG 670
257
The insulation within the transformer will have forced ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of internal phase to phase or phase to earth faults will increase. There might be hot spots within the transformer. This will degrade the quality of the transformer oil.
In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload transformers for a limited time. This should be done without the above-mentioned risks. The thermal overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible. The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the cooling system of the transformer. We have two main principles: ONAN: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans and the oil is naturally circulated without pumps. OFAF: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling and pumps to force the circulation of the transformer oil.
The protection can have two sets of parameters, one for non-forced cooling and one for forced cooling. Both the permissive steady state loading level as well as the thermal time constant is influenced by the cooling system of the transformer. The activation of the two parameter sets can be switched by activation of binary input signals COOLING to the function. This can be used for transformers where forced cooling can be taken out of operation, for example at fan or pump faults. The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer, which is based on current measurement. If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches a set warning level a signal can be given to the operator. Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates trip of the protected transformer. After trip from the thermal overload protection the transformer will be cooling. There will be a time gap before the heat content (temperature) reaches a level so that the transformer can be taken into service again. Therefore the protection will continue to estimate the heat content using a set cooling time constant. Energizing of the transformer can be blocked until the heat content is reduced to a set level.
4.7.6.2
Setting guideline
The parameters for the thermal overload protection, two time constants function (TTR) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection. Operation: Off/On
258
REG 670
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the transformer winding where the current measurement is made. IRef: Reference level of the current given in % of IBase. When the current is equal to IRef the final (steady state) heat content is equal to 1. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated power of the transformer winding. IRefMult: If a binary input ENMULT is activated the reference current value can be multiplied by the factor IRefMult. The activation could be used in case of deviating ambient temperature from the reference value. In the standard for loading of a transformer an ambient temperature of 20C is used. For lower ambient temperatures the load ability is increased and vice versa. IRefMult can be set within a range: 0.01 - 10.00. IBase1: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be related to the status Off of COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated power of the transformer with natural cooling (ONAN). IBase2: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be related to the status On of COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated power of the transformer with forced cooling (OFAF). If the transformer has no forced cooling IBase2 can be set equal to IBase1. Tau1: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase1 (input Off) given in minutes. Tau2: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase2 (input On) given in minutes. The thermal time constant can be obtained from the manufacturers manuals. The thermal time constant is dependent on the cooling and the amount of oil. Normal time constants for medium and large transformers (according to IEC 60354) are about 2.5 hours for naturally cooled transformers and 1.5 hours for forced cooled transformers. The time constant can be estimated from measurements of the oil temperature during a cooling sequence (described in IEC 60354). It is assumed that the transformer is operated at a certain load level with a constant oil temperature (steady state operation). The oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQo0. The transformer is disconnected from the grid (no load). After a time t of at least 30 minutes the temperature of the oil is measured again. Now the oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQot. The thermal time constant can now be estimated as:
t=
t ln DQo 0 - ln DQ ot
(Equation 116)
If the transformer has forced cooling (OFAF) the measurement should be made both with and without the forced cooling in operation, giving Tau2 and Tau1.
REG 670
259
The time constants can be changed if the current is higher than a set value or lower than a set value. If the current is high it is assumed that the forced cooling is activated while it is deactivated at low current. The setting of the parameters below enables automatic adjustment of the time constant. Tau1High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is higher than the set value IHighTau1. IHighTau1 is set in % of IBase1. Tau1Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is lower than the set value ILowTau1. ILowTau1 is set in % of IBase1. Tau2High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is higher than the set value IHighTau2. IHighTau2 is set in % of IBase2. Tau2Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is lower than the set value ILowTau2. ILowTau2 is set in % of IBase2. The possibility to change time constant with the current value as the base can be useful in different applications. Below some examples are given: In case a total interruption (low current) of the protected device all cooling possibilities will be inactive. This can result in a changed value of the time constant. If other components (motors) are included in the thermal protection function, there is a risk of overheating of that equipment in case of very high current. The thermal time constant is often smaller for a motor than for the transformer.
ITrip: The steady state current that steady state continuous current that the transformer can withstand. The setting is given in % of Ibasex. Alarm1: Heat content level for activation of the signal Alarm1. Alarm1 is set in % of the trip heat content level. Alarm2: Heat content level for activation of the signal Alarm2. Alarm2 is set in % of the trip heat content level. ResLo: Lockout release level of heat content to release the lockout signal. When the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is intended to block switch in of the protected circuit (transformer) as long as the transformer temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated heat content is below the set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm temperature. ResLo is set in % of the trip heat content level. ThetaInit: Heat content before activation of the function. This setting can be set a little below the alarm level. If the transformer is loaded before the activation of the protection function, its temperature can be higher than the ambient temperature. The start point given in the setting will prevent risk of no trip at overtemperature during the first moments after activation. ThetaInit is set in % of the trip heat content level. Warning: If the calculated time to trip factor is below the setting Warning a warning signal is activated. The setting is given in minutes. 260 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670

Table 76:
Parameter Operation IBase IRef IRefMult IBase1
Basic parameter group settings for the TRPTTR_49 (TTR1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 10.0 - 1000.0 0.01 - 10.00 30.0 - 250.0 Step 1 1.0 0.01 1.0 Default Off 3000 100.0 1.00 100.0 Unit A %IB %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current in A Reference current in % of IBASE Multiplication Factor for reference current Base current,IBase1 without Cooling inpout in % of IBASE Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in % of IBASE Time constant without cooling input in min, with IBase1 Time constant with cooling input in min, with IBase2 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGH-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOW-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGH-TC2 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOW-TC2 Steady state operate current level in % of IBasex
IBase2
30.0 - 250.0
1.0
100.0
%IB
Tau1
1.0 - 500.0
1.0
60.0
Min
Tau2
1.0 - 500.0
1.0
60.0
Min
IHighTau1
30.0 - 250.0
1.0
100.0
%IB1
Tau1High
5 - 2000
100
%tC1
ILowTau1
30.0 - 250.0
1.0
100.0
%IB1
Tau1Low
5 - 2000
100
%tC1
IHighTau2
30.0 - 250.0
1.0
100.0
%IB2
Tau2High
5 - 2000
100
%tC2
ILowTau2
30.0 - 250.0
1.0
100.0
%IB2
Tau2Low
5 - 2000
100
%tC2
ITrip
50.0 - 250.0
1.0
110.0
%IBx
REG 670
261

Parameter Alarm1 Range 50.0 - 99.0 Step 1.0 Default 80.0 Unit %Itr Description First alarm level in % of heat content trip value Second alarm level in % of heat content trip value Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip value Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip value Time setting, below which warning would be set (in min) Length of the pulse for trip signal (in msec).
Alarm2
50.0 - 99.0
1.0
90.0
%Itr
ResLo
10.0 - 95.0
1.0
60.0
%Itr
ThetaInit
0.0 - 95.0
1.0
50.0
Warning
1.0 - 500.0
0.1
30.0
Min
tPulse
0.01 - 0.30
0.01
0.10
4.7.7
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPxANSI number: 50BF IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRBRF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3I>BF
4.7.7.1
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used. The breaker protection function will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the protected component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal (unconditional). The breaker failure protection can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
262
REG 670

The parameters for the breaker failure protection function (BFP) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection. Operation: Off/On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current transformer where the current measurement is made. FunctionMode: This parameter can be set Current/Contact. This states the way the detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of start signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current and Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed. BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least 2 currents, of the three phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 3 means that at least 1 current of the three phase currents shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least 1 current of the three phase currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means re-trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position. IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase. I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the FunctionMode is set Current and Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact based function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range 5 200% of IBase.
REG 670
263
IN>: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In high impedance earthed systems the residual current at phase to earth faults are normally much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure at singlephase earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current separately. Also in effectively earthed systems the setting of the earth fault current protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set 1 out of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the sensitive earth fault protection. The setting can be given within he range 2 200 % of IBase. t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60 s in steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50 ms. t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer). The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
t 2 t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

where: tcbopen tBFP_reset tmargin is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker
(Equation 117)
is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current criteria reset) is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant.
264
REG 670
Protection operate time Normal tcbopen The fault occurs Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip tBFPreset Margin Minimum back-up trip delay t2 Critical fault clearance time for stability
Time Trip and Start BFP

en05000479.vsd
Figure 112:
Time sequence
t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase start. The critical fault clearance time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase to earth faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for multi-phase faults. Typical setting is 90 150 ms. t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping different back-up circuit breakers. tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker, of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds. tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200 ms.
4.7.7.3
Setting parameters
REG 670
265
Table 77:
Parameter Operation IBase FunctionMode
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check 5 - 200 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Detection principle for back-up trip Back-up trip mode
BuTripMode
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
Operation mode of retrip logic Operate phase current level in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Trip pulse duration
IP>
10
%IB
IN>
2 - 200
10
%IB
t1 t2 t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.150 0.150
s s s
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 78:
Parameter I>BlkCont
Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 20 Unit %IB Description Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
4.7.8
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function block name: PDx-ANSI number: 50PD IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRPLD IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
PD
266
REG 670

4.7.8.1 Application
There is a risk that a circuit breaker will get discordance between the poles at circuit breaker operation: closing or opening. One pole can be open and the other two closed, or two poles can be open and one closed. Pole discordance of a circuit breaker will case unsymmetrical currents in the power system. The consequence of this can be: Negative sequence currents that will give stress on rotating machines Zero sequence currents that might give unwanted operation of sensitive earth fault protections in the power system.
It is therefore important to detect situations with pole discordance of circuit breakers. When this is detected the breaker should be tripped directly. The pole discordance protection will detect situation with deviating positions of the poles of the protected circuit breaker. The protection has two different options to make this detection: By connecting the auxiliary contacts in the circuit breaker so that a logic is created, a signal can be sent to the protection, indicating pole discordance. This logic can also be realized within the protection itself, by using opened and close signals for each circuit breaker pole, connected to the protection Each phase current through the circuit breaker is measured. If the difference between the phase current is larger than a CurrUnsymLevel this is an indication of pole discordance, and the protection will operate.
4.7.8.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the pole-discordance protection function (PDx) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following settings can be done for the pole-discordance protection. Operation: Off/On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected object where the current measurement is made. timeDelayTrip: Time delay of the operation. ContSel: Operation of the contact based pole discordance function. Can be set: Off/ PD signal fromCB/Pole pos aux. cont. If PD signal fromCB is chosen the logic to detect pole discordance is made close to the breaker auxiliary contacts and only one signal is connected to the IED. If the CB/Pole pos aux cont. alternative is chosen each open close signal is connected to the IED and the logic to detect pole discordance is realised within the function itself.
REG 670
267
CurrSel: Operation of the current based pole discordance function. Can be set: Off/ CB open monitor/Continuous monitor. In the alternative CB open monitor the function is activated only directly in connection to breaker open or close command (during 200 ms). In the alternative Continuous monitor function is continuously activated. CurrUnsymLevel: Unsymmetrical magnitude of lowest phase current compared to the highest, set in % of the highest phase current. Natural difference between phase current in 1 1/2 breaker installations must be considered. For circuit breakers in 1 1/2 breaker configurated switchyards there might be natural unbalance currents through the breaker. This is due to the existence of low impedance current paths in the switchyard. This phenomenon must be considered in the setting of the parameter. CurrRelLevel: Current level of the largest phase current to allow operation of the current.
4.7.8.3
Setting parameters
Table 79:
Parameter Operation IBase tTrip
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Unit s Description Operation Off / On Base current Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection Current function selection
ContSel
Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -
Off
CurrSel
Off
CurrUnsymLevel
80
Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase
CurrRelLevel
0 - 100
10
%IB
4.7.9
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name: ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
P><
268
REG 670

4.7.9.1 Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant. During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses. When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum. The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in each case. Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design
REG 670
269
the reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power plant auxiliaries. Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated stresses. Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero. Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitation. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection in unattended plants. A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%. Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during commissioning. Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection. Figure 113 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
Underpower Relay Q Overpower Relay Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
Operating point without turbine torque
en06000315.vsd
Figure 113:
Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower relay
270
REG 670

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, see equation 118.
IBase = SN 3 U N
(Equation 118)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-phase) in kV. measureMode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement is set by the parameter measureMode. The setting possibilities are shown in table 80.
Table 80:
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
Set value measureMode
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L2L3
L3L1
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
L2
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
The function has two stages with the same setting parameters. OpMode1(2) is set to define the function of the stage. Possible settings are: On: the stage is activated Off: the stage is disabled REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 271
The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)
Q
Power1(2) Angle1(2) Operate P
en06000441.vsd
Figure 114:
Underpower mode
The setting Power1(2) gives the powercomponent pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The setting is given in pu of the generator rated power, see equation 128.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
(Equation 128)
The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be 0 or 180. 0 should be used for generator low forward power protection.
272
REG 670
Operate Angle1(2) = 0 P Power1(2)
en06000556.vsd
Figure 115:
For reactive power the set angle should be 90 or -90
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up. Hysteresis1(2) is given in pu of generator rated power according to equation 129.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
(Equation 129)
The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2). The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 130)
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter
The default value of k = 0 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally longer than the execution cycle of the function.
REG 670
273
The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/voltage: IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100 IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100 The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors. The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.
4.7.9.3
Setting parameters
Table 81:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode
Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage
Table 82:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2
Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range Off On Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase
274
REG 670

Parameter Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2 Range -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit Deg s s Description Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 83:
Parameter k
Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000
0.1 0.1 0.001
0.5 0.5 0.000
pu pu %
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Deg Deg Deg
4.7.10
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: GOPPDOP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
P><
REG 670
275

4.7.10.1 Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant. During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses. When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum. The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in each case. Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design
276
REG 670
the reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power plant auxiliaries. Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated stresses. Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero. Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitation. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection in unattended plants. A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%. Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during commissioning. Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection. Figure 116 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
Underpower Relay Q Overpower Relay Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
en06000315.vsd
Figure 116:
Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower relay
REG 670
277

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, see equation 131.
IBase = SN 3 U N
(Equation 131)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-phase) in kV. measureMode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement is set by the parameter measureMode. The setting possibilities are shown in table 84.
Table 84:
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
Set value measureMode
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
The function has two stages with the same setting parameters. OpMode1(2) is set to define the function of the stage. Possible settings are: On: the stage is activated Off: the stage is disabled
278
REG 670
The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting Angle1(2) is largerr than the set pick up power value Power1(2)
Operate
Power1(2) Angle1(2) P
en06000440.vsd
Figure 117:
Overpower mode
The setting Power1(2) gives the powercomponent pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The setting is given in pu of the generator rated power, see equation 141.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
(Equation 141)
The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be 0 or 180. 180 should be used for generator reverse power protection.
REG 670
279
Operate Power1(2)
Angle1(2) = 180p P
en06000557.vsd
Figure 118:
For reactive power the set angle should be 90 or -90
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up. Hysteresis1(2) is given in pu of generator rated power according to equation 142.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
(Equation 142)
The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2). The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 143)
Where S Sold SCalculated k is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle is settable parameter
280
REG 670
The default value of k = 0 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally longer than the execution cycle of the function. The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/voltage: IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100 IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100 The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors. The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.
4.7.10.3
Setting parameters
Table 85:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode
Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage
Table 86:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2
Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range Off On Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off OverPower Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower Unit %SB Deg s s Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2
REG 670
281

Parameter Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2 Range 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit %SB Deg s s Description Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 87:
Parameter k
Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000
0.1 0.1 0.001
0.5 0.5 0.000
pu pu %
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Deg Deg Deg
4.8
4.8.1
Voltage protection
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)
282
REG 670
Function block name: TUVxANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: UV2PTUV
3U<
4.8.1.1
Application
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of low phase voltages is necessary. The function can also be used as a supervision and fault detection function for other protection functions, to increase the security of a complete protection system. The undervoltage protection is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage conditions are caused by abnormal operation or fault in the power system. The undervoltage protection can be used in combination with overcurrent protections, either as restraint or in logic "and gates" of the trip signals issued by the two functions. Other applications are the detection of "no voltage" condition, e.g. before the energization of a HV line or for automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout. The undervoltage protection is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt capacitor banks to compensate for reactive load and thereby increasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and setting hysteresis to allow applications to control reactive load. The undervoltage protection can be used to disconnect from the network apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject to service under low voltage conditions. The undervoltage protection TUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by: 1. 2. 3. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control (symmetrical voltage decrease). Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease). Short circuits, often as phase to earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease).
Undervoltage protection prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause their overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
4.8.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
REG 670
283
All the voltage conditions in the system where the TUV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the primary nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The setting for the TUV function is normally not critical, since there must be enough time available for the main protection to clear short-circuits and earth-faults. Below, some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given:
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and well above the lowest acceptable voltage for the equipment.
Disconnected equipment detection
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and well above the highest occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is disconnected.
Power supply quality
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and well above the lowest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.
Voltage instability mitigation
This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.
Backup protection for power system faults
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and well above the highest occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.
The following settings can be done for the two step undervoltage protection.
ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value Operation: Off/On UBase: Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage of the voltage transformer where the current measurement is made. The undervoltage protection function measures selectively phase to earth voltages, or phase to phase voltage choosen by the setting ConnType. The function will operate if the voltage gets lover than the set percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:
284
REG 670
U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:
U < (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 145) (Equation 144)
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps. Therefore the setting parameters are described only once. Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be. Definite time/Inverse Curve A/Inverse Curve B/Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that should be below the set level to give operation. The setting can be. 1 out of 3/2 out of 3/3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is low to give operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase to earth faults 2 out of 3 can be chosen. Un<: Set operate undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of UBase. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider the minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is larger than 90% of nominal voltage. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications the protection function shall not directly trip in case of short circuits or earth faults in the system. The time delay must be co-ordinated to the short circuit protections. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very low voltages the undervoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter can be set: Instantaneous/Frozen time/Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.
REG 670
285
ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 - CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:U> *(1.0 - CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 146)
IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set: Off/Block of trip/Block all. In case of a low voltage the undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to prevent function when the protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block of trip or Block all this unwanted trip is prevented. IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of UBase. This setting must be lower than the setting Un<.As switch of shall be detected the setting can be very low, i.e. about 10%. tBlkUVn: Time delay the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the operate time delay of the undervoltage protection step. HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the voltage change after switching of the compensation device. HystAbsIntBlkn: Absolute hysteresis of the internal blocking function set in % of UBase
4.8.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 88:
Parameter ConnType
Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range PhN DFT PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT Step Default PhN DFT Unit Description Group selector for connection type
286
REG 670
Table 89:
Parameter Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1
Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2
OpMode1
1 out of 3
U1<
70
%UB
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10
IntBlkSel1
Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100
Off
IntBlkStVal1
20
%UB
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100
0.1 -
0.5 On Definite time
%UB -
OpMode2
1 out of 3
U2<
50
%UB
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
REG 670
287

Parameter t2Min Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
k2
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10
IntBlkSel2
Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100
Off
IntBlkStVal2
20
%UB
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 90:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 0.005 - 200.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1
BCrv1
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
CCrv1
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
DCrv1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
PCrv1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
288
REG 670

Parameter tReset2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000
Instantaneous
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
0.025 0.005 - 200.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2
BCrv2
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
CCrv2
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
DCrv2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
PCrv2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
4.8.2
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVxANSI number: 59 IEC 61850 logical node name: OV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3U>
4.8.2.1
Application
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high voltage is necessary. The TOV function can also be used for supervision and detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection functions, increase the security of a complete protection system.
REG 670
289
High voltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system. The overvoltage protection is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. The overvoltage protection can be used in combination with low current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in the remote end. The overvoltage protection is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors, to compensate for low load, and thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and setting hysteresis to allow applications to control reactive load. The overvoltage protection can be used to disconnect, from the network, apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject to service under high voltage conditions. TOV deals with high voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by: 1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power system, like metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor falling down to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high voltage winding to the low voltage winding, etc.). Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control (symmetrical voltage decrease). Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage decrease). Earth-faults in high impedance earthed systems causes, beside the high voltage in the neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical voltage increase).
2. 3. 4.
Overvoltage protection prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause their overheating or stress of insulation material, and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
4.8.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). All the voltage conditions in the system where TOV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage, which normally is set to the nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The time delay for the TOV function can sometimes be critical and related to the size of the overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand
290
REG 670
smaller overvoltages for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment should be disconnected more rapidly. Below, some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given:
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and transformers
High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest acceptable voltage for the equipment.
Equipment protection, capacitors
High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest acceptable voltage for the capacitor.
The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the highest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.
High impedance earthedgrounded systems
In high impedance earthed systems, earth-faults cause a voltage increase in the nonfaulty phases. The overvoltage protection can be used to detect such faults. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the lowest occurring voltage during faults. A metallic single-phase earth-fault causes the nonfaulted phase voltages to increase a factor of 3.
The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage protection
ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value Operation: Off/On UBase: Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage of the voltage transformer where the current measurement is made. The overvoltage protection function measures the phase to earth voltages, or phase to phase voltages as selected. The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:
U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:
U > (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 148) (Equation 147)
REG 670
291
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps. Therefore the setting parameters are described only once. Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be. Definite time/Inverse Curve A/Inverse Curve B/Inverse Curve C/Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that should be above the set level to give operation. The setting can be. 1 out of 3/2 out of 3/3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase to earth faults 1 out of 3 can be chosen, because the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at single phase to earth faults. UnPickup'n': Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of UBase. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider the Maximum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than 110% of nominal voltage. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications the protection function has the task to prevent damages to the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be coordinated with other automated actions in the system. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter can be set: Instantaneous/Frozen time/Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections. ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U>(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: 292 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
U>(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 149)
HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the voltage change after switching of the compensation device.
4.8.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 91:
Parameter ConnType
Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range PhG PhPh PhG RMS PhPh RMS Step Default PhG Unit Description TBD
Table 92:
Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
U1>
120
%UB
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
REG 670
293

Parameter HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2 Range 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.1 Default 0.5 On Definite time Unit %UB Description Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
U2>
150
%UB
t2 t2Min
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 93:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
294
REG 670

Parameter DCrv1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
4.8.3
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N IEC 61850 logical node name: ROV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3U0
REG 670
295

4.8.3.1 Application
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is primarily used in high impedance earthed distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary earthfault protection of the feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different earth-fault related functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release signal. The residual voltage can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a voltage transformer open delta connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated internally, based on measurement of the three phase-voltages. In high impedanceearthed systems the system neutral voltage, i.e. the residual voltage, will increase in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the residual voltage will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to the phase-earth voltage, is achieved for a single phaseearth fault. The residual voltage will increase approximately the same amount in the whole system and does not provide any guidance in finding the faulted component. Therefore TRV is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.
4.8.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). All the voltage conditions in the system where the TRV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general single input or residual overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which can be set to the primary nominal voltage (phasephase) level of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The time delay for the TRV function are seldom critical, since residual voltage is related to earth-faults in a high impedance earthed system, and enough time must normally be give single input for the primary protection to clear the fault. In some more specific situations, where the single overvoltage protection is used to protect some specific equipment the time delay can be shorter. Below, some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given.
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and transformers
High residual voltage indicates earth fault in the system, perhaps in the component to which the residual overvoltage function is connected. After some time delay, to give the primary protection for the faulted device a chance to trip, the residual voltage protection has to trip the component. The setting has to be well above the highest
296
REG 670
occurring "normal" residual voltage and well below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the equipment
Equipment protection, capacitors
High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The residual overvoltage protection has to be connected to a neutral or open delta winding. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and well below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.
The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements. In high impedance earthed systems, earth-faults cause a neutral voltage in the feeding transformer neutral. The residual overvoltage protection can be used to trip the transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder earth fault protection, and of course as a backup for the transformer primary earth-fault protection. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage, and well below the lowest occurring residual voltage during the faults under consideration. A metallic singlephase earth-fault causes a transformer neutral to reach a voltage equal to the normal phase-earth voltage. The voltage transformers measuring the phase to earth voltages will then measure zero voltage in the faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase to phase voltage, as the earth is available on the faulty phase and the neutral has a full phase to earth voltage. The residual overvoltage will be three time the phase to earth voltage. See figure "".
High impedance earthedgrounded systems
REG 670
297
Figure 119:
Non-effectively earthed systems
Direct earthed systems
In direct earthed systems an earth fault on one phase will mean a voltage collapse in that phase. The two healthy phases will to earth have normal phase to earth voltages. The residual sum will have the same value as phase to earth voltage. See figure 120 .
298
REG 670
Figure 120:
Direct earthed system
The following settings can be done for the two step residual overvoltage protection
Operation: Off/On UBase: This voltage is used as reference for the voltage setting. We have different possibilities to feed the IED for this protection function. 1.The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual voltage is created from the phase to earth voltages within the protection software. The setting of the analogue input is given as: Set UBase = Uph - (ph*3) Set UBase = Uph - (ph/3) 2.The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group. In a open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3U0 (single input). The setting of the analogue input is given as the ratio of the voltage transformer e.g 230/ 3/110 or 20/3 /(110/3). 3.The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of a power transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed by the voltage UN (single input). The setting of the analogue input is given as primary phase to earth voltage and secondary phase to earth voltage. The protection function will measure the residual voltage corresponding nominal phase to earth voltage. The measurement will be based on the neutral voltage displacement. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 299
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps. Therefore the setting parameters are described only once. Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be. Definite time/Inverse Curve A/Inverse Curve B/Inverse Curve C/Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. Un>: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual voltage corresponding to UBase: U > (%)*UBase(kV) The setting is dependent of the required sensitivity of the protection and the system earthing. In non-effectively earthed systems the residual voltage can be maximum the rated phase to earth voltage, which should correspond to 100%. In effectively earthed systems this value is dependent of the ratio Z0/Z1. The required setting to detect high resistive earth faults must be based on network calculations. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications the protection function has the task to prevent damages to the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be coordinated with other automated actions in the system. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter can be set: Instantaneous/Frozen time/Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections. ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U>(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
300
REG 670
U>(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 150)
HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly dependent of the application.
4.8.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 94:
Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
U1>
30
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100
0.1 -
0.5 On Definite time
%UB -
U2>
45
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
REG 670
301

Parameter t2Min Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 95:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2
0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 -
0.025 Instantaneous
s -
tIReset2
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
302
REG 670

Parameter ACrv2 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
4.8.4
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXxANSI number: 24 IEC 61850 logical node name: OEXPVPH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
U/f >
4.8.4.1
Application
When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Overvoltage, or underfrequency, or a combination of both, will result in an excessive flux density level, which is denominated overfluxing or over-excitation. The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the generator-transformer block is disconnected from the rest of the network, or in network islandsoccuring at disturbance where high voltages and/or low frequencies can occur. Overexcitation can occur during start-up and shut-down of the generator
REG 670
303
if the field current is not properly adjusted. Loss-of load or load-shedding can also result in overexcitation if the voltage control and frequency governor is not functioning properly. Loss of load or load-shedding at a transformer substation can result in overexcitation if the voltage control function is insufficient or out of order.Low frequency in a system isolated from the main network can result in overexcitation if the voltage regulating system maintains normal voltage. According to the IEC standards, the power transformers shall be capable of delivering rated load current continuously at an applied voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency). For special cases, the purchaser may specify that the transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at an applied voltage 110% of rated value at no load, reduced to 105% at rated secondary load current. According to ANSI/IEEE standards, the transformers shall be capable of delivering rated load current continuously at an output voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency) and operate continuously with output voltage equal to 110% of rated value at no load. The capability of a transformer (or generator) to withstand overexcitation can be illustrated in the form of a thermal capability curve, i.e. a diagram which shows the permissible time as a function of the level of over-excitation. When the transformer is loaded, the induced voltage and hence the flux density in the core can not be read off directly from the transformer terminal voltage. Normally, the leakage reactance of each separate winding is not known and the flux density in the transformer core can then not be calculated. In two-winding transformers, the low voltage winding is normally located close to the core and the voltage across this winding reflects the flux density in the core. However, depending on the design, the flux flowing in the yoke may be critical for the ability of the transformer to handle excess flux. The OEX function has currents inputs to allow calculation of the load influence when the leakage reactance, of the winding where the OEX function is connected, is known. This gives a more exact measurement of the magnetizing flow. For power transformers with unidirectional load flow, the voltage to the V/Hz protection function should therefore be taken from the feeder side. Heat accumulated in critical parts during a period of overexcitation will be reduced gradually when the excitation retains the normal value. If a new period of overexcitation occurs after a short time interval, the heating will start from a higher level. The overexcitation protection function should therefore have a thermal memory. In RET670, the cooling time constant is settable within a wide range. The general experience is that the overexcitation characteristics for a number of power transformers are not in accordance with standard inverse time curves. In order to make optimal settings possible, a transformer adapted characteristic is available in RET670. The operate characteristic of the protection function can be set to correspond quite well with any characteristic by setting the operate time for six different figures of overexcitation in the range from 100% to 180% of rated V/Hz. The V/Hz function can be configured to any single-phase (phase-phase) or threephase voltage input and any one or thee-phase current input. It uses the fundamental frequency component of current and voltages. 304 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
When configured to a single phase-to-phase voltage input, a single-phase current is calculated which has the same phase angle relative the phase-to-phase voltage as the phase currents have relative the phase voltages in a symmetrical system. The function should preferable be configured to use a three-phase voltage input if available. It then uses the positive sequence quantities of voltages and currents. Analog measurements must not be taken from any winding where OLTC is located. Some different connection alternatives are shown in figure 121.
24 U/f>
24 U/f>
24 U/f>
en05000208.vsd
Figure 121:
Alternative connections of an overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) function
4.8.4.2
Setting guidelines Setting and configuration

The signals are configured by use of the CAP configuration tool and the SignalMatrix tool forming part of the PCM 600 tool. The setting parameters for the Overexcitation function are set at the local HMI (Human Machine Interface) or by use of the PST (Parameter Setting Tool) forming part of PCM 600 tool installed on a PC connected to the control or protection unit. Please refer to the Technical reference manual (TRM) for a list of setting parameters. Recommendations for Input signals Please see the default factory configuration for examples of configuration! BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the Overexcitation function. Can be used e.g. to for a limited time block the operation during special service conditions.
REG 670
305
RESET: The function has a thermal memory which can take very long time to reset. Activation of the reset input will reset the function Recommendations for Output signals Please see the default factory configuration for examples of configuration! ERROR: The output indicates a measuring error. The reason can e.g. be configuration problems where analogue signals are missing. START: The start output indicates that the level U/f> has been reached. It can be used to initiate time measurement. TRIP: The trip output is activated after the operate time for the U/f level which has been reached. The output signal is used to trip the circuit breaker. ALARM: The output is activated when alarm level has been reached and the alarm timer has elapsed. The output is used to give alarm to operator that the system voltage is high.
Setting parameters
Operation: The operation of the Overexcitation function can be switched On-Off. UBase: The UBase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) voltage on which all percentage settings are based. The setting is normally the system voltage level. IBase: The IBase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) current on which all percentage settings are based. Normally the power transformer rated current is used but alternatively the current transformer rated current can be set. MeasuredU: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. Normally the three phase measurement measuring the positive sequence voltage should be used but when only individual VT"s are used a single phase to phase can be used. MeasuredI: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. MeasuredI must be in accordance with MeasuredU. V/Hz>: Operating level for the inverse characteristic, IEEE or tailor made. The operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 108-110% depending of the capability curve for the transformer. V/Hz>>: Operating level for the tMin definite time delay used at high overvoltages. The operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 150-180% depending of the capability curve for the transformer. Setting should be above the knee-point when the characteristic starts to be straight on the high side. XLeak: The transformer leakage reactance on which the compensation of voltage measurement with load current is based. The setting shall be the transformer leak reactance in primary ohms. If no current compensation is used (mostly the case) the setting is not used. 306 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
TripPulse: The length of the trip pulse. Normally the final trip pulse is decided by the trip function block. A typical pulse length can be 50 ms. CurveType: Selection of the curve type for the inverse delay. The IEEE curves or tailor made curve can be selected depending of which one matches the capability curve best. kforIEEE: The time constant for the inverse characteristic. Select the one giving the best match to the transformer capability. tCooling: The cooling time constant giving the reset time when voltages drops below the set value. Shall be set above the cooling time constant of the transformer. If the constant is not known set a high value to overprotect. tMin: The operating times at voltages higher than the set U/f>>. The setting shall match capabilities on these high voltages. Typical setting can be 1-10 second. tMax: For overvoltages close to the set value times can be extremely long if a high K time constant is used. A maximum time can then be set to cut the longest times. Typical settings are 1800-3600 seconds (30-60 minutes) AlarmLevel: Setting of the alarm level in percentage of the set trip level. The alarm level is normally set at around 98% of the trip level. tAlarm: Setting of the time to alarm is given from when the alarm level has been reached. Typical setting is 5 seconds.
Service value report
A number of internal parameters are available as service values for use at commissioning and during service. Remaining time to trip (in seconds) TMTOTRIP, flux density VPERHZ, internal thermal content in percentage of trip value THERMSTA. The values are available at Local HMI, Substation SAsystem and PCM 600.
Setting example
Sufficient information about the overexcitation capability of the protected object(s) must be available when making the settings. The most complete information is given in an overexcitation capability diagram as shown in figure 122. The settings V/Hz>> and V/Hz> are made in per unit of the rated voltage of the transformer winding at rated frequency. Set the transformer adapted curve for a transformer with overexcitation characteristics in according to figure 122. V/Hz> for the protection is set equal to the permissible continuos overexcitation according to figure 122 = 105%. When the overexcitation is equal to V/Hz>, tripping is obtained after a time equal to the setting of t1.
REG 670
307
This is the case when UBase is equal to the transformer rated voltages. For other values, the percentage settings need to be adjusted accordingly. When the overexcitation is equal to the set value of V/Hz>>, tripping is obtained after a time equal to the setting of t6. A suitable setting would be V/Hz>> = 140% and t6 = 4 s. The interval between V/Hz>> and V/Hz> is automatically divided up in five equal steps, and the time delays t2 to t5 will be allocated to these values of overexcitation. In this example, each step will be (140-105) /5 = 7%. The setting of time delays t1 to t6 ar listed in table 96.
Table 96:
U/f op (%) 105 112 119 126 133 140
Settings
Timer t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Time set (s) 7200 (max) 600 60 20 8 4
Information on the cooling time constant Tcool should be retrieved from the power transformer manufacturer.
308
REG 670
V/Hz % 150 transformer capability curve relay operate characteristic 140
130
120
110 Continous 100 0.05 t6
0.1 t5
0.2 t4
0.5
1 t3
10 t2
20
50
100 t1
200
Time (minutes)
en01000377.vsd
Figure 122:
Example on overexcitation capability curve and V/Hz protection settings for power transformer
4.8.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 97:
Parameter MeasuredU
Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Step Default L1L2 Unit Description Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI
L1L2
Selection of measured current
REG 670
309
Table 98:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase V/Hz>
Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 100.0 - 180.0 Step 1 0.05 0.1 Default Off 3000 400.00 110.0 Unit A kV %UB/f Description Operation Off / On Base current (rated phase current) in A Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Ubase/ frated) High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Ubase/ frated) Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Alarm operate level as % of operate level Alarm time delay, in sec
V/Hz>>
100.0 - 200.0
0.1
140.0
%UB/f
XLeak
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
ohm
TrPulse tMin
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.100 7.000
s s
tMax
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
tCooling
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
CurveType
IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60
IEEE
kForIEEE
AlarmLevel tAlarm
50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00
0.1 0.01
100.0 5.00
% s
Table 99:
Parameter t1Tailor
Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range 0.00 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 7200.00 Unit s Description Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec
t2Tailor t3Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00
0.01 0.01
3600.00 1800.00
s s
310
REG 670

Parameter t4Tailor t5Tailor t6Tailor Range 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default 900.00 450.00 225.00 Unit s s s Description Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec
4.8.5
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC ANSI number: 60 IEC 61850 logical node name: VDCPTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.8.5.1
Application
The voltage differential functions can be used in some different applications. Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is supervised with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference indicates a fault, either short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It is mainly used on elements with external fuses but can also be used on elements with internal fuses instead of a current unbalance protection measuring the current between the neutrals of two halfs of the capacitor bank. The function
REG 670
311
requires voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor bank. Figure 123 shows some different alternative connections of this function.
U1
Ud>L1
Single grounded wye
U2
Ph L3
Ph L2
Ud>L1 U1 U2
Double wye
Ph L3
Ph L2
Ph L3
en06000390.vsd
Ph L2
Figure 123:
Connection of voltage differential function to detect unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)
The function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision (or MCB tripped) can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor bank voltage transformer set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is connected to input U2). It will also ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm and/or tripping. Fuse supervision function for voltage transformers. In many application the voltages of two fuse groups of the same voltage transformer or fuse groups of two separate voltage transformers measuring the same voltage can be supervised with this function. It will be an alternative for e.g. generator units where often two voltage transformers are supplied for measurement and excitation equipment.
The application to supervise the voltage on two voltage transformers in the generator circuit is shown in figure 124.
312
REG 670
To Protection U1 Ud> U2 To Excitation
Gen
en06000389.vsd
Figure 124:
Supervision of fuses on generator circuit voltage transformers
4.8.5.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager software PCM600. The following settings are done for the voltage differential function. Operation: Off/On UBase: Base voltage level in kV. The base voltage is used as reference for the voltage setting factors. Normally it is set to the system voltage level. BlkDiffAtULow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are low. RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different voltage transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside the capacitor bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be used by voltage drop in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by evaluating the differential voltage achieved as a service value for each phase. The factor is defined as U2*RFLx and shall be equal to the U1 voltage. Each phase has its own ratio factor.
REG 670
313
UDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter. For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be tripped before excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting values required are normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other applications it has to be decided case by case. For fuse supervision normally only the alarm level is used. tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally the delay does not need to be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent tripping. tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter. Normally it can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur. For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default values are here expected to be acceptable. U1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%. U2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%. tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by this parameter. UDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter. For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required are given by capacitor bank supplier. For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level is 3-5% if the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during commissioning. For other applications it has to be decided case by case. tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally some seconds delay can be used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision the alarm delay can be set to zero.
4.8.5.3
Setting parameters
314
REG 670
Table 100:
Parameter Operation UBase BlkDiffAtULow UDTrip tTrip
Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range Off On 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000 Unit kV %UB s Description Operation Off/On Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
U1Low U2Low tBlock UDAlarm tAlarm
0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000
0.1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001
70.0 70.0 0.000 2.0 2.000
%UB %UB s %UB s
Table 101:
Parameter RFL1
Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range 0.000 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Ratio compensation factor phase L1 UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L2 UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L3 UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus
RFL2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
RFL3
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
4.8.6
95% and 100% Stator earthground fault protection based on 3rd harmonic
Function block name: ANSI number: 64S IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
UN> / U0d(3rd harm)
REG 670
315

4.8.6.1 Application
Stator earth fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. Medium and large generators normally have high impedance earth, i.e. earthing via a neutral point resistor. This resistor is dimensioned to give an earth fault current in the range 5 15 A at a solid earth fault directly at the generator high voltage terminal. The relatively small earth fault currents give much less thermal and mechanical stress on the generator, compared to the short circuit case. Anyhow, the earth faults in the generator have to be detected and the generator has to be tripped, even if longer fault time, compared to short circuits, can be allowed. The relation between the amplitude of the generator earth fault current and the fault time, with defined consequence, is shown in figure 125.
Negligible burning area
en06000316.vsd
Figure 125:
Relation between the amplitude of the generator earth fault current and the fault time
316
REG 670
As mentioned earlier, for medium and large generators, the normal procedure is to have high impedance earthing of generating units. The most common earthing system is to use a neutral point resistor, giving an earth fault current in the range 5 15 A at a non-resistive earth fault at the high voltage side of the generator. Other types of system earthing of generator units, such as direct earthing and isolated neutral, are used but are quite rare. In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is close to zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a phase-to-earth fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a current flow from the neutral point resistor. To detect an earth fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral point overvoltage relay, a neutral point overcurrent relay, a zero sequence overvoltage relay or a residual differential protection. These protection schemes are simple and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple schemes protect only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% at the neutral end unprotected. Under unfavorable conditions the blind zone may extend to 20% from the neutral. Some different earth fault protection solutions are shown in figure 126 and figure 127.
Generator unit transformer
- UN +
en06000317.vsd
Figure 126:
Broken delta voltage transformer measurement of neutral point voltage
REG 670
317
- UN +
en06000318.vsd
Figure 127:
Neutral point voltage transformer measurement of neutral point voltage
In some applications the neutral point resistor is connected to the low voltage side of a single-phase transformer, connected to the generator neutral point. In such a case the voltage measurement can be made directly across the neutral point resistor.
IN
en06000319.vsd
Figure 128:
Neutral point current measurement
In some power plants the connection of the neutral point resistor is made to the generator unit transformer neutral point. This is often done if several generators are connected to the same bus. The detection of earth fault can be made by current measurement as shown in figure 129.
318
REG 670
IN = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
en06000320.vsd
Figure 129:
Residual current measurement
One difficulty with this solution is that the current transformer ratio is normally so large so that the secondary residual current will be very small. The false residual current, due to difference between the three phase current transformers, can be in the same range as the secondary earth fault current. As indicated above there will be very small neutral voltage or residual current if the stator earth fault is situated close to the generator neutral. The probability for this fault is quite small but not zero. For small generators the risk of not detecting the stator earth fault, close to the neutral, can be accepted. For large generator it is however often a requirement that also theses faults have to be detected. Therefore a special neutral end earth fault protection (100% stator earth fault protection) is required. The 100% earth fault protection can be realized in different ways. The two main principles are: 3rd harmonic voltage detection Neutral point voltage injection
The 3rd harmonic voltage detection is based on the fact that the generator will generate some degree of 3rd harmonic voltage. For the voltage with a frequency to be a factor 3 times the fundamental, the voltage has the same phase angle in the three phases. This means that there will be a residual 3rd harmonic voltage in the generator neutral during normal operation. This component is used for detection of earth faults in the generator, close to the neutral. If the 3rd harmonic voltage, generated in the generator, is very small (less than about 1% of the fundamental frequency voltage, the 3rd harmonic based protection cannot be used. In this case a protection based on neutral point voltage injection is used. The basic principle of this protection is that the injected voltage has a characteristic different from the fundamental frequency voltage of the generator. The injected voltage can be sinusoidal with a frequency different from the fundamental or it can REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 319
have another waveform. In non-faulted conditions there will be no current related to the injected voltage. In case of a stator earth fault a current related to the injected voltage will be detected. In this protection function, available in REG 670, a 3rd harmonic residual voltage differential principle is used.
4.8.6.2
Setting guidelines
The 3rd harmonic based 100% stator earth fault protection is using the 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable function of the protection it is necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 1% of the generator rated voltage. Operation: The parameter Operation is used to set the function On/Off. GenRatedVoltage: GenRatedVoltage is set to the rated phase to phase voltage in kV of the generator. TVoltType: The protection function is always fed from a voltage transformer in the generator neutral. TVoltType defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the high voltage side of the generator. The setting alternatives are: NoVoltageAvailable which is used when there are no voltage transformers connected to the generator terminals. In this case the protection will operate as a 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection. OpenDeltaVoltage which is used if the protection is fed from an open delta connected three-phase group of voltage transformers connected to the generator terminals. This is the recommended alternative. ResidualVoltage3U0 is used when the protection is fed from the three phase voltage transformers. The third harmonic residual voltage is derived internally from the phase voltages. OneSinglePhaseVoltage, L1 L2 or L3, is used when there is only one phase voltage transformer available at the generator terminals.
The setting beta gives the proportion of the 3rd harmonic voltage in the neutral point of the generator to be used as restrain quantity. Beta must be set so that there is no risk of trip during normal, non-faulted, operation of the generator. On the other hand, if beta is set high, this will limit the portion of the stator winding covered by the protection. The default setting 1.0 will in most cases give acceptable conditions. One possibility to assure best performance is to make measurements during normal operation of the generator. From the function the following quantities are available: 320 UT3, the 3rd harmonic voltage at the generator terminal side UN3, the 3rd harmonic voltage at the generator neutral side E3, the induced 3rd harmonic voltage ANGLE, the phase angle between UT3 and UN3 DU3, the differential voltage caused by UT3 and UN3 (|UT3 + UN3|) BU3, the bias voltage (beta UN3) REG 670
For different operation points (P and Q) of the generator the differential voltage DU3 can be compared to the bias BU3, and a suitable factor beta can be chosen to assure security. CBexists: CBexists is set to YES if there is a generator breaker (breaker between the generator and the block transformer). In such a case the setting of factorCBopen is activated. factorCBopen: The setting factorCBopen gives a constant to be multiplied to beta if the generator circuit breaker is open. UN3rdLimit: The setting UN3rdLimit gives the undervoltage operation level if the voltage measurement is only made in the generator neutral point. In all other connection alternatives this setting is not active. The setting is given as % of the rated phase-to-earth voltage. The setting should be based on neutral point 3rd harmonic voltage measurement at normal operation. UNFundLimit: UNFundLimit gives the operation level for the fundamental frequency residual voltage stator earth fault protection. The setting is given as % of the rated phase-to-earth voltage. A normal setting is in the range 5 10%. UT3BlkLevel: UT3BlkLevel gives a voltage level for the 3rd harmonic voltage level at the terminal side. If this level is lower than the setting the function is blocked. The setting is given as % of the rated phase-to-earth voltage. The setting is typically 1 %. Delay3rd: Delay3rd gives the trip delay of the 3rd harmonic stator earth fault protection. The setting is given in s. Normally a relatively long delay (about 10 s) is acceptable as the earth fault current is small. DelayUNFund: DelayUNFund gives the trip delay of the fundamental frequency residual voltage stator earth fault protection. The setting is given in s. A delay in the range 0.5 2 s is acceptable.
4.8.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 102:
Parameter GenRatedVolt
Basic general settings for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function

Range 1.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 Default 10.0 Unit kV Description Generator rated (nominal) phase-tophase voltage in kV Used connection type for gen. terminal voltage transformer
TVoltType
NoVoltage ResidualVoltage AllThreePhases PhaseL1 PhaseL2 PhaseL3
ResidualVoltage
REG 670
321
Table 103:
Parameter Operation Beta
Basic parameter group settings for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function

Range Off On 0.50 - 10.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 1.00 Unit Description Operation Off / On Portion of voltN3rdHarmonic used as bias Defines if generator CB exists (between Gen & Transformer) Beta is multiplied by this factor when CB is open Pickup 3rd Harm U< protection (when activated) % of UB/ 1,732 If UT3 is below limit 3rdH Diff is blocked, in % of UB/1,732 Pickup fundamental UN> protection (95% SEF), % of UB/1,732 Operation delay of 3rd harm-based protection (100% SEF) in s Operation delay of fundamental UN> protection (95% SEF) in s
CBexists
No Yes 1.00 - 10.00
No
FactorCBopen
0.01
1.00
UN3rdH<
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
UT3BlkLevel
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
UNFund>
1.0 - 50.0
0.1
5.0
t3rdH
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tUNFund
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
4.8.7
Rotor earthground fault protection

Function block name: ANSI number: 64R IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IN> Rotor
4.8.7.1
Setting guidelines Rotor earthground fault

The COMBIFLEX injection unit RXTTE4 is used for injection of an AC voltage to the generator rotor winding. From RXTTE4 the measured injected current is connected to an analog current input of REG 670 and the injected voltage is connected to an analog voltage input of REG 670. Due to quite low level of injected current signal 1 A rated CT input into REG 670 must be used for this protection. For applications where 5 A rated CTs are used for other protection functions one mixed
322
REG 670
TRM with 1 A and 5 A CT inputs shall be ordered. For this current input a rated primary and secondary current shall be set. The primary rated CT current is set to 1000 A and the secondary rated CT current should be set to 1 A. By doing so the displayed primary current under service value will correspond to mA value of the injected current into field winding. Parameter CTearthing shall be set to the default value ToObject. The voltage input is taken directly from the 120 V voltage tap that is fed to RXTTE4 as shown in figure 130. The primary rated VT voltage is set to 100 kV and the secondary rated VT voltage is set to 100 V. By doing so the displayed primary voltage under service value will correspond to the value of the injected voltage on 120 V tap.
Generator rotor winding
Connection to be done by the panel builder / field contractor

RXTTE 4 REG 670 221
Optional external resistor

222
421 I 428
313 314 324 U 325 321 315
230 V AC 120 V AC 0
en07000185.vsd
Figure 130:
Connection of rotor earth fault protection
For small generators only I can be measured (i.e. non-directional OC is used), see figure 130. CurrentInput: The parameter CurrentInput shall be set to phase1. In the signal matrix tool the input current signal from RXTTE4 is linked to phase 1. IBase: The parameter IBase shall be set to primary current of the CT, which means 1000 A.
REG 670
323
VoltageInput: The parameter VoltageInput shall be set to phase 1. In the signal matrix tool the voltage signal from RXTTE4 is linked to the first input of the used prepossessing block. UBase: The parameter UBase shall be set to primary set primary Voltage of the VT, which means 100 kV. OperHarmRestr: The possibility for harmonic restrain of the functions should not be used as this could block the function at a faulted condition. Therefore the parameter OperHarmRestr shall be set Off. EnRestrainCurr: No current restrain shall be used. Therefore the parameter EnRestrainCurr shall be set Off. Directional characteristic parameters shall be set as follows: RCADir=0 degree; ROADir=90 degree. Operation_OC1: The first stage (OC1) of the current function shall be used for alarm with the highest sensitivity. Therefore the parameter Operation_OC1 shall be set On. StartCurr_OC1: The sensitivity of the alarm signal shall be set high. It is proposed to set the primary current pick-up level to 30 mA, which will give a sensitivity 10 20 kohm. StartCurr_OC1 is proposed to be set to 3% of IBase. CurrMult_OC1: The binary input ENMULTOC1 is not used in this application. Therefore the setting of the parameter CurrMult_OC1 is of no importance. Can be set to 1.0. CurveType_OC1: The time delay of the alarm signal should be constant with a delay of about 10.0 s or what the user requires. Set CurveType_OC1 to IEC Def. Time or ANSI Def. Time. tDef_OC1 is set according to user preference, recommended value 10 s. ResCrvType_OC1: The alarm signal should reset immediately when the earth fault detection resets. Therefore the ResCrvType_OC1 is set Instantaneous. VCntrlMode_OC1: There shall be no voltage control/restrain of the current function. Therefore VCntrlMode_OC1 is set Off. DirMode_OC1, DirPrinc_OC1: The current measuring function shall be sensitive for the active component of the injected current (in phase with the injected voltage). DirMode_OC1 is set to Forward. DirPrinc_OC1 is set IcosPhi&U. ActLowVolt1_VM: If the injected voltage gets low the function shall block to avoid unwanted signal. ActLowVolt1_VM is set Block. Operation_OC2: The second stage (OC2) of the current function shall be used for trip with a lower sensitivity compared to the alarm stage. Therefore the parameter Operation_OC2 shall be set On.
324
REG 670
StartCurr_OC2: The sensitivity of the trip signal shall be set according to user preference. It is proposed to set the primary current pick-up level to 70 mA, which will give a sensitivity 3 5 kohm depending on the capacitance of the field winding to ground. StartCurr_OC2 is proposed to be set to 7% of IBase. CurrMult_OC2: The binary input ENMULTOC2 is not used in this application. Therefore the setting of the parameter CurrMult_OC2 is of no importance. Can be set to 1.0. CurveType_OC2: The time delay of the alarm trip should be constant with a delay of about 0.5 s or what the user requires. Set CurveType_OC2 to IEC Def. Time or ANSI Def. Time. tDef_OC2 is set according to user preference, recommended value 0.5 s. ResCrvType_OC2: The alarm signal should reset immediately when the earth fault detection resets. Therefore the ResCrvType_OC2 is set Instantaneous. VCntrlMode_OC2: There shall be no voltage control/restrain of the current function. Therefore VCntrlMode_OC2 is set Off. DirMode_OC2, DirPrinc_OC2: The current measuring function shall be sensitive for the active component (in phase with the injected voltage) of the injected current. DirMode_OC2 is set to Forward. DirPrinc_OC2 is set IcosPhi&U. ActLowVolt2_VM: If the injected voltage gets low the function shall block to avoid unwanted signal. ActLowVolt2_VM is set Block. Operation_UC1, Operation_UC2: The undercurrent functions are not used. Therefore Operation_UC1 and Operation_UC2 are set Off. Stage UC1 can be used for supervision of injected current into the rotor winding. In that case it could detect that injection path has been broken and give an alarm. However this must be check for every individual installation if the injected current is sufficiently high in order to use undercurrent supervision. Operation_OV1, Operation_OV2: The overvoltage functions are not used. Therefore Operation_OV1 and Operation_OV2 are set Off. Operation_UV1: The undervoltage stage is used to give a signal if the injection voltage gets low. Operation_UV1 is set On. StartVolt_UV1: The signal of low injection voltage should be given if this voltage is lower than about 80% of the normal voltage. This means 80% of 100kV (i.e. 100V). This corresponds to the setting StartVolt_UV1: of 80V at 120V tap of RXTTE4. CurveType_UV1: The time delay of the alarm signal should be constant with a delay of about 10.0 s or what the user requires. Set CurveType_UV1 to Definite time. tDef_UV1 is set according to user preference, recommended value 10 s. ResCrvType_UV1: The alarm signal should reset immediately when the earth fault detection resets. Therefore the ResCrvType_UV1 is set Instantaneous. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 325
Operation_UV2: The second stage of the overvoltage function is not used. Therefore Operation_UV2 is set Off. When directional principle is used, the actual phase angle shift between injected current and injected voltage for Rotor earth fault protection shall be checked during commissioning of the generator protection. The injected current shall lead the injected voltage for approximately 90 degrees (e.g. Angle_Uinj=0 & Angle_Iinj=+90). This can be checked on the built-in HMI under Menu for TRM service values. If during this check can be seen that injected current is actually lagging the injection voltage for approximately 90 some mistake in the wiring has taken place. Thus, either this mistake shall be rectified or setting parameters DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2 shall be changed to value Reverse. Anyhow it is strongly recommended to finally perform the "Primary Testing" of this function by intentionally connecting resistance of 500 Ohms between connection terminal 221 on the RXTTE4 unit and ground. Rotor earth fault function should then operate in accordance with preset time. During this test the connection to the generator field winding can be temporary disconnected if so required by utility safety regulations.
4.9
4.9.1
Frequency protection
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)
Function block name: TUFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
f<
4.9.1.1
Application
The underfrequency function (TUF) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of low fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The power system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual generation and the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the available generation is too low to fully supply the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. The underfrequency function detects such situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up, etc.
326
REG 670
Sometimes also shunt reactors are automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to reduce the power system voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the load. The underfrequency function is very sensitive and accurate and can also be used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough. The underfrequency signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is especially important for generator stepup transformers, which might be connected to the generator but disconnected from the grid, during a roll-out sequence. If the generator is still energized, the system will experience overexcitation, due to the low frequency.
4.9.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the underfrequency (TUF) function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where the underfrequency protection performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for underfrequency protection: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators, transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding load, in generation deficit situations.
The underfrequency start value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the nominal primary voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The underfrequency function is not instantaneous, since the frequency is related to movements of the system inertia, but the time and frequency steps between different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, e.g. down to 70 ms. Below, some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given: Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment. Power system protection, by load shedding The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/ or in frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of
REG 670
327
the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency start level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay must be rather short. The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of the underfrequency function could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.
4.9.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 104:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 48.80 50 0.200 Unit kV Hz %UB s Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.
TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00
0.001 0.001 0.01
0.000 0.000 50.10
s s Hz
TimerOperation UNom
Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150
Definite timer 100
%UB
UMin
50 - 150
90
%UB
Exponent
1.0
0.1
0.0 - 5.0
tMax
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tMin
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
328
REG 670
Section 4 IED application 4.9.2 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Function block name: TOFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTOF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
f>
4.9.2.1
Application
The overfrequency function (TOF) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The power system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the available generation is too large compared to the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. The overfrequency function detects such situations and provides an output signal, suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-point change, etc. The overfrequency function is very sensitive and accurate and can also be used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough.
4.9.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the overfrequency (TOF) function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where the overfrequency protection performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for overfrequency protection: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators, and motors to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding generation, in generation surplus situations.
The overfrequency start value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The overfrequency function is not instantaneous, since the frequency is related to movements of the system inertia, but the time and frequency steps between different
REG 670
329
actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, e.g. down to 70 ms. Below, some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given. Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment. Power system protection, by generator shedding The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well below the highest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/ or in frequency) depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency start level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.
4.9.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 105:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
4.9.3
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Function block name: RCFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPFRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
df/dt > <
330
REG 670

4.9.3.1 Application
The rate-of-change frequency function (RCF), is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The RCF can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing frequency. The RCF provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding or generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up, etc. Very often the rate-of-change of frequency is used in combination with a low frequency signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large generator will require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in combination with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection can be used - at a rather high setting.
4.9.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where the rate-ofchange of frequency protection performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for rate-of-change of frequency protection: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to high or to low frequency, such as generators, transformers, and motors to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in balance.
The rate-of-change of frequency (RFC) function is normally used together with an over- or underfrequency function, in small power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance between load and generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take place very quickly, and there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency signal has reached an abnormal value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level closer to the primary nominal level, if the rateof-change of frequency is large (with respect to sign). The rate-of-change of frequency start value is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the primary nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The rate-of-change of frequency function is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal noise. However, the time, rate-of-change of frequency and frequency steps between different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, e.g. down to 70 ms. REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 331
Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change of frequency as large as 5 Hz/s, due to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a large imbalance between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of faults) are cleared - up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated from a large system. For more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems, the rate-of-change of frequency is much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.
4.9.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 106:
Parameter Operation UBase
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.
StartFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Hz/s
IntBlockLevel tTrip
0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000
1 0.001
50 0.200
%UB s
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
0.01
49.90
Hz
tRestore tReset
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000
s s
4.10
4.10.1
Multipurpose protection
General current and voltage protection (GAPC)
332
REG 670
Function block name: GFxxANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21, 40
I
IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC
U
4.10.1.1
Application
A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and earth results in a short-circuit or an earth fault. Such faults can result in large fault currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment. Depending on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent protections, based on measurement of phase, ground or sequence current components can be used to clear these faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these overcurrent protections shall be directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained. The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage conditions. Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system abnormal condition different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, residual or sequence voltage components can be used to detect and operate for such incident. The IED can be provided with multiple General Function (GF) protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. Each general current and voltage protection function module has got four independent protection elements built into it. 1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features: Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the measured current is lower than pre-set level Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (i.e.
REG 670
333
Forward or Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable (i.e. Non-Directional / Block / Memory) Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-up level of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the measured voltage Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set percentage of the current restrain quantity. Definite time delay for both steps Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps
2. 3.
Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features: Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
4.
Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
All these four protection elements within one general protection function works independently from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled. However it shall be once more noted that all these four protection elements measure one selected current quantity and one selected voltage quantity (see table 107 and table 108). It is possible to simultaneously use all four-protection elements and their individual stages. Sometimes in order to obtain desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between two or more protection elements/stages within one GF function by appropriate IED configuration (e.g. dead machine protection for generators).
Current and voltage selection for GF function
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single current and the single voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool (i.e. selected current quantity and selected voltage quantity). The user can select, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the following current quantities shown in table 107.
Table 107: Available selection for current quantity within GF function
Comment GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor
Set value for parameter "CurrentInput 1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq
334
REG 670

Set value for parameter "CurrentInput 6 7 8 9 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Comment GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0o all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
12
Phase3-Phase1
13 14 15
MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
The user can select, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the following voltage quantities shown in table 108.
Table 108: Available selection for voltage quantity within GF function
Comment GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180o in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180o in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
Set value for parameter "VoltageInput" 1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq
-3ZeroSeq
REG 670
335

Set value for parameter "VoltageInput" 7 8 9 MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Comment GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2VA-VB) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1) GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0o all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
12
Phase3-Phase1
13 14 15
MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 108 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1VAB, VBC and VCA. This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the preprocessing block, which will then take automatic care about it.
Base quantities for GF function
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every GF function. Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 107. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 107.
Base voltage shall be entered as: 336 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
1. 2.
rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 108. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown intable 108.
Application possibilities
Due to its flexibility the GF can be used, with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications. Some of possible examples are given below: 1. Transformer and line applications: 2. Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic) (21) Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic) (21) Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V) Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional) Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 46, 67, 67N, 67Q) Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage protection (27, 59, 47) Special thermal overload protection (49) Open Phase protection Unbalance protection 80-95% Stator EF protection (measured or calculated 3Uo) (59GN) Rotor EF protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection unit) (64F) Underimpedance protection (21) Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V) Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative Sequence. Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs looking into generator) (67Q) Stator Overload protection (49S) Rotor Overload protection (49R) Loss of Excitation protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection) (40) Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection, 2% sensitivity) (32) Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection (51/27) Breaker head flashover protection Improper synchronizing detection Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm (46)
Generator protection
REG 670
337
Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage protection (27x, 59x, 47) Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional pos. seq. OC) (78) Inadvertent generator energization
Inadvertent generator energization
When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the generator circuit breaker is closed by mistake. Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes it to behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point, essentially represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to draw from one to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance. Machine terminal voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again, depending on the system equivalent impedance (including the block transformer). Higher quantities of machine current and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to 70% rated voltage) can be expected if the generator is connected to a strong system. Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit current and 20% to 40% rated voltage) are representative of weaker systems. Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop in the rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally damaged from excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a few seconds. Of more critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged in a fraction of a second due to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms). There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The reverse power protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this protection is normally too long. For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be included in the protective scheme. The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage function will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is not connected to the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The overvoltage function will detect the situation when the generator is taken into operation and will disable the overcurrent function. The overcurrent function will have a pick-up value about 50% of the rated current of the generator. The trip delay will be about 50 ms.
4.10.1.2
Setting guidelines
338
REG 670
The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (GF) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive earth-fault protection of power lines were incorrect zero sequence polarization may result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally it can be used in applications on underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is practically constant. It shall be noted that directional negative sequence OC element offers protection against all unbalance faults (i.e. phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall be taken that the minimum pickup of such protection function shall be set above natural system unbalance level. Example will be given how by using negative sequence directional overcurrent protection elements within a GF function, sensitive earth fault protection for power lines can be achieved. This functionality can be achieved by using one GF function. The following shall be done in order to ensure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to one GF instance (e.g. GF04) Set parameter CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that function measures I2 current and NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting) Set parameter VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage phasor is intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality Set base current value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs Set base voltage value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage in kV Set parameter RCA_DIR to value +65 degrees (i.e. NegSeq current typically lags the inverted NegSeq voltage for this angle during the fault) Set parameter ROA_DIR to value 90 degree Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional element will be enabled) Enable one overcurrent stage (e.g. OC1) By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time delayed curve in accordance with your network protection philosophy Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values) Set parameter tDef_OC1 or parameter k when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure proper time coordination with other ground fault protections installed in the vicinity of this power line Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to Icos&U Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during three-phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this element to operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain percentage (i.e. 10% is typical value) of measured PosSeq current 339
REG 670
in the power line. To do this the following settings within the same function shall be done: 16. Set parameter EnRestrainCurr to On 17. Set parameter RestrCurrInput to PosSeq 18. Set parameter RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.10 If required this function can be used in directional comparison protection scheme for the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of this power line are available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are required. One for forward and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1 stage can be used to detect faults in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be used to detect faults in reverse direction. However the following shall be noted for such application: the set values for RCA_Dir and ROA_Dir setting parameters will be as well applicable for OC2 stage setting parameter DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse setting parameter StartCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup value of forward OC1 element (i.e. typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in order to insure proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during current reversal situations start signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and reverse signals to the remote end of the power line the available scheme communications function block within REx670 IED shall be used between multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in order to insure proper conditioning of the above two start signals
Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
Example will be given how to use one GF function to provide negative sequence inverse time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of 20s, and maximum continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated current. The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often used world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following formula:
top =
k I NS Ir
2
(Equation 151)
where: top is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent relay
340
REG 670
k INS Ir
is the generator capability constant in seconds is the measured negative sequence current is the generator rated current
By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the generator in accordance with the following formula
x = 7% = 0, 07 pu
(Equation 152)
Equation 151 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent relay:
1 x2 top = 2 I NS x Ir k
(Equation 153)
In order to achieve such protection functionality with one GF functions the following must be done: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect three-phase generator currents to one GF instance (e.g. GF01) Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes Enable one overcurrent step (e.g. OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value "Programmable"
A + B top = k P M -C
where: top k M
(Equation 154)
is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm is time multiplier (parameter setting) is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT calculation
When the equation 151 is compared with the equation 153 for the inverse time characteristic of the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:
REG 670
341
1. 2. 3. 4.
set k equal to the generator negative sequence capability value set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x
then the OC1 step of the GF function can be used for generator negative sequence inverse overcurrent protection. For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper function operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this GF function make sure that the base current value for the GF function is equal to the generator rated current set k_OC1 = 20 set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816 set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 = 7%
Proper timing of the GF function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation in case of repetitive unbalance conditions. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes (e.g. use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and OV1 for negative sequence overvoltage alarm).
Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standards
Example will be given how to use one GF function to provide generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimum-operating current shall be set to 116% of generator rating. The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo generators in accordance with the following formula:
top =
k Im -1 Ir
2
(Equation 155)
where: top k Im Ir is the operating time of the generator stator overload relay is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (k = 37.5 for the IEC standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard) is the magnitude of the measured current is the generator rated current
342
REG 670
This formula is applicable only when measured current (e.g. positive sequence current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the generator rated current). By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the overload relay in accordance with the following formula:
x = 116% = 1,16 pu
(Equation 156)
formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate time of the generator stator overload relay:
1 x2 top = 2 Im 1 - 2 x Ir x k
(Equation 157)
In order to achieve such protection functionality with one GF functions the following must be done: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect three-phase generator currents to one GF instance (e.g. GF01) Set parameter CurrentInput to value "PosSeq" Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes Enable one overcurrent step (e.g. OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value "Programmable"
A + B top = k P M -C
where: top k M
(Equation 158)
is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm is time multiplier (parameter setting) is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT calculation
When the equation 157 is compared with the equation 158 for the inverse time characteristic of the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REG 670 set k equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x 343
then the OC1 step of the GF function can be used for generator negative sequence inverse overcurrent protection. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this GF function make sure that the base current value for the GF function is equal to the generator rated current set k = 37.5 for the IEC standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432 set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432 set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 = 116%
Proper timing of the GF function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation in case of repetitive overload conditions. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes. In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be achieved.
Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit breaker head flashover protection for generators
Example will be given how to use one GF function to provide open phase protection. This can be achieved by using one GF function by comparing the unbalance current with a pre-set level. In order to make such a function more secure it is possible to restrain it by requiring that at the same time the measured unbalance current must be bigger than 97% of the maximum phase current. By doing this it will be insured that function can only pickup if one of the phases is open circuited. Such an arrangement is easy to obtain in the GF function by enabling the current restraint feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one GF instance (e.g. GF03) 2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value "UnbalancePh" 3. Set parameter EnRestrainCurr to "On" 4. Set parameter RestrCurrInput to "MaxPh" 5. Set parameter RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97 6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary amperes 7. Enable one overcurrent step (e.g. OC1) 8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value "IEC Def. Time" 9. Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 5% 10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (e.g. 2.0s) Proper operation of the GF function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it 344 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670 1.
shall be noted that set values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable for OC2 step as soon as it is enabled. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes. For example in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step with set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against circuit breaker head flashover protection is achieved.
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up transformer
Example will be given how to use one GF function to provide voltage restrained overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study gives the following required settings: Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages below 25% of rated voltage
This functionality can be achieved by using one GF function. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one GF instance (e.g. GF05) Set parameter "CurrentInput" to value "MaxPh" Set parameter "VoltageInput" to value "MinPh-Ph" (i.e. it is assumed that minimum phase-to-phase voltage shall be used for restraining. Alternatively positive sequence voltage can be used for restraining by selecting "PosSeq" for this setting parameter) Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV Enable one overcurrent step (e.g. OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value "ANSI Very Inverse" If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter tMin_OC1 (default value 0.05s) Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 185% Set parameter VCntrlMode_OC1 to "On" Set parameter VDepMode_OC1 to "Slope" Set parameter VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25 Set parameter UHighLimit_OC1 to value 100% Set parameter ULowLimit_OC1 to value 25%
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Proper operation of the GF function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
REG 670
345

Loss of excitation protection for a generator
Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent protection element within a GF function, loss of excitation protection for a generator can be achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following values are calculated: Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero active loading 38% of the generator MVA rating Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees
This functionality can be achieved by using one GF function. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one GF instance (e.g. GF02) Set parameter CurrentInput to "PosSeq" Set parameter VoltageInput to "PosSeq" Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV Set parameter RCA_DIR to value -84 degree (i.e. current lead voltage for this angle) Set parameter ROA_DIR to value 90 degree Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5% Enable one overcurrent step (e.g. OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value "IEC Def. Time" Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 38% Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting) Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to "Forward" Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to "IcosF&U" Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to "Block"
Proper operation of the GF function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall be noted that set values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if directional feature is enabled for this step as well. Figure 131 shows overall protection characteristic Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
346
REG 670
Q [pu]
A 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.2 -rca 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 C -0.4 -0.6 -0.8 D ILowSet 1.2 1.4 rca ILowSet B
Operating region
IPS
P [pu]
-0.2
UPS
Operating Region
en05000535.vsd
Figure 131:
Loss of excitation
Inadvertent generator energization
The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in figure 132.
REG 670
347
CVGAPC 3IP 3UP TROC1
TROV1 1 TRUV1 BLKOC1
en06000497.vsd
Figure 132:
Configuration of the inadvertent energization function
The setting of the function in the inadvertent energization application is done as described below. It is assumed that the instance is used only for the inadvertent energization application. It is however possible to extent the use of the instance by using OC2, UC1, UC2, OV2, UV2 for other protection applications.
General settings of the instance
Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. CurrentInput: The current used for the inadvertent energization application is set by the parameter CurrentInput. Here the setting MaxPh is chosen. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current according to equation 159.
IBase = SN 3 U N
(Equation 159)
VoltageInput: The Voltage used for the inadvertent energization application is set by the parameter VoltageInput. Here the setting MaxPh-Ph is chosen.
348
REG 670
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-phase) in kV. OperHarmRestr: No 2nd harmonic restrain is used in this application: OperHarmRestr is set Off. It can be set On if the instance is used also for other protection functions. EnRestrainCurr: The restrain current function is not used in this application: EnRestrainCurr is set Off. It can be set On if the instance is used also for other protection functions.
Settings for OC1
Operation_OC1: The parameter Operation_OC1 is set On to activate this function. StartCurr_OC1: The operate current level for OC1 is set by the parameter StartCurr_OC1. The setting is made in % of IBase. The setting should be made so that the protection picks up at all situations when the generator is switched on to the grid at stand still situations. The generator current in such situations is dependent of the short circuit capacity of the external grid. It is however assumed that a setting of 50% of the generator rated current will detect all situations of inadvertent energization of the generator. CurveType_OC1: The time delay of OC1 should be of type definite time and this is set in the parameter CurveType_OC1 where ANSI Def. Time is chosen. tDefOC1: The time delay is set in the parameter tDefOC1 and is set to a short time. 0.05 s is recommended. VCntrlMode_OC1: Voltage control mode for OC1: VCntrlMode_OC1 is set Off. HarmRestr_OC1: Harmonic restrain for OC1: HarmRestr_OC1 is set Off. DirMode_OC1: Direction mode for OC1: DirMode_OC1 is set Off. Operation_OC2: Operation_OC2 is set Off if the function is not used for other protection function. Operation_UC1: Operation_UC1 is set Off if the function is not used for other protection function. Operation_UC2: Operation_UC2 is set Off if the function is not used for other protection function.
Setting for OC2
Setting for UC1
Setting for UC2
Settings for OV1
Operation_OV1: The parameter Operation_OV1 is set On to activate this function. StartVolt_OV1: The operate voltage level for OV1 is set by the parameter StartVolt_OV1. The setting is made in % of UBase. The setting should be made so REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 349
that the protection blocks the function at all situation of normal operation. The setting is done as the lowest operate voltage level of the generator with an added margin. The setting 85% can be used in most cases. CurveType_OV1:The time delay of OV1 should be of type definite time and this is set in the parameter CurveType_OV1 where Definite time is chosen. ResCrvType_OV1: The reset time delay of OV1 should be instataneous and this is set in the parameter ResCrvType_OV1 where Instantaneous chosen. tDefOV1: The time delay is set in the parameter tDefOV1 and is set so that the inadvertent energization function is active a short time after energization of the generator. 1.0 s is recommended. Operation_OV2:Operation_OV2 is set Off if the function is not used for other protection function.
Setting for OV2
Settings for UV1
Operation_UV1: The parameter Operation_UV1 is set On to activate this function. StartVolt_UV1: The operate voltage level for UV1 is set by the parameter StartVolt_UV1. The setting is made in % of UBase. The setting shall be done so that all situations with disconnected generator is detected. The setting 70% can be used in most cases. CurveType_UV1: The time delay of UV1 should be of type definite time and this is set in the parameter CurveType_UV1 where Definite time is chosen. ResCrvType_UV1: The reset time delay of UV1 should be delayed a short time so that the function is not blocked before operation of OC1 in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. The parameter ResCrvType_UV1 is set to Frozen timer. tDefUV1: The time delay is set in the parameter tDefUV1 and is set so that the inadvertent energization function is activated after some time when the generator is disconnected from the grid. 10.0 s is recommended. tResetDef_UV1: The reset time of UV1 is set by the parameter tResetDef_UV1. The setting 1.0 s is recommended. Operation_UV2: Operation_UV2 is set Off if the function is not used for other protection function.
Setting for UV2
4.10.1.3
Setting parameters
350
REG 670
Table 109:
Parameter Operation CurrentInput
Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Step Default Off MaxPh Unit Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function
IBase VoltageInput
1 -
3000 MaxPh
A -
Base Current Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function
UBase OperHarmRestr
0.05 -
400.00 Off
kV -
Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyse disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle
l_2nd/l_fund
1.0
20.0
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
5000
%IB
EnRestrainCurr
Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 -180 - 180
Off
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff RCADir
0.01 1
0.00 - 5.00 -75
Deg
REG 670
351

Parameter ROADir LowVolt_VM Range 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 75 0.5 Unit Deg %UB Description Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1 CurveType_OC1
Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00
1.0 -
Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time
%IB -
tDef_OC1
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
k_OC1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC1
Step
VDepFact_OC1
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
HarmRestr_OC1
Off On
Off
352
REG 670

Parameter DirMode_OC1 Range Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
DirPrinc_OC1
I&U
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2
1.0 -
Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time
%IB -
tDef_OC2
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase
k_OC2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC2
Step
VDepFact_OC2
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
REG 670
353

Parameter HarmRestr_OC2 Range Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 Step Default Off Unit Description Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC2
I&U
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC1
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
HarmRestr_UC1
Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150
Off
Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC2
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
HarmRestr_UC2
Off
Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1
0.1
Off 150.0
%UB
354
REG 670

Parameter CurveType_OV1 Range Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Definite time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
tDef_OV1
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
tMin_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_OV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2
Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
0.1 -
Off 150.0 Definite time
%UB -
tDef_OV2
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_OV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1
Off On 2.0 - 150.0
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
CurveType_UV1
Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Definite time
tDef_UV1
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Off On
On
REG 670
355

Parameter BlkLowVolt_UV1 Range 0.0 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 0.5 Unit %UB Description Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV2 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase
Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2
Off On 2.0 - 150.0
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
CurveType_UV2
Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Definite time
tDef_UV2
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Off On 0.0 - 5.0
On
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 110:
Parameter CurrMult_OC1
Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range 2.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 - 10.0 Unit Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1
0.01
0.00
P_OC1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC1
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
356
REG 670

Parameter C_OC1 Range 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 1.000 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC1
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
TR_OC1
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
CR_OC1
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
CurrMult_OC2
2.0
0.1
1.0 - 10.0
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC2
0.01
0.00
P_OC2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC2
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
C_OC2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
PR_OC2
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
TR_OC2
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
CR_OC2
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
REG 670
357

Parameter tResetDef_UC2 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV1
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2
tResetIDMT_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_OV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_OV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
358
REG 670

Parameter D_OV2 Range 0.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 10.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2 Selection of reset curve type for UV1
P_OV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_UV1
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV1
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_UV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
REG 670
359

Parameter B_UV2 Range 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.500 - 99.000 Unit Description Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2
C_UV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_UV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
4.11
4.11.1
Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)
Function block name: CCSxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.11.1.1
Application
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative sequence current functions. When currents from two independent 3-phase sets of CTs, or CT cores, measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be blocked and an alarm given. In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient stage must then be avoided. The supervision function must be sensitive and have short operate time in order to prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of faulty CT secondary circuits. Open CT circuits creates extremely high voltages in the circuits which may damage the insulation and cause new problems.
360
REG 670
The application shall thus be done with this in consideration, specially if protection functions are blocked.
4.11.1.2
Setting guidelines
The CCS function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the same current transformer. The minimum operate current, IMinOp, should as a minimum be set to twice the residual current in the supervised CT circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary current. The parameter Ip>Block is normally set at 150% in order to block the function during transient conditions. The FAIL output is connected in the CAP configuration to the blocking input of the protection function to be blocked at faulty CT secondary circuits.
4.11.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 111:
Parameter Operation IBase
Basic parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Unit A Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase
IMinOp
5 - 200
20
%IB
Table 112:
Parameter Ip>Block
Advanced parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function

Range 5 - 500 Step 1 Default 150 Unit %IB Description Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase
4.11.2
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
REG 670
361

Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are: distance protection function under/over-voltage function synchrocheck function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.
These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the IED. It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, located as close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one of them. Separate fuse-failure monitoring relays or elements within the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function (FSD). The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions. The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3 U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3 I2, is recommended for use in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3 U0 without the presence of the residual current 3 I0, is recommended for use in directly or low impedance earthed networks. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of zero sequence current this function shall be avoided. A separate operation mode selector OpMode has been introduced for better adaptation to system requirements. The mode selector makes it possible to select interactions between the negative sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications the OpMode is set to either UNsINs for selecting negative sequence algorithm or UZsIZs for zero sequence based algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there is a risk that the fuse failure function will not be activated due to the system conditions, the dependability of the fuse failure function can be increased if the OpMode is set to UZsIZs OR UNsINs or OptimZsNs. In mode UZsIZs OR UNsINs both the negative and zero sequence based algorithm is activated and working in an OR-condition. Also in mode OptimZsNs both the negative and zero sequence algorithm are activated and the one that has the highest magnitude of measured negative sequence current will operate. 362 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse failure function OpMode can be selected to UZsIZs AND UNsINs which gives that both negative and zero sequence algorithm is activated working in an AND-condition, i.e. both algorithm must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKU or BLKZ.
4.11.2.2
Setting guidelines General

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%, depending on the system operating conditions. Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on. The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of the base voltage and base current for the function, UBase and IBase respectively. Set UBase to the primary rated voltage of the potential voltage transformer winding and IBase to the primary rated current of the current transformer winding. The voltage threshold UPh> is used to identify low voltage condition in the system. Set UPh> below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of UBase.
Setting of common parameters
Negative sequence based

U2 100 UBase
The setting of 3U2> should not be set lower than according to equation 160.
3U2 > =
(Equation 160)
where: DU2 is maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation condition UBaseVBase is setting of base voltage for the function
The setting of the current limit 3I2> is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of 3I2> must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 161.
3I2 > = DI2 100 IBase
(Equation 161)
where:
REG 670
363
DI2 IBase
is maximal negative sequence current during normal operating condition is setting of base current for the function
The relay setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the base voltage UBase, where UBase is the primary base voltage, normally the rated voltage of the primary potential voltage transformer winding. The setting of 3U0> should not be set lower than according to equation 162.
3U0 > = U0 100 UBase
Zero sequence based
(Equation 162)
where: DU0 is maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation condition UBase is setting of base voltage for the function
The setting of the current limit 3I0> is done in percentage of IBase, where IBase is the primary base current, normally the rated current of the primary current transformer winding. The setting of 3I2> must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 163.
3I0 > = s DI0 100 IBase
(Equation 163)
where: DI0 IBase is maximal negative sequence current during normal operating condition is setting of base current for the function
The setting of du/dt is done in percentage of UBase, where UBase is the primary base voltage, normally the rated voltage of the primary potential voltage transformer winding. The setting of DU> should be set high (approximately 60% of UBase) to avoid unwanted operation and the current threshold dI/dt low (approximately 10% of IBase) but higher than the setting of IMinOp (the minimum operate current of the IED). It shall always be used together with either the negative or zero sequence algorithm. If USetprim is the primary voltage for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of DU> and DI> will be given according to equation 164 and equation 165.
DU > = USetprim 100 UBase
dudv/dt and di/dt
(Equation 164)
364
REG 670
DI > =
ISetprim 100 IBase
(Equation 165)
Set the operation mode selector OperationDUDI to On if the delta function shall be in operation. The current threshold IPh> shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance protection function. A 5-10% lower value is recommended.
Dead line detection
The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLD< for the current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold. Set the IDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A safety margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases). Set the UDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating voltage. A safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.
4.11.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 113:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 UZsIZs Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Operating mode selection
3U0>
30
%UB
Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase
3I0<
1 - 100
10
%IB
3U2>
1 - 100
30
%UB
REG 670
365

Parameter 3I2< Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 10 Unit %IB Description Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/On Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of sealin phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase
OpDUDI DU>
Off On 1 - 100
Off 60
%UB
DI<
1 - 100
15
%IB
UPh>
1 - 100
70
%UB
IPh>
1 - 100
10
%IB
SealIn USealln<
Off On 1 - 100
On 70
%UB
IDLD<
1 - 100
%IB
UDLD<
1 - 100
60
%UB
4.12
4.12.1
Control
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)
Function block name: SYNxANSI number: 25 IEC 61850 logical node name: SESRSYN IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
sc/vc
366
REG 670

4.12.1.1 Application Synchronizing
To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks a synchronizing function is provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components. The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchrocheck function is used. The synchronizing function measures the difference between the U-line and the Ubus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch of the base voltage UBase. The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiffSynch. The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger than the set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the synchrocheck is used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to the value FreqDiffM resp FreqDiffA for synchronism check function. The bus and line frequencies must also be within a range of +/- 5 Hz from the rated frequency. When the synchronizing option is included also for auto-reclose there is no reason to have different frequency setting for the manual and automatic Reclosing and the frequency difference values for synchronism check should be kept low. The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both U-bus and U-line. The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-closing time.
The synchronizing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well as the circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continuously. Closing angle is the change in angle during the set breaker closing operate time tBreaker. The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI or a compensation angle set to compensate for the difference. The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of circuit breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions for synchronism are not detected. It is also used to prevent the re-connection of two systems, which are divided after islanding and after a three pole reclosing.
Synchrocheck
REG 670
367
Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchrocheck since the system is tied together by two phases. The synchrocheck function block includes both the synchronism check function and the energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. The synchrocheck function also includes a built in voltage selection scheme which allows simple application in all types of busbar arrangements.
~
en04000179.vsd
Figure 133:
Two interconnected power systems
Figure 133 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the interconnection can be further away, i.e. a weak connection through other stations. The need for a synchronization check increases as the meshed system decreases since the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic closing is greater. The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. Output is only generated when all measured conditions are within their set limits simultaneously. The check consists of: Live line and live bus. Voltage level difference. Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a range of 5 Hz from rated frequency. Phase angle difference.
A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum period of time. In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for manually initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a bigger phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long and loaded parallel power line. For this application we accept a synchrocheck with a long operation time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The phase angle difference setting can be set for steady state conditions. Another example, is when the operation of the power net is disturbed and high-speed auto-reclosing after fault clearance takes place. This can cause a power swing in the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will, typically oscillate between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker needs to be 368 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
closed by auto-reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference should be tolerated, to a greater extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the case above. But if a big phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is some risk that auto-reclosing will take place when the phase angle difference is big and increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is smaller. To fulfill the above requirements the synchrocheck function is provided with duplicate settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under disturbed conditions (Auto).
SynchroCheck UHighBusSC > 50 - 120 % of Ub UHighLineSC > 50 - 120 % of Ub UDiffSC < 2 - 50 % of Ub PhaseDiffM < 5 - 90 degrees PhaseDiffA < 5 - 90 degrees FreqDiffM < 3 - 1000 mHz FreqDiffA < 3 - 1000 mHz
Bus voltage Fuse fail Line voltage Fuse fail Line reference voltage
en07000090.vsd
Figure 134:
Principle for the synchrocheck function
Energizing check
The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled reconnection of disconnected lines and buses to energized lines and buses. The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold values. The output is only given when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions. Figure 135 shows two power systems, where one (1) is energized and the other (2) is not energized. Power system 2 is energized (DLLB) from system 1 via the circuit breaker A.
REG 670
369
2 A B
Bus voltage
Line voltage
EnergizingCheck UHighBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of Ub UHighLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of Ub ULowBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of Ub ULowLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of Ub UMaxEnerg < 80 - 140 % of Ub
en07000091.vsd
Figure 135:
Principle for the energizing check function
The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead bus live line (DBLL) direction or in both directions over the circuit breaker. Energizing from different directions can be different for automatic reclosing and manual closing of the circuit breaker. For manual closing it is also possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead, Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL). The equipment is considered energized if the voltage is above a set value, e.g. 80% of the base voltage, and non-energized if it is below a set value, e.g. 30% of the base voltage. A disconnected line can have a considerable potential because of factors such as induction from a line running in parallel, or feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50% or more of the base voltage of the line. Normally for breakers with single breaking elements (<330kV) the level is well below 30%. When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to temporary interference. The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the synchrocheck and energizing check functions. For example, when the IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of the disconnectors auxiliary contacts, the right voltages for the synchrocheck and energizing check functions can be selected. Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and the 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single circuit breaker with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither does a single circuit breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need any internal voltage selection.
Voltage selection
370
REG 670
The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs in the IED and connected, using the control software, to each of the maximum two synchrocheck functions available in the IED.
External fuse failure
External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to inputs of the synchrocheck functions in the IED. The internal fuse failure supervision module can also be used, for at least the line voltage supply. The signal FUSE-VTSU is then used and connected to the blocking input of the energizing check function block. In case of a fuse failure, the synchrocheck and energizing check functions are blocked. The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Eternal selection of energizing direction. The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol on the local HMI through selector switch function block, but alternatively there can e.g. be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I). If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the LHMI, the choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through IEC 61850 communication. The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in figure 136. Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on LHMI can only show three signs.
SL01(180,100) SLGGIO
INTONE OFF DL DB DLB PSTO NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 SWPOSN
SYN1(1701,8) SESRSYN_25
MENMODE
en07000118.vsd
Figure 136:
Selection of the energizing direction from a LHMI symbol through a selector switch function block.
4.12.1.2
Application examples
The synchrocheck function block can also be used in some switchyard arrangements, but with different parameter settings. Below are some examples of how different arrangements are connected to the IED analogue inputs and to the function block
REG 670
371
(SPN). One function block is used per circuit breaker. The IED can be provided with one, two or three function blocks. The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use of configuration and signal matrix tools.
Single circuit breaker with single busbar

SYN1SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 SYNOK U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Bus 1
QB1
Fuse VT
UREF1
bus1Voltage
QA1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
en07000092.vsd
Figure 137:
Connection of the Synchrocheck function block in a single busbar arrangement
Figure 137 illustrates connection principles. For the synchrocheck and energizing check function (SPN1), there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage selection is necessary. For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from the busbar VT is connected to the single phase analog input UREF1 (CH10) on the analog input module AIM1 (also referred to as TRM). The line voltage is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1 (CH07), UL2 (CH08), UL3 (CH09) on the module AIM1. Inputs and outputs not used in the function block are dimmed in the figure. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage selection.
372
REG 670

Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection
SYN1SESRSYN _25 SYNOK U3PBB1 U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1 QOPEN TSTENOK B1 QCLD USELFAIL B2 QOPEN B1SEL B2 QCLD B2SEL LN1 QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2 QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Bus 1 Bus 2
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1
bus Voltage
QB1 QB2
QA 1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
en07000093.vsd
Figure 138:
Connection of the Synchrocheck function block in a single breaker, double busbar arrangement with external voltage selection.
In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage selection is made by external relays typically connected according to figure 138. Suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. That means that the connections to the function block will be the same as for the single busbar arrangement. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage selection.
REG 670
373

Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection
SYN 1SESRSYN _ 25 U3 PBB 1 U3 PBB 2 U3 PLN 1 U3 PLN 2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1 QOPEN B1 QCLD B2 QOPEN B2 QCLD LN 1 QOPEN LN 1 QCLD LN 2 QOPEN LN 2 QCLD UB 1 OK UB 1 FF UB 2 OK UB 2 FF ULN 1 OK ULN 1 FF ULN 2 OK ULN 2 FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1 SEL B2 SEL LN 1 SEL LN 2 SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Bus 1 Bus 2
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1 UREF2
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage
QB1 QB2
QA1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
en07000095.vsd
Figure 139:
Connection of the Synchrocheck function block in a single breaker, double busbar arrangement with internal voltage selection.
When internal voltage selection is needed, two analog input modules AIM1 (TRM +ADM) and AIM2 (TRM+ADM) are required. The voltage transformer circuit connections are made according to figure 139. The voltages from the busbar VTs are connected to the single phase analog input UREF1 (CH10) on the analog input module AIM1 and to the single phase analog input UREF2 (CH11) on the analog input module AIM2. The line voltage is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1 (CH07), UL2 (CH08), UL3 (CH09) on the module AIM1. Inputs and outputs not used in the function block (SPN) are dimmed in the figure. The voltage selection parameter selectCBConfig is set to single CB, double bus.
374
REG 670

Double circuit breaker
Bus 1 Bus 2
SYN1SESRSYN_25 SYNOK U3PBB1 U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1 UREF2
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage QA1 QA2
lineVoltage/1/2/3 UL1/UL2/UL3
Fuse VT
Line
QA1 SYN2SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 SYNOK U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN QA2
en07000096.vsd
Figure 140:
Voltage connections in a double breaker arrangement
A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks SPN1 and SPN2. No voltage selection is necessary, because the two busbar reference voltages UREF1 (CH10) and UREF2 (CH11) are references for two circuit breakers according to figure 140. The line voltage is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1,UL2, UL3 on the analog input module AIM1. Inputs and outputs not used in the function block (SPN) are dimmed in the figure. The voltage selection parameter selectCBConfig is set to NO VOLTAGE SELECTION for both SPN1 and SPN2.
1 1/2 circuit breaker
The line one IED in a 1 breakerarrangement handles voltage selection for two circuit breakers, one bus CB and the tie CB. The IED requires one or two analog input modules AIM1 (TRM+ADM) and AIM2 (TRM+ADM) and two function blocks
REG 670
375
SPN1 and SPN2. All voltages for the whole diameter should be connected to both IEDs in the diameter respectively.
Bus 1 Bus 2
QB1 QA1 Fuse VT QB2 QB1 QA1 QB2
UREF1
bus1Voltage
UREF2
bus2Voltage
Fuse VT
QA1 QB61 QB9 line1Voltage Fuse VT 1/2/3 Fuse line2Voltage VT QB62 QB9
UL1/UL2/UL3 UREF3
SYN1SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 SYNOK U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Bus 1 CB
U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE SYN2SESRSYN_25 SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Line 1
Line 2
Tie CB
en07000097.vsd
Figure 141:
Voltage connections in a1 breaker arrangement for the line 1 IED
376
REG 670
Bus 1 Bus 2
QB1 QA1 Fuse VT QB2 QB1 QA1 QB2
UREF2
bus1Voltage
UREF1
bus2Voltage
Fuse VT
QA1 QB61 QB9 QB62 QB9
UREF3
line1Voltage
Fuse VT
SYN1SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 SYNOK U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK U3PLN1 AUTOENOK U3PLN2 MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG UDIFFME AENMODE FRDIFFME MENMODE PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN SYN2SESRSYN_25
Bus 2 CB
UL1/UL2/UL3
line2Voltage Fuse VT 1/2/3
Line 1
Line 2
U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE
SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN
Tie CB
en07000098.vsd
Figure 142:
Voltage connections in a 1 breaker arrangement for the line 2 IED
The example shows the use of the Synchrocheck function for the Tie Circuit breaker in both Line IEDs. This depends on the arrangement of Auto-reclose and manual closing and might often not be required. Connecting and configuring is done according to figure 141 and figure 142. The connections are similar in both IEDs, apart from the line voltages and the bus voltages, which are crossed. This means that the three-phase line voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3 for line 1and F3 for line 2 in the line 1 IED are crossed in the line 2 IED. Also, the bus voltage connections to both the IEDs are crossed. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the SYN1 and SYN2 function blocks must be carefully checked in the PCM. In both IEDs the connections and configurations must abide by the following rules: Normally apparatus position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-type) and closed positions (a-type). Bus CB: REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 377
B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of the tie CB and disconnectors B2QOEN/CLD = Position of opposite bus CB and disconnectors LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own line disconnector LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite line disconnector UB1OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to own bus CB UB2OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to opposite bus CB ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to own line ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to opposite line Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 Bus CB
Tie CB: B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own bus CB and disconnectors B2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite bus CB and disconnectors LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own line disconnector LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite line disconnector UB1OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to own bus CB UB2OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to opposite bus CB ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to own line ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to opposite line CBConfig = Tie CB
If three SPN modules are provided in the same IED, or if preferred for other reason, the system can be set-up without mirroring and second bus CB set to 1 Bus alternatively CB. Above standard is so because normally two SPN with the same configuration and settings are provided in a station for each bay.
4.12.1.3
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check function (SYN) are set via the local HMI, or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600) in the PCM. Refer to the Setting parameters table in the next section of this chapter. Operation The operation mode can be set On/Off from the PST. The setting OFF disables the whole function. SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2 Configuration parameters for selection of measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1 and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phasephase) voltage. SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2
378
REG 670
Configuration parameters for selection of measuring phase of the voltage for line 1 and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phasephase) voltage. CBConfig This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage selection can be selected as: no voltage selection single circuit breaker with double bus 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2 (tie breaker)
UBase This is a configuration setting for the base voltage. PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points for bus voltage and line voltage. The set value is added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=bus voltage/line voltage. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes to connect the bus voltage phase-phase and line voltage phase-neutral. The SelPhaseBusx setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio setting to sqr3=1.73. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. OperationSynch The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions. UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch have to be set smaller than the value where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80 % of the rated voltage. UDiffSynch Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The difference is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the two networks running asynchronous. A normal setting is 10-15% of the rated voltage.
REG 670
379
FreqDiffMax The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is accepted. 1/FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn on the synchronoscope and is called the Beat time A typical value for the FreqDiffMax is 200-250 mHz which gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided as the two networks normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each other so the frequency difference shall be small. FreqDiffMin The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the system are defined to be asynchronous. For frequency difference lower than this value the systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value for the FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz. Generally the value should be low if both synchronizing and synchrocheck function is provided as it is better to let synchronizing function close as it will close at the exact right instance if the networks runs with a frequency difference. The syncrocheck function will at such a case close to the set phase angle difference value which can be 35 degrees from the correct angle. Note! The FreqDiffMin shall be set to the same value as FreqDiffM respFreqDiffA for the Synchrocheck function dependent of whether the functions are used for manual operation, auto-reclosing or both. tBreaker The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check that no slow logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then can be big variations in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is 80-150 ms depending on the breaker closing time. tMinSynch The tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which synchronizing closing attempt is given. The setting will not give a closing should a condition fulfilled occur within this time from the synchronizing function is started. Typical setting is 200 ms. tMaxSynch The tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of FreqDiffMin which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase equality. At a setting of 10ms the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would thus need to be at least tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network frequencies are expected to be outside the limits from start a margin needs to be added. Typical setting 300 seconds. OperationSC
380
REG 670
The OperationSC setting OFF disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting ON, the function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions. UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC have to be set lower than the value at which the breaker is expected to be closed with synchronism check. A typical value may be 80% of the base voltage. UDiff Setting for voltage difference between line and bus. FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen depending on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency difference setting is needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. Four auto-reclosing a bigger frequency difference setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used. A typical value for the FreqDiffM can 10 mHz and a typical value for the FreqDiffA can be 100-200 mHz. PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be chosen depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be chosen to allow closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in heavy loaded networks can be 45 degrees whereas in most networks the maximum occurring angle is below 25 degrees. tSCM and tSCA The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the synchrocheck conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. Under stable conditions a longer operation time delay setting is needed, where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing a shorter operation time delay setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical value for the tSCM may be 1 second and a typical value for the tSCA may be 0.1 second. AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker. The settings for each of them are:
REG 670
381
Off, the energizing function is disabled. DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of ULowLineEnerg and the bus voltage is above set value of UHighBusEnerg. DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of ULowBusEnerg and the line voltage is above set value of UHighLineEnerg. Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg, have to be set lower than the value at which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value may be 80 % of the base voltage. ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg In the same way, the threshold voltages ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg, have to be set greater than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A typical value may be 30% of the base voltage. Note that a disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 30% or more of the base line voltage. Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg/ UHighLineEnerg and ULowBusEnerg/ULowLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions may be such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of the energized threshold value. The parameters should therefore be set carefully by the user to avoid the setting conditions mentioned above. tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the energizing condition has remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. ManEnergDBDL If the parameter is set to On, manual closing is enabled when both line voltage and bus voltage are below ULowLineEnerg and ULowBusEnerg respectively and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UMaxEnerg This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the set value of UMaxEnerg. Note that the setting for the preprocessing block connected to synchrocheck function shall be typically done in the usual way as described in the IED 670 Application 382 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
Manual under section "Application/Analogue Inputs". However, the only exception is when a single phase-to-phase voltage is connected from the bus side to one VT input of the IED 670, while simultaneously three phase-to-ground voltages are connected from the line side to another three VT inputs of the IED 670. Under such circumstances the following connections and settings are required for the preprocessing block used for the bus voltage (note that the connection and the settings for the preprocessing block used for the line side VT are done in the usual way) in order to get the proper operation of the synchrocheck function: 1. When voltage UL1L2 is connected from the bus side do the following: 2. use a dedicated preprocessing block for the bus voltage for the synchrocheck function (i.e. do not use this preprocessing block for other voltage functions) connect this bus voltage (i.e. UL1L2 ) as the first analogue input of this preprocessing block in the Signal Matrix Tool leave all other analogue inputs into this preprocessing block not connected in the Signal Matrix Tool set this preprocessing block parameter to "ConnectionType=Ph-N" (only deviation from standard preprocessing block settings!) set all relevant voltage selection settings for synchrocheck function as "phase1-phase2" use a dedicated preprocessing block for the bus voltage for the synchrocheck function (i.e. do not use this preprocessing block for other voltage functions) connect this bus voltage (i.e. UL2L3 ) as the second analogue input of this preprocessing block in the Signal Matrix Tool leave all other analogue inputs into this preprocessing block not connected in the Signal Matrix Tool set this preprocessing block parameter to "ConnectionType=Ph-N" (only deviation from standard preprocessing block settings!) set all relevant voltage selection settings for synchrocheck function as "phase2-phase3" use a dedicated preprocessing block for the bus voltage for the synchrocheck function (i.e. do not use this preprocessing block for other voltage functions) connect this bus voltage (i.e. UL3L1) as thethird analogue input of this preprocessing block in the Signal Matrix Tool leave all other analogue inputs into this preprocessing block not connected in the Signal Matrix Tool set this preprocessing block parameter to "ConnectionType=Ph-N" (only deviation from standard preprocessing block settings!) set all relevant voltage selection settings for synchrocheck function as "phase3-phase1"
When voltage UL2L3 is connected from the bus side do the following:
3.
When voltage UL3L1 is connected from the bus side do the following:
REG 670
383

Table 114:
Parameter Operation SelPhaseBus1
Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 1.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 Step Default Off phase2 Unit Description Operation Off / On Select phase for bus1
SelPhaseBus2
phase2
Select phase for bus2
SelPhaseLine1
phase2
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
phase2
Select phase for line2
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
UBase PhaseShift URatio OperationSynch
0.001 5 0.001 -
400.000 0 0.040 - 25.000 Off
kV Deg -
Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in % of UBase Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing
UHighBusSynch
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UDiffSynch
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
10.0
%UB
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
0.001
0.010
Hz
384
REG 670

Parameter FreqDiffMax Range 0.050 - 0.250 Step 0.001 Default 0.200 Unit Hz Description Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage difference limit in % of UBase Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
0.001
0.300
Hz/s
tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch
0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00
0.001 0.001 0.01
0.080 0.200 600.00
s s s
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
OperationSC
Off On 50.0 - 120.0
On
UHighBusSC
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UDiffSC FreqDiffA
2.0 - 50.0 0.003 - 1.000
1.0 0.001
15.0 0.010
%UB Hz
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.010
Hz
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both
0.001 0.001 -
0.100 0.100 DBLL
s s -
ManEnerg
Both
Manual energizing check mode
REG 670
385

Parameter ManEnergDBDL UHighBusEnerg Range Off On 50.0 - 120.0 Step 1.0 Default Off 80.0 Unit %UB Description Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check
UHighLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
ULowBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
ULowLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
UMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
1.0
115.0
%UB
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
4.12.2
4.12.2.1
Apparatus control (APC)

Application
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervising of circuit breakers, disconnectors, and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings. Figure 143 gives an overview from what places the apparatus control function receive commands. Commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Center (CC), the station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.
386
REG 670
cc
Station HMI
GW
Station bus Local HMI REC670 Apparatus Control I/O REC670 Apparatus Control I/O Local HMI REC670 Apparatus Control I/O Local HMI
breakers disconnectors earthing switches

en05000115.vsd
Figure 143:
Overview of the apparatus control functions.
Features in the apparatus control function: Operation of primary apparatuses Select-Execute principle to give high reliability Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation Selection and supervision of operator place Command supervision Block/deblock of operation Block/deblock of updating of position indications Substitution of position indications Overriding of interlocking functions Overriding of synchrocheck Pole discordance supervision Operation counter Suppression of Mid position
The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks designated: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI
REG 670
387
Local remote Local remote control Position Evaluation
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The signal flow between these function blocks appears in figure 144. To realize the reservation function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve (QCRSV) also are included in the apparatus control function. The application description for all these functions can be found below. The function SCILO in the figure below is the logical node for interlocking. Control operation can be performed from the LHMI. Ithe administrator has defined users with the UM tool, then the local/remote switch is under authority control. If not, the default (factory) user is the SuperUser, that can perform control operations from the LHMI without LogOn. The default position of the local/remote switch is on remote. Information how to log on from LHMI is available in Operator's manual.
IEC 61850
QCBAY
SCSWI
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
-QB1 -QA1
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
-QB9
SCILO
en05000116.vsd
Figure 144:
Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks
388
REG 670

Bay control (QCBAY)
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The function gives permission to operate from two types of locations either from Remote (e.g. control center or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on the IED). The Local/ Remote switch position can also be set to Off, which means no operator place selected i.e. operation is not possible neither from local nor from remote. The bay control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay. There are four different blocking alternatives: Total block of the function Blocking of update of positions Blocking of commands
The function does not have a corresponding functionality defined in the IEC 61850 standard, which means that this function is included as a vendor specific logical node.
Switch controller (SCSWI)
The Switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices. After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller performs the following checks and actions: A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation. Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the operation is permitted. The synchrocheck/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and performs operation upon positive response. The blocking conditions are evaluated The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its requested direction (open or closed).
The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between: Select and execute. Select and until the reservation is granted. Execute and the final end position of the apparatus. Execute and valid close conditions from the synchrocheck.
At error the command sequence is canceled. In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time; an error signal will be given. The mid position of apparatuses can be
REG 670
389
suppressed at the (SCSWI) by setting the tIntermediate at (SXCBR/SXSWI) to an appropriate value. The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or SXSWI. The switch controller represents the content of the CSWI logical node (according to IEC 61850) with mandatory functionality.
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)
The Switch is a function used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions or to interrupt the circuit under fault or emergency conditions. The intention with this function is to represent the lowest level of a power-switching device with or without short circuit breaking capability, e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches etc. The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to the primary apparatus via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position. The Switch has this functionality: Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard Block/deblock for open/close command respectively Update block/deblock of position indication Substitution of position indication Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively
The realization of this function is performed with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker and with SXSWI representing a circuit switch i.e. a disconnector or an earthing switch. The SXCBR can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one three-phase switch. The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical nodes XCBR and XSWI with mandatory functionality.
Reservation function (QCRSV/RESIN)
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation. For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching devices, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches can be required from the same bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other bays, it is exchanged over the serial station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem that arises, even at a high speed of communication, is a space of time during which the information about the position of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking function uses this information for evaluation, which means that also the interlocking conditions will be uncertain.
390
REG 670
To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method the operation will temporarily be blocked for all switching devices in other bays, which switching states are used for evaluation of permission to operate. Actual position indications from these bays are then transferred over the serial bus for evaluation in the IED. After the evaluation the operation can be executed with high security. This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN. The application principle appears from figure 145. The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation request to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from another bay. The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from another bay or the acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a request from this bay. Also the information of valid transmission over the station bus must be received.
REx670 REx670
SCSWI RES_GRT RES_RQ
RESIN EXCH_IN EXCH_OUT ... From other SCSWI in the bay
QCRSV RES_RQ1 . . RES_RQ8 RES_GRT1 . . RES_GRT8 RES_DATA 2 To other SCSWI in the bay
...
RESIN EXCH_IN 3 EXCH_OUT
... Station bus
en05000117.vsd
Figure 145:
Application principles for reservation over the station bus
The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application example in figure 146. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra binary inputs and outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and RESIN.
REG 670
391
REx670
REx670
SCSWI RES_EXT SELECTED
Other SCSWI in the bay BI BO BI
OR
BO
+
en05000118.vsd
Figure 146:
Application principles for reservation with external wiring
The solution in figure 146 can also be realized over the station bus according to the application example in figure 147. The solutions in figure 146 and figure 147 do not have the same high security compared to the solution in figure 145, but have instead a higher availability. This because no acknowledgment is required.
REx670 REx670
IntlReceive
RESGRANT
SCSWI
RES_EXT SELECTED
. . .
. . .
IntlReceive
RESGRANT
Other SCWI in the bay
OR
SPGGIO
IN
... Station bus
en05000178.vsd
Figure 147:
Application principle for an alternative reservation solution
4.12.2.2
Interaction between modules

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical nodes or functions that are described here:
392
REG 670
The Switch controller, SCSWI, initializes all operations for one apparatus and performs the actual switching and is more or less the interface to the drive of one apparatus. It includes the position handling as well as the control of the position. The Circuit breaker, SXCBR, is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the apparatus control function. The Circuit switch, SXSWI, is the process interface to the disconnector or the earthing switch for the apparatus control function. The Bay Control, QCBAY, fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such as operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay. The Reservation, QCRSV, deals with the reservation function. The Residual overcurrent protection, EF4PTOC, trips the breaker in case of ZMQPIDS. The Protection trip conditioning, SMPPTRC, connects the "operate" outputs of one or more protection functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR. The Autoreclosing, SMBRREC, consists of the facilities to automatically close a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions. The logical node Interlocking, SCILO, provides the information to the switching controller SCSWI whether it is permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking conditions are evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO. The Synchronism-check, SESRSYN calculates and compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker with predefined switching conditions (synchrocheck). Also the case that one side is dead (energizing-check) is included. The logical node Generic Automatic Process Control, GAPC, is an automatic function that reduces the interaction between the operator and the system. With one command, the operator can start a sequence that will end with a connection of a process object (e.g. line) to one of the possible busbars.
The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in figure 148 below.
REG 670
393
ZMQPDIS (Distance)
SMPPTRC (Trip logic)
SECRSYN (Synchrocheck) Trip Synchrocheck OK
Start AR
QCBAY (Bay control)
Operator place selection Res. req. SCSWI (Switching control)
Open cmd Close cmd SXCBR (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV (Reservation)
Res. granted Res. req. Close CB
Enable open
(Autoreclosure)
Enable close
SMBRREC
Position I/O
SCILO (Interlocking)
Pos. from other bays
Interlocking function block (Not a LN)
Open rel. Close rel. Open rel. Close rel. Position
SCILO (Interlocking) Enable open Enable close
GAPC (Generic Automatic Process Control)
Res. granted Open/Close Open/Close SCSWI (Switching control)
Open cmd Close cmd SXSWI (Disconnector)
Position
I/O
en05000120.vsd
Figure 148:
Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical bay
4.12.2.3
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). Refer to the setting parameter tables.
394
REG 670

Bay control (QCBAY)
If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and remote are accepted without any priority.
Switch controller (SCSWI)
The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850. For normal control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches the control model is set to SBO Enh (select-before-operate) with enhanced security. When the operation shall be performed in one step, the model direct control with normal security is used. At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value by the control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated by a termination command. The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position indication, i.e. at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of the value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the position is in bad or intermediate state. tSelect is the maximum time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal is set to false and a cause-code is given over IEC 61850. The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchrocheck function to fulfil the close conditions. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is obtained in SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. If no synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the command termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of three one-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for trip or alarm.
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)
tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command execution. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset.
REG 670
395
During the tIntermediate time the position indication is allowed to be in an intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa. If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets when a new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the command output pulse remains active until the timer tClose(Open)Pulse has elapsed. tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. The default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI). tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. The default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI). The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when this cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure. When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually for each apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, i.e. the output for reservation request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of apparatus x.
Bay Reserve (QCRSV)
Reservation input (RESIN)
With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not yet installed in the SA system.
4.12.2.4
Setting parameters
Table 115:
Parameter AllPSTOValid
General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function

Range Priority No priority Step Default Priority Unit Description The priority of originators
Table 116:
Parameter ControlMode
Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function

Range Internal LR-switch External LRswitch Step Default Internal LR-switch Unit Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch
396
REG 670
Table 117:
Parameter CtlModel
Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function

Range Dir Norm SBO Enh (ABB) Dir Norm (ABB) SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default SBO Enh Unit Description Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Permission to operate depending on the position Max time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Max time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles
PosDependent
Always permitted
tSelect
0.001
30.000
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tSynchronizing
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tExecutionFB
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Table 118:
Parameter tStartMove
Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive
0.001 -
0.150 Not adaptive
s -
tOpenPulse tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.200 0.200
s s
REG 670
397
Table 119:
Parameter tStartMove
Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 3.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Switch Type
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive
0.001 -
15.000 Not adaptive
s -
tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch
0.001 0.001 -
0.200 0.200 Disconnector
s s -
Table 120:
Parameter tCancelRes
General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest1
Other bays res. Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest2
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest3
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest4
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest5
Only own bay res.
398
REG 670

Parameter ParamRequest6 Range Other bays res. Only own bay res. Step Default Only own bay res. Unit Description Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8
ParamRequest7
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest8
Only own bay res.
Table 121:
Parameter FutureUse
Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function

Range Bay in use Bay future use Step Default Bay in use Unit Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
4.12.3
Interlocking
The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is: To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons e.g. load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.
This document only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by switching devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock, because of device alarms, is not included in this document. Disconnectors and earthing switches have a limited switching capacity. Disconnectors may therefore only operate: With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small extension. The capacitive current is small (for example < 5A) and power transformers with inrush current are not allowed. To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit (for example < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not allowed.
Earthing switches are allowed to connect and disconnect earthing of isolated points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for example <
REG 670
399
40% of rated voltage) before earthing and some current (for example < 100A) after earthing of a line. Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked during a busbar transfer. The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not available. Therefore, a line earthing switch is usually not fully interlocked. The operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before closing the earthing switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for interlocking. Take care to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT secondary voltage, for example, because of a blown fuse. The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true indication is needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the switch may be in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic state may continue for some time, which in the case of disconnectors may be up to 10 seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and the state is again treated as unknown. In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be self-checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching state of a switching device cannot be determined operation is not permitted. For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an AND-function for all three phases in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will result in an unknown double indication state.
4.12.3.1
Configuration guidelines
The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear configuration can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and their interconnections. They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for delivery specific conditions (Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except in the following cases: QB9_EX2 and QB9_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B QA1_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO
when they are set to 0=FALSE.
4.12.3.2
Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)
400
REG 670
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 149. The module can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7
en04000478.vsd
Figure 149:
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE
The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE are described below.
Signals from bypass busbar

To derive the signals:
Signal BB7_D_OP VP_BB7_D EXDU_BPB All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid. No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE) except that of the own bay are needed:
Signal QB7OPTR VPQB7TR EXDU_BPB Q7 is open The switch status for QB7 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For bay n, these conditions are valid:
REG 670
401
QB7OPTR (bay 1) QB7OPTR (bay 2) . . . . . . QB7OPTR (bay n-1) VPQB7TR (bay 1) VPQB7TR (bay 2) . . . . . . VPQB7TR (bay n-1) EXDU_BPB (bay 1) EXDU_BPB (bay 2) . . . . . . EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
&
BB7_D_OP
&
VP_BB7_D
&
EXDU_BPB
en04000477.vsd
Figure 150:
Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n.
Signals from bus-coupler
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbarbusbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus section.
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C Section 1 Section 2 A2 B2 C
ABC_LINE
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC ABC_LINE
ABC_BC
en04000479.vsd
Figure 151:
Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

Signal BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7. No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. The switch status of BC_17 is valid. The switch status of BC_27 is valid. No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).
402
REG 670
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA7. No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA2 and WA7. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. The switch status of BC_17 is valid. The switch status of BC_27 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is open. The bus-section disconnector is closed. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:
REG 670
403
BC12CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (A1A2) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC12CLTR (sect.2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.2) BC17OPTR (sect.1) DCOPTR (A1A2) BC17OPTR (sect.2) BC17CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (A1A2) BC17CLTR (sect.2) VPBC17TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPBC17TR (sect.2) & >1 >1 & & >1
BC_12_CL
&
VP_BC_12
BC_17_OP
BC_17_CL
&
VP_BC_17
BC27OPTR (sect.1) DCOPTR (B1B2) BC27OPTR (sect.2) BC27CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC27CLTR (sect.2) VPBC27TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC27TR (sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) & >1 >1 &
BC_27_OP
BC_27_CL
&
VP_BC_27
&
EXDU_BC
en04000480.vsd
Figure 152:
Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each section
For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.
Configuration setting
If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB7 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB7 is not used. The states for QB7, QC71, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:
404
REG 670
QB7_OP = 1 QB7_CL = 0 QC71_OP = 1 QC71_CL = 0 BB7_D_OP = 1 BC_17_OP = 1 BC_17_CL = 0 BC_27_OP = 1 BC_27_CL = 0 EXDU_BPB = 1 VP_BB7_D = 1 VP_BC_17 = 1 VP_BC_27 = 1
If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12, BC_27 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0 BC_12_CL = 0 BC_27_OP = 1 BC_27_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1
4.12.3.3
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)

The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 153. The module can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
REG 670
405
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7
QC2
en04000514.vsd
Figure 153:
Switchyard layout ABC_BC
Configuration
The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are described below.
Signals from all feeders

Signal BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler. The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer. No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:
Signal QQB12OPTR VPQB12TR EXDU_12 QB1 or QB2 or both are open. The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:
406
REG 670
QB12OPTR (bay 1) QB12OPTR (bay 2) . . . . . . QB12OPTR (bay n-1) VPQB12TR (bay 1) VPQB12TR (bay 2) . . . . . . VPQB12TR (bay n-1) EXDU_12 (bay 1) EXDU_12 (bay 2) . . . . . . EXDU_12 (bay n-1)
&
BBTR_OP
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
en04000481.vsd
Figure 154:
Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:
ABC_LINE
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000482.vsd
Figure 155:
The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCOPTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is open. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), have to be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
REG 670
407

Signal S1S2OPTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1) DCOPTR (A1A2) DCOPTR (B1B2) BBTR_OP (sect.2) VP_BBTR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VP_BBTR (sect.2) EXDU_12 (sect.1) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_12 (sect.2) >1 & BBTR_OP
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
en04000483.vsd
Figure 156:
Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BC_12 from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.
ABC_BC
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC
en04000484.vsd
Figure 157:

Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).
408
REG 670
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay are needed:
Signal BC12CLTR VPBC12TR EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCCLTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is closed. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.
For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

DCCLTR (A1A2) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC12CLTR (sect.2) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.2) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) & BC_12_CL
&
VP_BC_12
&
EXDU_BC
en04000485.vsd
Figure 158:
Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in an other section
REG 670
409
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa. If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB2 and QB7 disconnectors, then the interlocking for QB2 and QB7 is not used. The states for QB2, QB7, QC71 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QB7_OP = 1 QB7_CL = 0 QC71_OP = 1 QC71_CL = 0
If there is no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 and QB20 disconnectors, then the interlocking for QB2 and QB20 are not used. The states for QB2, QB20, QC21, BC_12, BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QB20_OP = 1 QB20_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0 BC_12_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1 BBTR_OP = 1 VP_BBTR = 1
4.12.3.4
Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)

The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 159. The module is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
410
REG 670
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2
T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4

QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking
en04000515.vsd
Figure 159:
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described below.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbarbusbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus-section.
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC

en04000487.vsd
Figure 160:
The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).
REG 670
411
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration Signals from bus-coupler .
If there is no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2QB2_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0 BC_12_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1
If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no QB4 disconnector, then the state for QB4 is set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows: QB4_OP = 1 QB4_CL = 0
4.12.3.5
Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) Signals from all feeders

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both circuit breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other bus-section side a busbar transfer is in progress:
ABC_LINE
A1A2_BS ABC_BC B1B2_BS AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000489.vsd
Figure 161:
Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers
412
REG 670

Signal BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section. The switch status of BBTR is valid. No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal QB12OPTR VPQB12TR EXDU_12 QB1 or QB2 or both are open. The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal BC12OPTR VPBC12TR EXDU_BC No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are needed.
Signal S1S2OPTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions are valid:
REG 670
413
S1S2OPTR (B1B2) BC12OPTR (sect.1) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2) S1S2OPTR (B1B2) BC12OPTR (sect.2) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1) VPS1S2TR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) VPBC12TR (sect.2) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) EXDU_BS (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000490.vsd
>1 & & BBTR_OP
>1 &
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
Figure 162:
Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections A1 and A2
For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions are valid:
414
REG 670
S1S2OPTR (A1A2) BC12OPTR (sect.1) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2) S1S2OPTR (A1A2) BC12OPTR (sect.2) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1) VPS1S2TR (A1A2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) VPBC12TR (sect.2) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) EXDU_BS (A1A2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000491.vsd
>1 & & BBTR_OP
>1 &
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
Figure 163:
Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections B1 and B2
If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the interlocking for the QA1 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section: BBTR_OP = 1 VP_BBTR = 1
4.12.3.6
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)
REG 670
415
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 164. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
en04000492.vsd
Figure 164:
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.
Signals in single breaker arrangement
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C Section 1 Section 2 A2 B2 A3 B3 C
ABC_LINE
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000493.vsd
Figure 165:

Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 are valid. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 are valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
416
REG 670

Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR QB220OTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VQB220TR EXDU_BB QB1 is open. QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE). QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC). The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. The switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bussection disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_BS QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the above information.
For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
REG 670
417
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000494.vsd
Figure 166:
Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2) DCOPTR (A2/A3) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2) VPDCTR (A2/A3) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2) EXDU_DC (A2/A3) & S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000495.vsd
Figure 167:
Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector
For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:
418
REG 670
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1) VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000496.vsd
Figure 168:
Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B2) DCOPTR (B2/B3) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2) VPDCTR (B2/B3) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DC (B2/B3) & S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000497.vsd
Figure 169:
Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
Signals in double-breaker arrangement
REG 670
419
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000498.vsd
Figure 170:

Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 are valid. The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 are valid. No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above information.
These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_DB QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration Signals in single breaker arrangement. For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
420
REG 670
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1)
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000499.vsd
Figure 171:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2) & S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000500.vsd
Figure 172:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector
REG 670
421
QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B1) VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1)
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000501.vsd
Figure 173:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B2) VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2) & S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000502.vsd
Figure 174:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement
422
REG 670
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000503.vsd
Figure 175:
The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double-breaker configuration.
Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 are valid. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 are valid. No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above information.
4.12.3.7
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)

The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 176.
QC
en04000504.vsd
Figure 176:
Switchyard layout BB_ES
The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.
Signals in single breaker arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bussection are open.
REG 670
423
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C
Section 1
Section 2
BB_ES ABC_LINE
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC BB_ES AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
A2 B2 C
en04000505.vsd
Figure 177:

Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar are valid. No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR QB220OTR QB7OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR EXDU_BB QB1 is open. QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE) QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC) QB7 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. The switch status of QB2and QB20 are valid. The switch status of QB7 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
If no bus-section disconnector exists the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC are set to 1 (TRUE).
424
REG 670
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_BS QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the above information.
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1) DCOPTR (A1/A2) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1) VPDCTR (A1/A2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1) EXDU_DC (A1/A2) & BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000506.vsd
Figure 178:
Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:
REG 670
425
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2) DCOPTR (A1/A2) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2) VPDCTR (A1/A2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2) EXDU_DC (A1/A2)
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000507.vsd
Figure 179:
Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:
QB2OPTR(QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1) DCOPTR (B1/B2) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) . . .(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B1) VPDCTR (B1/B2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_DC (B1/B2) & BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000508.vsd
Figure 180:
Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:
426
REG 670
QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay n/sect.B2) DCOPTR (B1/B2) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2) VPDCTR (B1/B2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000509.vsd
Figure 181:
Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:
QB7OPTR (bay 1) ... ... ... QB7OPTR (bay n) VPQB7TR (bay 1) ... ... ... VPQB7TR (bay n) EXDU_BB (bay 1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n) & BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000510.vsd
Figure 182:
Signals from bypass busbar to busbar earthing switch
Signals in double-breaker arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus section are open.
REG 670
427
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
BB_ES DB_BUS
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) DB_BUS
BB_ES
en04000511.vsd
Figure 183:

Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_DB QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section Signals in single breaker arrangement.
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bussection are open.
428
REG 670
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
BB_ES
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) BH_LINE BH_LINE
BB_ES
en04000512.vsd
Figure 184:
The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar configuration described in section Signals in single breaker arrangement.
Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
4.12.3.8
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)

The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 185.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4
DB_LINE
en04000518.vsd
Figure 185:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 429
to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars. For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B must be used.
For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB9_OP = 1 QB9_CL = 0 QC9_OP = 1 QC9_CL = 0
If, in this case, a line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state, specify the state of the voltage supervision: QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF QB9_CL = VOLT_ON
If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows: VOLT_OFF = 1 VOLT_ON = 0
4.12.3.9
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)

The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 186.
430
REG 670
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1
QB61
QA1
QB62
QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2
QB9 QC9
BH_CONN en04000513.vsd
Figure 186:
Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout. For a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B must be used.
For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB9_OP = 1 QB9_CL = 0 QC9_OP = 1 QC9_CL = 0
If, in this case, a line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:
REG 670
431
QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF QB9_CL = VOLT_ON
If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows: VOLT_OFF = 1 VOLT_ON = 0
4.12.3.10
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

Table 122:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function

4.12.4
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SLGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.12.4.1
Application
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used within the CAP configuration tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems. The SLGGIO function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO). The normal way a selector switch is connected would be in accordance with fig.: This is a minimal configuration, allowing for selector switch operation both from the LHMI and from external sources (switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the station computer). The POS_NUM is an integer value output, giving the actual output number. In this particular example, this is a selector switch with 10 positions. Since the number of positions of the switch can be established by settings (see below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings
432
REG 670
with the configuration (if one sets the number of positions to x in settings for example, there will be only the first x outputs available from the block in the configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or DOWN) pulses should be lower than the setting tPulse. From the LHMI, there are two modes of operating the switch: from the menu and from the SLD. An example of these two types of operation is given in this document:
4.12.4.2
Setting guidelines
The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function: Operation: Sets the operation of the function On or Off; noOfPositions: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32)- this setting influence the behaviour of the switch when changes from the last to the first position; outputType: Steady or Pulsed; operatePulseLenght: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds); timeDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation; stopAtExtreme: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions if set to 0, when pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last position; when pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first position; when set to 1, no jump will be allowed;
4.12.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 123:
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes
Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function

Range Off On 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Off 2 - 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Disabled Unit s s Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached
REG 670
433
Section 4 IED application 4.12.5 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VSGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.12.5.1
Application
The VS function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. This function can be used for both acquiring an external switch position (through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line diagram symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching commands through the CMD_POS12 and CMD_POS21 outputs. The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position (POS1, POS2, INTERMEDIATE or BAD STATE) through an integer number (03). An example where the VS switch is configured to switch auto reclose onoff from a button symbol on the HMI is shown in figure 187. The I and OClose and Open buttons on LHMI are used for onoff operations.
VS01(180,100) VSGGIO INTONE PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 NAM_POS1 NAM_POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 ON OFF I140 OUT INV INPUT
OFF ON
AR01(2401,8) SMBRREC_79 SETON
en07000112.vsd
Figure 187:
Control of auto reclose from LHMI through versatile switch
The switch is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from SA system as well. An output can not be used to process the function.
434
REG 670

The VS function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by setting the Mode parameter one can change this). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel): Direct (called DirNorm) and Select-Before-Execute (called SBOEnh).
4.12.5.3
Setting parameters
Table 124:
Parameter Operation CtlModel
Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function

Range Off On Dir Norm SBO Enh Step Default Off Dir Norm Unit Description Operation Off / On Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght
Mode tSelect
Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000
0.001
Pulsed 30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
4.12.6
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: DPGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.12.6.1
Application
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical outputs to other systems or equipment in the substation. The three outputs are named OPEN, CLOSE and VALID, since this function block is intended to be used as a position indicator block in interlocking and reservation station-wide logics. For additional information see also "".
REG 670
435

There are no settings available for the user for DPGGIO. However, to get the signals sent by DPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter "Engineering of the IED".
4.12.6.3
Setting parameters
4.12.7
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Function block name: SCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.12.7.1
Application
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks, see figure 188.
SC01SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 en07000143.vsd
Figure 188:
SC function block
4.12.7.2
Setting guidelines
The SC function block has the setting Operation, turning the function operation On/ Off. There are two settings for every command output (totally 8): Latchedx: deciding if the command signal for output x is latched (steady) or pulsed.
436
REG 670
tPulsex: if the previous setting was set on pulsed, then timePulsex will set the length of the pulse (in seconds).
4.12.7.3
Setting parameters
Table 125:
Parameter Operation Latched1
Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function

Range Off On Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Step Default Off Pulsed Unit Description Operation Off/On Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 1 Output1 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 2 Output2 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 3 Output3 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 4 Output4 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 5 Output5 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 6 Output6 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 7 Output7 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 8 Output8 pulse time
tPulse1 Latched2
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse2 Latched3
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse3 Latched4
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse4 Latched5
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse5 Latched6
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse6 Latched7
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse7 Latched8
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse8
0.01
0.10
4.13
4.13.1
REG 670
Logic
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)
Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 437
Function block name: TRPxANSI number: 94 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMPPTRC
I->O
4.13.1.1
Application
All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip logic. In its simplest alternative the logic will only link the trip signal and make sure that it is long enough. The tripping logic in IED 670 protection, control and monitoring IEDs offers three different operating modes: Three-phase tripping for all fault types (3ph operating mode) Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multiphase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request threephase tripping. Two phase phase for two phase faults.
The three phase trip for all faults offers a simple solution and is often sufficient in well meshed transmission systems and in sub-transmission systems. Since most faults, especially at the highest voltage levels, are single phase to earth faults, single phase tripping can be of great value. If only the faulty phase is tripped, power can still be transferred on the line during the dead time that arises before reclosing. Single phase tripping during single phase faults must be combined with single pole reclosing. To meet the different double, one- and a half and other multiple circuit breaker arrangements, two identical TR function blocks may be provided within the IED. One TR function block should be used for each breaker, if the line is connected to the substation via more than one breaker. Assume that single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used on the line. Both breakers are then normally set up for 1/3 phase tripping and 1/3 phase auto-reclosing. As an alternative the breaker chosen as master can have single pole tripping, while the slave breaker could have three pole tripping and auto-reclosing. In the case of a permanent fault, only one of the breakers has to be operated when the fault is energized a second time. In the event of a transient fault the slave breaker performs a three pole reclosing onto the non-faulted line. The same philosophy can be used for two-pole tripping and auto-reclosing. To prevent closing of a circuit breaker after a trip the function can block the closing. The two instances of the TR function are identical except for the name of the function
438
REG 670
block (TRP1 and TRP2). References will therefore only be made to TRP1 in the following description, but they also apply to TRP2. The trip function logic is illustrated below in figure 189.
TRP1 TRIP LOGIC BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT en05000543.vsd TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
Figure 189:
The trip logic function block.
Three phasepole tripping A simple application with three phase tripping from the logic block utilizes a part of the function block. Connect the inputs from the protection function blocks to the input TRIN. If necessary (normally the case) use a logic OR block to combine the different function outputs to this input. Connect the output TRIP to the digital Output/s on the IO board. This signal can also be used for other purposes internally in the IED. An example could be the starting of Breaker failure protection. The three outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 will always be activated at every trip and can be utilized on individual trip outputs if single pole operating devices are available on the circuit breaker even when a Three phase tripping scheme is selected. Set the function block to Program=3Ph and set the required length of the trip pulse to e.g. tTripMin=150ms. For special applications such as Lock-out refer to the separate section below. The typical connection is shown below in figure 190. Signals that are not used are dimmed.
REG 670
439
TRP1SMPPTRC_94 BLOCK ZM1 TRIP ZM2 TRIP ZM3 TRIP DEF TRIP BLKLKOUT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT
en05000544.vsd
Figure 190:
The trip logic function TR is used for a simple three phase tripping application.
Single and/or three phasepole tripping The Single/Three phase tripping will give single phase tripping for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multi-phase fault. The operating mode is always used together with a single phase Auto-Reclosing scheme. The single phase tripping can include different options and the use of the different inputs in the function block. The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF are used for single phase tripping for Distance protection and Directional Earth fault protection function as required. The inputs are combined with the phase selection logic and the start signals from the phase selector must be connected to the inputs PSL1, PSL2 and PSL3 to achieve the tripping on the respective single phase trip outputs TRL1, TRL2 and TRL3. The Output TRIP is a General Trip and activated independent of which phase is involved. Depending on which phases are involved the outputs TR1P,TR2P and TR3P will be activated as well. When single phase tripping schemes are used a single phase Auto Reclosing attempt is expected to follow. For cases where the Auto-Reclosing is not in service or will not follow for some reason, the input Prepare Three phase Trip P3PTR must be activated. This is normally connected to the respective output on the Auto-Recloser but can also be connected to other signals, e.g. an external logic signal.If two breakers are involved, one TR block instance and one Auto-Recloser instance is used for each breaker. This will ensure correct operation and behavior of each breaker.
440
REG 670
The output Trip 3 Phase TR3P must be connected to the respective input in the AutoRecloser to switch the Auto-Recloser to three phase Reclosing. If this signal is not activated the Auto-Recloser will use single-phase Reclosing dead time. Note also that if a second Line protection is utilizing the same Auto-Recloser the 3 phase Trip signal must be generated e.g. by using the three trip relays contacts in series and connecting them in parallel to the TR3P output from the trip block. The Trip Logic also has inputs TRINL1, TRINL2 and TRINL3 where phase selected trip signals can be connected. Examples can be individual phase inter-trips from remote end or internal/external phase selected trip signals which are routed through the IED to achieve e.g. Auto-Reclose, Breaker failure etc.Other back-up functions are connected to the input TRIN as described above. A typical connection for a single phase tripping scheme is shown below in figure 191.
ZM2 TRIP ZM3 TRIP DEF TRIP TRP1-
1
BLOCK BLKLKOUT
SMPPTRC_94 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
ZM01 Distance Function GFC or PSL Phase Selection PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 TR3P AR01 Auto-Recloser PREP3P TRIP
TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT
TR3P
RSTLKOUT
en05000545.vsd
Figure 191:
The trip logic function TR used for Single phase tripping application.
Single-, two or three phasepole tripping The Single/Two/Three phase tripping mode provides single phase tripping for single phase faults, two phase phase tripping for two phase faults and three phase tripping for multi-phase faults. The operating mode is always used together with an AutoReclosing scheme with setting Program=1/2/3Ph or Program=1/3Ph attempt. The functionality is very similar to the single phase scheme described above. However the Auto-Reclose must in addition to the connections for single phase above be informed that the trip is two phase by connecting the Trip Logic output TR2P to the respective input in the Auto-Recloser.
REG 670
441

Lock-out This function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lock-out. The lock-out can be set to only activate the block closing output CLLKOUT or initiate the block closing output and also maintain the trip signal (latched trip). The Lock-out can then be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the input reset Lock-Out RSTLKOUT. If external conditions are required to initiate Lock-out but not initiate trip this can be achieved by activating input SETLKOUT. The setting Auto-Lock = OFF will mean that the internal trip is not activating lock-out so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in lock-out. This is normally the case for overhead line protection where most faults are transient. Unsuccessful auto-reclose and back-up zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate Lock-out by activating the input. Blocking of the function block The function block can be blocked in two different ways. Its use is dependent on the application. Blocking can be initiated internally by logic, or by the operator using a communication channel. Total blockage of the trip function is done by activating the input BLOCK and can be used to block the output of the trip logic in the event of internal failures. Blockage of lock-out output by activating input BLKLKOUT can be used for operator control of the lock-out function.
4.13.1.2
Setting guidelines
The paramters for tripping logic are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following trip parameters can be set to regulate tripping. Operation: On or Off Sets the mode of operation. Off switches the tripping off. The normal selection is: Operation=On Program: 3Ph,1/3Ph,1/2/3Ph Set the required tripping scheme. Normally 3Ph or 1/2Ph are used. TripLockout: On or Off Set the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates lock-out output. On activates the lockout output and latching output contacts. The normal selection is: TripLockout=Off. AutoLock: On or Off Setting the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates lock-out through the input SETLOCKOUT. On also allows activation from trip function itself. The normal selection is: AutoLock=Off.
442
REG 670
tTripMin Set the required minimum duration of the trip pulse. It should be set to ensure that the breaker is tripped and if a signal is used to start the breaker failure protection (BFP) function longer than the back-up trip timer in the BFP. Normal setting is: tTripMin=0.150s
4.13.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 126:
Parameter Operation Program
Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On 3 phase 1ph/3ph 1Ph/2Ph/3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default On 1ph/3ph Unit Description Operation Off / On Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or three ph trip Minimum duration of trip output signal
tTripMin
0.001
0.150
Table 127:
Parameter TripLockout
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch, Off: only outp On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, Off: only inp
AutoLock
Off
4.13.2
Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: TRMGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.2.1
Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals to the different output relays. The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
REG 670
443

The parameters for the instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600l).
4.13.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 128:
Parameter Operation PulseTime OnDelay OffDelay ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutput3
Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function

Range Off ON 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default ON 0.000 0.000 0.000 Steady Steady Steady Unit s s s Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time Output on delay time Output off delay time Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
4.13.3
4.13.3.1
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Application
A high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.
4.13.3.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates. For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set from the CAP configuration tool. Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Pulse length settings are independent of one another for all pulse circuits. For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting parameters are accessible via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). Configuration Logic is configured using the CAP configuration tool.
444
REG 670
Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a fixed sequence with different cycle times. For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is shown when using the CAP configuration tool with the designation of the function block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044 is the serial execution number and 6 is the cycle time. The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or more logical function blocks in series. Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle time to function blocks with a slow cycle time. Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, for example, race between functions.
4.13.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 129:
Parameter T
General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay of function
Table 130:
Parameter T
General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit s Description Time delay of function
Table 131:
Parameter Memory
Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of the memory function
Table 132:
Parameter Operation
Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

REG 670
445
Table 133:
Parameter Operation t
Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Unit s Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n
4.13.4
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXDANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: FixedSignals IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.4.1
Application
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
4.13.4.2
Setting parameters
4.13.5
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.5.1
Application
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection). The B16I does not have a logical node mapping.
446
REG 670

4.13.6
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Function block name: BA-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: B16IGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.6.1
Application
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. The B16IGGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the IEC61850.
4.13.6.2
Setting parameters
4.13.7
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.7.1
Application
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection). The IB16 does not have a logical node mapping.
REG 670
447

4.13.8
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Function block name: IX-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IB16GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.13.8.1
Application
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. The IB16GGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the IEC61850.
4.13.8.2
Setting parameters
4.14
4.14.1
Monitoring
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU
P, Q, S, I, U, f
448
REG 670
Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU
Function block name: VNx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VNMMXU
Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU
Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI
I1, I2, I0
Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI
U1, U2, U0
REG 670
449

Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency
The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU) provides physical quantities: I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU) U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU, VNMMXU)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage. 450 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
4.14.1.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The parameters for the Measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). Operation: Off/On. Every function instance (SVRx, CPxx, VNxx, VP0x, CSQxx, VSQx) can be taken in operation (On) or out of operation (Off). Default setting is Off. The following general settings can be set for the Service Value functions (SVR). PowAmpFact: Amplitude factor to scale power calculations. The setting range is 0.000-6.000. Default setting is 1.000, which also is a typical setting. PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U. The setting range is 180 degrees. Default setting is 0 degree, which also is a typical setting. Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table. Default setting expects complete VT information (L1,L2,L3). k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I. The setting range is 0.0-1.0. Default setting is 0.0 i.e. no filtering, which also is a typical setting. UGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of UBase used as indication of zero voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%.
REG 670
451
IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of Ibase used as indication of zero current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%. UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object. The setting range is 0.05-2000 kV. Default setting is 400 kV. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised object. The setting range is 1-99999 A. Default setting is 3000 A. UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0. IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0. IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0. The following general settings can be set for the phase current monitoring functions (CP). IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0. IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0. The following general settings can be set for the phase-phase voltage monitoring functions (VP). UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0. UAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0. The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the functions (SVR, CP, VN, VP, CSQ and VSQ). Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X (X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0)) set directly in applicable measuring unit. Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X. XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero. The setting range is 0-100000 in steps of 0.001% related to measuring range. Default setting is 0. Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for SVR (UGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb and/ 452 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
or IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override XZeroDb. XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), amplitude deadband (Dead band) or integral deadband (Int deadband). The reporting interval is controlled by the parameter XDbRepInt. Default setting is Cyclic. XDbRepInt: Reporting deadband setting. Cyclic reporting is the setting value and is reporting interval in seconds. Amplitude deadband is the setting value in % of measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, i.e. measured value in % of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured values. Default setting is 10. XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set in applicable measuring unit. The setting range is 10000000000 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 900106 (i.e 900 MW/MVar/ MVA). XHiLim: High limit. Default setting is 800106 (i.e 800 MW/MVar/MVA). XLowLim: Low limit. Default setting is -800106. XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Default setting is -900106. XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits. The setting range is 0-100 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 5%. All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs". Calibration curves It is possible to calibrate the functions (SVR, CP, VN and VP) to get class 0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is accomplished by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation curve will have the characteristic for amplitude and angle compensation of currents as shown in figure 192 (example). The first phase will be used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors. The factors will then be used for all related channels.
REG 670
453
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10
Amplitude compensation
Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of Ir
Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10
Angle compensation
Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir
en05000652.vsd
Figure 192:
Calibration curves
Setting examples

Three setting examples, in connection to service values (SVR), are provided: SVR measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL SVR measurement function application on the secondary side of a transformer SVR measurement function application for a generator
For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values will be provided. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL Single line diagram for this application is given in the figure 193:
454
REG 670
400kV Busbar
800/1 A
400 0,1 / kV 3 3
Q
en05000374.vsd
400kV OHL
Figure 193:
SLD for 400 kV OHL application
In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure it is necessary to do the following: 1. 2. 3. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using the Parameter Setting Tool (a part of PCM 600) for analog input channels Connect in Application Configuration Tool ( a part of PCM 600) measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs Set under General settings parameters for the Service Value Report function:
Table 134:
general settings as shown in table 134. level supervision of active power as shown in table 135. calibration parameters as shown in table 136.
General settings parameters for the Service Value Report function
Selected value On 1.000 Comments Function must be "On" It can be used during commissioning to achieve higher measurement accuracy. Typically no scaling is required It can be used during commissioning to achieve higher measurement accuracy. Typically no angle compensation is required. As well here required direction of P & Q measurement is towards protected object (i.e. as per IED internal default direction) All three phase to ground VT inputs are available Typically no additional filtering is required
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char) Operation PowAmpFact Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations
PowAngComp
Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U
0.0
Mode k
Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I
L1, L2, L3 0.00
REG 670
455

CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char) UGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Selected value 25 Comments Set minimum voltage level to 25%. Voltage below 25% will force S, P and Q to zero. Set minimum current level to 3%. Current below 3% will force S, P and Q to zero. Set rated OHL phase-to-phase voltage Set rated primary CT current used for OHL
IGenZeroDb
Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
UBase IBase
Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A
400.00 800
Table 135:
Settings parameters for level supervision

Selected value -750 750 3000 db 2 Comments Minimum expected load Maximum expected load Set zero point clamping to 45 MW i.e. 3% of 1500 MW Select amplitude deadband supervision Set db=30 MW i.e. 2% (larger changes than 30 MW will be reported) High alarm limit i.e. extreme overload alarm High warning limit i.e. overload warning Low warning limit. Not active Low alarm limit. Not active Set Hysteres=30 MW i.e. 2%
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char) PMin PMax PZeroDb PRepTyp PDbRepInt Minimum value Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range Reporting type Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
PHiHiLim PHiLim PLowLim PLowLowlLim PLimHyst
600 500 -800 -800 2
Table 136:
Settings for calibration parameters

Selected value 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Comments
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char) IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur
456
REG 670

CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char) UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle pre-calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle pre-calibration for current at 100% of Ir Selected value 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Comments
Measurement function application for a power transformer Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 194.
110kV Busbar
200/1
31,5 MVA 110/36,75/(10,5) kV Yy0(d5)
P 500/5
UL1L2
35 / 0,1kV
35kV Busbar
Figure 194: SLD for transformer application
en05000375.vsd
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it is necessary to do the following:
REG 670
457
1. 2. 3.
Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") data using the Parameter Setting Tool for analog input channels Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following table:
Selected value On 1.000 180.0 Comment Function must be "On" Typically no scaling is required Typically no angle compensation is required. However here the required direction of P & Q measurement is towards busbar (i.e. Not per IED internal default direction). Therefore angle compensation have to be used in order to get measurements in aliment with the required direction. Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage is available Typically no additional filtering is required Set minimum voltage level to 25% Set minimum current level to 3% Set LV side rated phase-to-phase voltage Set transformer LV winding rated current
CAP & PST name Short description (60 char) Operation PowAmpFact PowAngComp Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U
Mode k UGenZeroDb IGenZeroDb UBase IBase
Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A
L1L2 0.00 25 3 35.00 495
Measurement function application for a generator Single line diagram fro this application is given in figure 195.
458
REG 670
220kV Busbar
300/1
100 MVA 242/15,65 kV Yd5
15 / 0,1kV
UL1L2 , UL2L3
P 100MVA 15,65kV 4000/5
en05000376.vsd
Figure 195:
SLD for generator application
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it is necessary to do the following: 1. 2. 3. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using the Parameter Setting Tool for analog input channels Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following table:
Selected value On 1.000 0.0 Comment Function must be On" Typically no scaling is required Typically no angle compensation is required. As well here required direction of P & Q measurement is towards protected object (i.e. as per IED internal default direction)
CAP & PST name Short description (60 char) Operation PowAmpFact PowAngComp Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U
REG 670
459

CAP & PST name Short description (60 char) Mode Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A Selected value Arone Comment Generator VTs are connected between phases (i.e. Vconnected) Typically no additional filtering is required Set minimum voltage level to 25% Set minimum current level to 3% Set generator rated phase-tophase voltage Set generator rated current
k UGenZeroDb IGenZeroDb UBase IBase
0.00 25% 3 15,65 3690
4.14.1.3
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 137:
Parameter SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp
Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Off On 1 - 99999 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 1000000000.000 Cyclic Unit VA VA VA VA Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
PMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
Minimum value
PMax
0.001
1000000000.000
Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Minimum value
Operation IBase
Off 3000
Operation Off / On Base setting for current level in A
460
REG 670

Parameter QMax Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 0.000 - 6.000 Step 0.001 Default 1000000000.000 Unit VAr Description Maximum value
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UBase Mode
0.05 -
400.00 L1, L2, L3
kV -
Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured current and voltage
PowAmpFact
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I &U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp
-1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
0.001 0.001 -
-1.000 1.000 Cyclic
UMin
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UMax
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IMax
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
REG 670
461

Parameter FrMin Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Hz Description Minimum value
FrMax
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 138:
Parameter SDbRepInt
Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SZeroDb SHiHiLim SHiLim SLimHyst
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900000000.000 800000000.000 5.000
m% VA VA %
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PZeroDb PHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900000000.000
m% W
PHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
PLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
PLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
PLimHyst
0.001
5.000
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
462
REG 670

Parameter QHiHiLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 900000000.000 Unit VAr Description High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in % of Ubase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of Ibase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)
QHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
VAr
QLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
QLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
QLimHyst
0.001
5.000
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PFZeroDb UGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFLimHyst
0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 5 3.000 5 2.000 -2.000 -3.000 5.000
m% % % %
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UZeroDb UHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
m% V
UHiLim
0.001
450000.000
ULowLim
0.001
380000.000
ULowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
REG 670
463

Parameter ULimHyst Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IZeroDb IHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
m% A
IHiLim
0.001
800.000
ILowLim
0.001
-800.000
ILowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
ILimHyst
0.001
5.000
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 65.000
m% Hz
FrHiLim
0.001
63.000
Hz
FrLowLim
0.001
47.000
Hz
FrLowLowLim
0.001
45.000
Hz
FrLimHyst
0.001
5.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
464
REG 670

Parameter IAmpComp5 Range -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit % Description Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Deg Deg Deg
Table 139:
Parameter IL1DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for current level in A Maximum value Reporting type
Operation IBase IL1Max IL1RepTyp
Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
1 0.001 -
Off 3000 1000.000 Cyclic
A A -
IL1AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IL2Max IL2RepTyp
0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
0.001 -
1000.000 Cyclic
A -
IL2AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
REG 670
465

Parameter IL3Max IL3RepTyp Range 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Step 0.001 Default 1000.000 Cyclic Unit A Description Maximum value Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 140:
Parameter IL1ZeroDb IL1HiHiLim IL1HiLim IAmpComp5
Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 Unit m% A A % Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Minimum value Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLim IL1LowLowLim IAmpComp100
0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
A A %
IAngComp5 IL1Min IAngComp30 IAngComp100 IL1LimHys
-10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 - 100.000
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000
Deg A Deg Deg %
IL2ZeroDb IL2HiHiLim IL2HiLim IL2LowLim
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900.000 800.000 0.000
m% A A A
466
REG 670

Parameter IL2LowLowLim IL2Min IL2LimHys Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 5.000 Unit A A % Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim IL3HiLim IL3LowLim IL3LowLowLim IL3Min IL3LimHys
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000
m% A A A A A %
Table 141:
Parameter UL12DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% kV V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Base setting for voltage level in kV High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Low limit (physical value)
Operation UL12ZeroDb UBase UL12HiHiLim
Off On 0 - 100000 0.05 - 2000.00 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000
1 0.05 0.001
On 0 400.00 460000.000
UL12HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UAmpComp5
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
REG 670
467

Parameter UL12LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 350000.000 Unit V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Minimum value
UAmpComp100
0.001
0.000
UL12Min
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
0.001
0.000
UL12Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
Cyclic
UL23DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL23HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL23LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL23LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL23Min
0.001
0.000
UL23Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
468
REG 670

Parameter UL23AnDbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic
UL31DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL31HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL31LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL31LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL31Min
0.001
0.000
UL31Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.001
5.000
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
Cyclic
REG 670
469
Table 142:
Parameter 3I0DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% A Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 900.000
3I0HiLim
0.001
800.000
3I0LowLim
0.001
-800.000
3I0LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
3I0Min
0.001
0.000
3I0Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
Operation 3I0AngRepTyp
Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
Off Cyclic
I1DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
I1HiLim
0.001
800.000
I1LowLim
0.001
-800.000
470
REG 670

Parameter I1LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -900.000 Unit A Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
I1Min
0.001
0.000
I1Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1LimHys
0.001
5.000
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
I2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
1 0.001
0 900.000
I2HiLim
0.001
800.000
I2LowLim
0.001
-800.000
I2LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
I2Min
0.001
0.000
I2Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
REG 670
471

Parameter I2LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Table 143:
Parameter 3U0DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
3U0HiLim
0.001
450000.000
3U0LowLim
0.001
380000.000
3U0LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
3U0Min
0.001
0.000
3U0Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type
3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
Operation 3U0AngRepTyp
Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
Off Cyclic
472
REG 670

Parameter U1DbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U1HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U1LowLim
0.001
380000.000
U1LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
U1Min
0.001
0.000
U1Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.001
5.000
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
U2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)
U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U2HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U2LowLim
0.001
380000.000
U2LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
REG 670
473

Parameter U2Min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit V Description Minimum value
U2Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.001
5.000
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
4.14.2
Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CNTGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.14.2.1
Application
This function has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter has been activated. All six counters have a common blocking function used, for example, when testing. All sex counters has a common reset and a common function.
4.14.2.2
Setting parameters
4.14.3
Event function (EV)

Function block name: EVxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: Event IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
474
REG 670

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
4.14.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the event function are set from the PST parameter setting tool, part of PCM 600. EventMaskCh_1 - 16 The inputs can be set individually as: NoEvents OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect
LONChannelMask/SPAChannelMask Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
MinInterval_1 - 16 A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel. This can be set between 0.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. It should normally be set to 0, i.e. no cyclic communication. MaxEvPerSec Three times this setting value gives the maximum burst quota per input channel. A reasonable value as default should be 10 events/s which gives 30 events/s as a maximum sustained event rate per channel. It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized way to minimize the load on the station bus.
REG 670
475

Table 144:
Parameter SPAChannelMask
Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Range Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default Off Unit Description SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2
AutoDetect
EventMask3
AutoDetect
EventMask4
AutoDetect
EventMask5
AutoDetect
EventMask6
AutoDetect
EventMask7
AutoDetect
EventMask8
AutoDetect
476
REG 670

Parameter EventMask9 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 9
EventMask10
AutoDetect
EventMask11
AutoDetect
EventMask12
AutoDetect
EventMask13
AutoDetect
EventMask14
AutoDetect
EventMask15
AutoDetect
EventMask16
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5 MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
s s s s s s s
Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5 Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7
REG 670
477

Parameter MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16 Range 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Unit s s s s s s s s s Description Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16
4.14.4
Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: RANGE_XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.14.4.1
Application
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.
4.14.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.
4.14.5
Disturbance report (RDRE)
478
REG 670
Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ABRDRE
4.14.5.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/ or in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents, voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the Disturbance Report function and facilitate a better understanding of the power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of relay setting plan, improve existing equipment etc. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations, i.e. a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA). The Disturbance Report (DRP), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e. maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal derived analog and 96 binary signals. The Disturbance Report function is a common name for several functions i.e. Indications (IND), Event recorder (ER), Event List (EL), Trip Value recorder (TVR), Disturbance recorder (DR). The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another. The function can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance recorder since there is more functionality in the Disturbance Report function then usual. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the Disturbance Handling tool. If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), according to IEC 61850, disturbance recorder and fault location information will be available on the bus. The same information will be obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.
4.14.5.2
Setting guidelines
REG 670
479
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Report function (DRP) are set via the LHMI or the tool included in PCM 600. It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions i.e. Disturbance recorder (DR), Event Recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip Value Recorder (TVR) and Event List function (EL). User-defined names of binary and analog input signals can be set using the configuration and parameter setting tool. The analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all related functions (IND, EL, ER, TVR and DR). Figure ""Figure 196 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4Disturbance Report DRP- A4RADR Analog signals Trip Value Rec RDRE
DRB1-- 6-
Disturbance Recorder
Binary signals
B6RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications
en05000160.vsd
Figure 196:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
For the Disturbance Report function there are a number of settings which also influences the sub-functions. Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick status information about the IED. The information:
480
REG 670
Green LED: Steady light Flashing light Dark Yellow LED: Steady light Flashing light Red LED: Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDN=ON A Disturbance Report is triggered The IED is in test mode In Service Internal failure No power supply
Operation The operation of the Disturbance Report function has to be set On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none sub-function will operate (the only general parameter that influences EL). Operation=Off: Disturbance reports are not stored. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.
Operation=On: Disturbance report are stored, disturbance data can be read from the LHMI and from a PC using PCM 600. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.
Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (LHMI, disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of recordings stored in the IED is 100 and the oldest will be overwritten when a new one arrives (FIFO).
Recording times
The different recording times for the disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time). These recording times affect all sub-functions more or less but not the EL function. Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip Value Recorder function. Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the TVR-function). REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 481
Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long or permanently set (does not influence the TVR-function). Post retrigger (PostRetrig) can be set to On or Off. Makes it possible to choose performance of the Disturbance Report function if a new trig signal appears in the post-fault window. PostRetrig = Off The function is insensitive for new trig signals during post fault time. PostRetrig = On The function completes current report and starts a new complete report i.e. the latter will include: new pre-fault- and fault-time (which will overlap previous report) events and indications might be saved in the previous report too, due to overlap new TVR- and FL-calculations (if installed, in operation and started)
Operation in test mode If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest=Off. The Disturbance Report function does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed. If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest=On. The Disturbance Report function works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.
Binary input signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals. For each of the 96 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a trigger for the start of the disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on positive (1) or negative (0) slope. OperationN Disturbance Report may trig for binary input N (On) or not (Off). TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input N. Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176: transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection. Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6. See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.
482
REG 670

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals. The analog trigger of the Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM= On/Off). NomValueM: Nominal value for input M OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance Report may trig for high/low level of analog input M (On) or not (Off). OverTrigLevelM, UnderTrigLevelM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.
Sub-function parameters
All functions are in operation as long as the disturbance report is in operation. Indications IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on the LHMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated. SetLEDN: Set red Trip LED on LHMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status. Disturbance recorder OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On) or not (Off). Event recorder The ER function has no dedicated parameters. Trip Value recorder ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase angle reference for all other analog input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal e.g. a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30). Event List The EL function has no dedicated parameters.
Consideration
The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be handled if the recording functions don"t have proper settings. The goal is to optimize the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to maximize the number that"s possible to save in the IED. The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and TimeLimit). REG 670 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 483
Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more? How long is the longest expected fault clearing time? Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?
Minimize the number of recordings: Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording i.e. protection trip, carrier receive and/or start signals. Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.
Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT ratios.
4.14.5.3
Setting parameters
Table 145:
Parameter Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig
Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 1.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.5 - 10.0 Off On 1 - 30 Step 0.01 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off Unit s s s Description Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel Operation mode during test mode
ZeroAngleRef
Ch
OpModeTest
Off On
Off
484
REG 670
Table 146:
Parameter Operation01 NomValue01 UnderTrigOp01
Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 1 Use under level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 2 Use under level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off
UnderTrigLe01
50
OverTrigOp01
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe01
200
Operation02 NomValue02 UnderTrigOp02
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe02
50
OverTrigOp02
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe02
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe03
50
OverTrigOp03
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe03
200
Operation04
Off On
Off
REG 670
485

Parameter NomValue04 UnderTrigOp04 Range 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Off Unit Description Nominal value for analogue channel 4 Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7
UnderTrigLe04
50
OverTrigOp04
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe04
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe05
50
OverTrigOp05
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe05
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe06
50
OverTrigOp06
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe06
200
Operation07 NomValue07
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
Off 0.0
486
REG 670

Parameter UnderTrigOp07 Range Off On 0 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07
50
OverTrigOp07
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe07
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe08
50
OverTrigOp08
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe08
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe09
50
OverTrigOp09
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe09
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
REG 670
487

Parameter UnderTrigLe10 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal
OverTrigOp10
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe10
200
Table 147:
Parameter Operation31 NomValue31 UnderTrigOp31
Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 31 Use under level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 32 Use under level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33
UnderTrigLe31
50
OverTrigOp31
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe31
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe32
50
OverTrigOp32
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe32
200
Operation33 NomValue33
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
Off 0.0
488
REG 670

Parameter UnderTrigOp33 Range Off On 0 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33
50
OverTrigOp33
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe33
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe34
50
OverTrigOp34
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe34
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe35
50
OverTrigOp35
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe35
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
REG 670
489

Parameter UnderTrigLe36 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal
OverTrigOp36
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe36
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe37
50
OverTrigOp37
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe37
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe38
50
OverTrigOp38
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe38
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe39
50
490
REG 670

Parameter OverTrigOp39 Range Off On 0 - 5000 Step Default Off Unit Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal
OverTrigLe39
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe40
50
OverTrigOp40
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe40
200
Table 148:
Parameter Operation01 TrigLevel01
Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function

Range Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3
IndicationMa01 SetLED01 Operation02 TrigLevel02
Hide Off Off Trig on 1
REG 670
491

Parameter IndicationMa03 SetLED03 Operation04 TrigLevel04 Range Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Step Default Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8
IndicationMa08 SetLED08
Hide Off
492
REG 670

Parameter Operation09 TrigLevel09 Range Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14
REG 670
493

Parameter IndicationMa14 SetLED14 Operation15 TrigLevel15 Range Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 Step Default Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16 Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
IndicationMa16 SetLED16 FUNT1
Hide Off 0
FunT
FUNT2
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT
494
REG 670

Parameter FUNT11 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit FunT Description Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT
INFNO1
0 - 255
INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O
INFNO2
0 - 255
INFNO3
0 - 255
INFNO4
0 - 255
INFNO5
0 - 255
INFNO6
0 - 255
INFNO7
0 - 255
INFNO8
0 - 255
INFNO9
0 - 255
INFNO10
0 - 255
INFNO11
0 - 255
REG 670
495

Parameter INFNO12 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O Description Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13
0 - 255
INFNO14
0 - 255
INFNO15
0 - 255
INFNO16
0 - 255
4.14.6
4.14.6.1
Event list (RDRE)

Application
From an overview perspective, continuous event-logging is a useful system monitoring instrument and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list (EL), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 timetagged events stored in a ring-buffer where, if the buffer is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event is logged. The difference between the event list (EL) and the event recorder (ER) function is that the list function continuously updates the log with time tagged events while the recorder function is an extract of events during the disturbance report time window. The event list information is available in the IED and the user can use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information. The list can also be uploaded from the PCM 600 tool.
4.14.6.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event list function (EL) are a part of the Disturbance report settings. It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals from binary input channels. These signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance recorder. There is no dedicated setting for the EL function.
496
REG 670

4.14.7.1
Indications (RDRE)
Application
Fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is important. Binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance are an example of this. This information is used primarily in the short term (e.g. immediate disturbance analysis, corrective actions) to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way without any knowledge of how to handle the IED. There are three LED"s on the LHMI (green, yellow and red) which will display status information about the IED (in service, internal failure etc.) and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication function (IND), always included in the IED, shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have been activated during a disturbance. The status changes are logged during the entire recording time, which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time. The indications are not time-tagged. The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to view the information.
4.14.7.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for LED"s and the Indication function (IND) are a part of the Disturbance Report settings. Available signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance report. It is possible to use all binary input signals for the Indication function on the LHMI, but it is not recommended since the general view will be lost. The intention is to point out some important signals, not to many, to be shown. If a more thorough analysis is to be done information from the Event Recorder should be used. To be able to control the red LED in the LHMI: SetLEDN: Set red LED on LHMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status. For the IND function there are a number dedicated settings: IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of that particular input, will be fetched and shown on the LHMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.
REG 670
497

4.14.8.1
Event recorder (RDRE)

Application
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. disturbance analysis, corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, i.e. Functional Analysis). The event recorder (ER), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. The events are logged during the total recording time, which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all 96 binary signals are logged and time-tagged. The event recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
4.14.8.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event Recorder (ER) function are a part of the Disturbance Report settings. It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals from binary input channels. These signals are identical to the binary signals recorded by the disturbance report. For the ER function there is no dedicated setting.
4.14.9
4.14.9.1
Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Application
Fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances such as fault currents and voltage faults in the power system is vital. This information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g. fault location, disturbance analysis, corrective actions) and the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, i.e. Functional Analysis).
498
REG 670
The trip value recorder (TVR), always included in the IED, calculates the values of all selected external analog input signals (channel 1-30) connected to the Disturbance Report function. The estimation is performed immediately after finalizing each recording and available in the Disturbance Report. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal. The information is used as input to the fault location function (FL), if included in the IED and in operation. The trip value recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
4.14.9.2
Setting guidelines
The trip value function (TVR) setting parameters are a part of the Disturbance Report settings. For the TVR function there is one dedicated setting: ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal to use as phase angle reference for all other input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal e.g. a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).
4.14.10
4.14.10.1
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage, binary signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important. This is accomplished by the Disturbance Recorder function and facilitates a better understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improvement of existing equipment etc. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations, i.e. a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA). The Disturbance Recorder (DR), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e. maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal (derived) analog and 96 binary signals. The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorder is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions.
REG 670
499
The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get some general information about the recordings. The disturbance recording information is included in the disturbance recorder files, which may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) for further analysis using the Disturbance Handling tool. The information is also available on a station bus according to IEC 61850 and according to IEC 60870-5-103.
4.14.10.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Recorder function (DR) is a part of the Disturbance Report settings. It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical with the signals recorded by the other functions in the Disturbance Report function i.e. Event Recorder (ER), Indication (IND) and Trip Value Recorder (TVR) function. For the DR function there is one dedicated setting: OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On) or not (Off). Other disturbance report settings, such as Operation and TrigLevel for binary signals, will also influence the disturbance recorder.
4.15
4.15.1
Metering
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)
Function block name: PCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PCGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.15.1.1
Application
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via the station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station
500
REG 670
monitoring system as a service value. When using IEC 61850, a scaled service value is available over the station bus. The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy meters. An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED 670 can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse counter can also be used as a general purpose counter.
4.15.1.2
Setting guidelines
From the Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600), these parameters can be set individually for each pulse counter: Operation: Off/On tReporting: 0-3600s Event Mask: No Events/Report Events
The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter function block is made with the PCM 600 tool. On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms, that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms. The input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That means that the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. The values for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed in the local HMI and PCM 600 under: Settings/General settings/I/O-modules The setting is common for all channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, if changes of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used for pulse counting.
4.15.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 149:
Parameter Operation EventMask
Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function

Range Off On NoEvents ReportEvents Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange Step Default Off NoEvents Unit Description Operation Off/On Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria
CountCriteria
RisingEdge
REG 670
501

Parameter Scale Range 1.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
Quantity
Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600
Count
tReporting
60
Cycle time for reporting of counter value
4.15.2
Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Function block name: ETPx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ETPMMTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
4.15.2.1
Application
The Energy metering function is intended for statistics of the forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy basically given by the measuring function (CVMMXU). This function has also a site calibration possibility to further increase the total accuracy. The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of the measuring function as shown in figure 197.
SVR1 CVMMXU ETP1 ETPMMTR
PINST QINST
P Q
TRUE FALSE FALSE
STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
en07000121.vsd
Figure 197:
Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the measuring function
The energy values can be read through communication in Ws and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the local HMI display. The graphical display is then set up with the Graphical display editor tool (GDE) with a measuring value which with a right click is selected to the active and reactive component as preferred. All four 502 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
values can of course be presented. The values in Ws must be adjusted to normally MWh for transmission networks which is done with a constant 2781012. Maximum demand values in can be presented in MWh or Mvarh in the same way. Alternatively the values can be presented with use of the pulse counters available. The output values can then be scaled with the pulse output setting values PulseA of the energy metering function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct values by scaling in this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the LHMI in the same way and/or sent to the SA system through communication where the total energy then is calculated by summation of the pulses energy. This principle can be good for very high values of energy as the saturation of numbers else will limit energy integration to about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A. After that the accumulation will start on zero again.
4.15.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the stub protection function (STB) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The following settings can be done for the energy metering function. Operation: Off/On StartAcc: Off/On is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off. There is also an input on the configuration function block which in addition to the setting on can start accumulation. It can e.g. be use when an external clock is used to switch two active energy measuring function blocks on and off to have indication of two tariffs. tEnergyOnPls: tEnergyOnPls gives the pulse length of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms when connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms. tEnergyOffPls:tEnergyOffPls gives the off time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms. EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: The settings EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty gives the Ws value in each pulse. It should be selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter settings to give the correct total pulse value. ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty: The settings ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty gives the Ws value in each pulse. It should be selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter settings to give the correct total pulse value. For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max limit etc. Normally the default values are suitable for these parameters.
REG 670
503

Table 150:
Parameter Operation StartAcc
Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range Off On Off On 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Off Unit Description Operation Off/On Activate the accumulation of energy values Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergy
1 Minute
tEnergyOnPls tEnergyOffPls
0.001 0.001
1.000 0.500
s s
Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MWh
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MWh
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr h
ERVAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr h
Table 151:
Parameter EALim ERLim DirEnergyAct
Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range 0.001 10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Step 0.001 0.001 Default 1000000.000 1000.000 Forward Unit MWh MVAr h Description Active energy limit Reactive energy limit Direction of active energy flow Forward/ Reverse Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/ Reverse
DirEnergyReac
Forward
504
REG 670

Parameter EnZeroClamp Range Off On 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 Step Default On Unit Description Enable of zero point clamping detection function Zero point clamping level at active Power Zero point clamping level at reactive Power Preset Initial value for forward active energy Preset Initial value for reverse active energy Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
LevZeroClampP LevZeroClampQ
0.001 0.001
10.000 10.000
MW MVAr
EAFPrestVal EARPrestVal ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
MWh MWh MVAr h MVAr h
ERVPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
REG 670
505
506
Section 5 Station communication
Section 5
Station communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system.
5.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
5.2
5.2.1
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Application IEC 61850-8-1
IEC 6185081 allows two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation. GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850 81 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report it's status. It can also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network. This example shows the topology of an IEC 6185081 configuration. IEC 61850 81 specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system integrator.
REG 670
507
Engineering Workstation SMS
Station HSI Base System
Gateway CC
Printer
KIOSK 1
KIOSK 2
KIOSK 3
en06000195.vsd
Figure 198:
SA system with IEC 61850
This example shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

Station HSI MicroSCADA
Gateway
GOOSE
IED A Control
IED A Protection
IED A Control and protection
IED A Control
IED A Protection en05000734.vsd
Figure 199:
Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message
508
REG 670
Section 5 Station communication 5.2.2 Setting guidelines

There are only two settings related to the IEC 6185081 protocol, available to the user in PST: Operation User can set it to On or Off. GOOSE has to be set to the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be send and received. IEDName That specific IED name in the IEC 6185081 system However, there are specific settings for the network interface (Ethernet) that are directly related to the IEC 6185081 (but not only) in case this protocol is used. The IEDName is not settable through PST. The IEDName is given by the name of the IED in the PCM Navigation structure. The name shown as the "IEDName" parameter is a read-only feedback of the current name of the IED on IEC61850. IEC 6185081 specific data (logical nodes etc.) per included function in an IED can be found iin a separate document, refer to section "Related documents".
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)

Application
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It has one visible input, that should be connected in CAP.
5.2.3.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for SPGGIO. However, to get the signals sent by SPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter "Engineering of the IED".
5.2.3.3
Setting parameters
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)

Application
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
REG 670
509

The settings available for the MVGGIO function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero. The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is shown on the range output of the MVGGIO function block. When a measured value expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.
5.2.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 152:
Parameter MV db
Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit
MV zeroDb MV hhLim
1 0.001
500 90.000
m% -
MV hLim
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
0.001
-90.000
Low Low limit
MV min
0.001
-100.000
Minimum value
MV max
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
5.2.5
Setting parameters
510
REG 670
Table 153:
Parameter Operation GOOSE
Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function

Range Off ON Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD Step Default Off OEM311_AB Unit Description Operation Off/On Port for GOOSE communication
5.3
5.3.1
LON communication protocol

Application
Station HSI MicroSCADA
Control Center
Gateway
Star coupler RER 111
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000663.vsd
Figure 200:
Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation system.
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the IED 670s through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal communication. The fiber optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fiber optic cables.
REG 670
511
Table 154:
Cable connector Cable diameter Max. cable length Wavelength
Specification of the fiber optic connectors

Glass fiber ST-connector 62.5/125 m 1000 m 820-900 nm -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) Plastic fiber snap-in connector 1 mm 10 m 660 nm -13 dBm (HFBR-1521) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)
Transmitted power Receiver sensitivity
The LON Protocol
The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer to the section Multiple command function
Hardware and software modules
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from MicroSCADA, the application library LIB 670 is required. The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB 520 high-voltage process package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA applications. The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in IED 670s. This module contains the process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate the process database for the control application in MicroSCADA. Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This is a software tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communicate via LON, the IEDs need to know which node addresses the other connected IEDs have, and which network variable selectors should be used. This is organized by the LNT. The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter ServicePinMsg=YES. The node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus, or the LNT can scan the network for new nodes. The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s.This can be changed by the LNT.
5.3.2
Setting parameters
512
REG 670
Table 155:
Parameter Operation
General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation
Table 156:
Parameter Operation TimerClass
General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Range Off On Slow Normal Fast Step Default Off Slow Unit Description Operation Timer class
5.4
5.4.1
SPA communication protocol

Application
The communication protocol SPA is available for the IED 670 products as an option and as an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103. The same communication port as for IEC 60870-5-103 is used. SPA communication is applied when using the front communication port. For this purpose, no serial communication module is required in the IED. Only the PCM 600 software in the PC and a crossed-over Ethernet cable for front connection is required. When communicating with a PC see figure 201, using the rear SPA port on the serial communication module (SLM), the only hardware required for a local monitoring system is: Optical fibres for the SPA bus loop Optical/electrical converter for the PC PC
A remote monitoring system for communication over the public telephone network also requires telephone modems and a remote PC. The software required for a local monitoring system is PCM 600, and for a remote monitoring system it is PCM 600 in the remote PC only.
REG 670
513
Remote monitoring system with PCM600
Local monitoring system with PCM600
IED670
IED670
IED670
Teleph one modem
Teleph one modem
Optical to electrical converter, e.g. SPA-ZC 22 or Fiberdata modem
en05000672.vsd
Figure 201:
SPA communication structure for a monitoring system. The monitoring system can either be local, remote or a combination of both
When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN, via WAN and the utility office LAN (see figure 2), and using the rear Ethernet port on the optical Ethernet module (OEM), the only hardware required for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibers from the IED to the utility substation LAN. PC connected to the utility office LAN.
The software required is PCM 600.

Utility LAN Remote monitoring system with PCM600
WAN
Substation LAN
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000715.vsd
Figure 202:
SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN.
The SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can include different numerical relays/terminals/IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.
514
REG 670
glass plastic
<1000 m according to optical budget <20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fiber optic loop. A program is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for translation of the data that should be sent to the IED. The specification of the SPA protocol V2.5 is available as a separate document, SPAbus Communication Protocol V2.5, 1MRS 750076-MTD EN
5.4.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI. The SPA and the IEC use the same rear communication port. To define the protocol to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI. Refer to the Installation and commissioning manual for setting procedure. When the communication protocol has been selected, the power to the IED must be switched off and on. The most important settings in the IED for SPA communication are the slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all communication contact to the IED. These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication and for front channel communication. The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number is unique within the used SPA loop. The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and 38400 baud. The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop are used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication master, the PC. For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the IED does not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set on the HMI of the IED.
5.4.3
REG 670
Setting parameters
Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B 515
Table 157:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd 57600 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line
Table 158:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line
Table 159:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress
General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Range Off On 1 - 899 Step 1 Default Off 30 Unit Description Operation Slave address
5.5
5.5.1
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Application
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is available for the IED 670 products as an option.
516
REG 670
TCP/IP
Station HSI
Control Center
Gateway
Star coupler RER 123
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000660.vsd
Figure 203:
Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation automation system.
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Table 160:
glass plastic
Max distances between IED/nodes

< 1000 m according to optical budget < 20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
Functionality
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.
Design
General The protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of the following functions:
REG 670
517
Event handling Report of analog service values (measurands) Fault location Command handling Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization
Hardware When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is: Optical fibres, glass/plastic Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU PC/RTU Commands The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a dedicated function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands according to the protocol. Terminal commands in control direction
Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Function commands in control direction
Function block with pre defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Function commands in control direction
Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal. Status The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on the:
518
REG 670
IED status indication in monitor direction
Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. Function status indication in monitor direction, user-defined
Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input signal. Supervision indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Earth fault indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction, I103FltDis. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block is suitable for distance protection function. Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction, I103FltStd. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, over-current and earth-fault protection functions. Autorecloser indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
REG 670
519

Measurands The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the standard. Measurands in public range
Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals, I103Meas. Measurands in private range
Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction, I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Fault location The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED. Disturbance Recordings The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be transferred again. The binary signals that are reported by polling are those that are connected to the disturbance function blocks DRB1 DRB6. These function blocks include the function type and the information number for each signal. See also the description of the Disturbance report in the Technical reference manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those connected to the disturbance function blocks DRA1 DRA4. The eight first ones belong to the public range and the remaining ones to the private range.
Settings
Settings from the local HMI The SPA and the IEC communication use the same rear port. To define the protocol to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu: Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/Protocol selection for SPA or IEC103 When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically restarted. The settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following: 520 Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed) Setting for invert the light or not Setting for reporting frequency of mesurands
The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI at: Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/IEC60870-5-103 The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255. The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s. Settings from the PCM 600 tool Event For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. In order to get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the event function shall be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask shall be set to ON_SET. In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description of the Main Function type set on the local HMI. Commands As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with eight output signals. Using the CAP 531 tool makes the configuration of these signals. To realize the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. This input shall have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard. Disturbance Recordings For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for the function type. Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.
Function and information types

128 = distance protection 160 = overcurrent protection
The function type is defined as follows:
176 = transformer differential protection
REG 670
521
192 = line differential protection Please see the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication, specifying the information types supported by the 670IED products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection IED. There is no representation for the following parts: Generating events for test mode Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation
EIA RS-485 is not supported. Glass or plastic fiber should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the recommended interface to use (BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST connectors are used with the optical power as specified in standard. For more information please see the IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.
5.5.2
Setting parameters
Table 161:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e
General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function

Range 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments
Table 162:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 255 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)
Table 163:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

522
REG 670
Table 164:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Table 165:
Parameter PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Range 0-1 0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 1 0.400 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Unit Mode s FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Description Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255) Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)
Table 166:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO_1
General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 5 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
REG 670
523

Parameter INFNO_6 Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 6 Unit InfNo Description Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Table 167:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Table 168:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Table 169:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Table 170:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Table 171:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO
General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 25 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur2
0.05
1000.00
524
REG 670

Parameter RatedMeasur3 Range 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 Step 0.05 Default 1000.00 Unit Description Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9
RatedMeasur4
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur5
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur6
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur7
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur8
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur9
0.05
1000.00
Table 172:
Parameter RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2 RatedUN RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE
Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255 Step 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1 Default 3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1 Unit A A A A kV kV kV kV kV MW MVA Hz FunT Description Rated current phase L1 Rated current phase L2 Rated current phase L3 Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase L1 Rated voltage for phase L2 Rated voltage for phase L3 Rated voltage for phase-phase L1-L2 Rated residual voltage UN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)
REG 670
525
5.6
5.6.1
Automation bits (AUBI)

Application
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON). The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
5.6.2
Setting guidelines
The AUBI function block has just one setting, (Operation: On/Off) enabling or disabling the function. The name for each command signal can also be set under CAP. These names will be seen in the DNP communication configuration tool, in the PCM 600.
5.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 173:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off / On
Table 174:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function

Range Off ON Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode Off / On
526
REG 670
Table 175:
Parameter Operation BaudRate
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Off Serial-Mode 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Four-wire Two-wire Step Default Off 9600 Bd Unit Description Operation mode Baud-rate for serial port
WireMode
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 176:
Parameter DLinkConfirm
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Never Sometimes Always 0.000 - 60.000 0 - 255 0.000 - 60.000 5-8 1-2 No Even Odd No Yes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Never Unit Description Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout DLinkRetries tRxToTxMinDel DataBits StopBits Parity
0.001 1 0.001 1 1 -
2.000 3 0.000 8 1 Even
s s -
Data-link confirm timeout in s Data-link maximum retries Rx to Tx minimum delay in s Data bits Stop bits Parity
RTSEnable tRTSWarmUp tRTSWarmDown tBackOffDelay tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
No 0.000 0.000 0.050 0.100
s s s s
RTS enable RTS warm-up in s RTS warm-down in s RS485 back-off delay in s RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s
REG 670
527
Table 177:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData
1 1
20000 20000
TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP portfor initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master
UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 178:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 179:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
528
REG 670
Table 180:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 181:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation
REG 670
529

Parameter Obj22DefVar Range 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Unit Description Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 182:
Parameter ValMasterAddr AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range No Yes No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 Step 0.01 Default Yes Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Validate source (master) address Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask
ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask
Yes Yes No Off
530
REG 670

Parameter UROfflineRetry Range 0 - 10 Step 1 Default 5 Unit Description Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout
tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0
0.1
Yes No No Yes 30.0
Table 183:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address
REG 670
531

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
532
REG 670
Table 184:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask
Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
REG 670
533

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Table 185:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
534
REG 670

Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 186:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
REG 670
535

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600
0.1 1 1
Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10
s s s
Table 187:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address
536
REG 670

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
REG 670
537
Table 188:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
538
REG 670

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Table 189:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
REG 670
539

Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 190:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
540
REG 670

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600
0.1 1 1
Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10
s s s
5.7
5.7.1
Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Application
The single command, 16 signals (CD) is a common function and always included in the IED.
REG 670
541
The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. Figure 204 shows an application example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of the IED. Figure 204 shows a close operation. An open breaker operation is performed in a similar way but without the synchro-check condition.
Single command function CDxx

SingleCmdFunc
Configuration logic circuits
Close CB1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined conditions Synchrocheck
&
en04000206.vsd
Figure 204:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits.
Figure 205 and figure 206 show other ways to control functions, which require steady On/Off signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or external devices.
542
REG 670

SingleCmdFunc
Function n
Function n
CMDOUTy
OUTy
en04000207.vsd
Figure 205:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions.

SingleCmdFunc
Configuration logic circuits
Device 1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined conditions
&
en04000208.vsd
Figure 206:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external devices via configuration logic circuits.
5.7.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the single command, 16 signals, function (CD) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
REG 670
543
Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. Off, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the command function block.
5.7.3
Setting parameters
Table 191:
Parameter Mode
Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function

Range Off Steady Pulsed Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode
5.8
5.8.1
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Application
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/ inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
Setting guidelines
Settings
The parameters for the multiple command function are set via the Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600). The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.
5.8.3
544
Setting parameters
Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B REG 670
Table 192:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Range 0.050 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 11.000 Unit s Description Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Mode tPulseTime
Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000
0.001
Steady 0.200
Table 193:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Range 0.000 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
REG 670
545
546
Section 6 Remote communication
Section 6
Remote communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the remote end data communication possibilities through binary signal transferring.
6.1
Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSDGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Function block name: BRx--;BTx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
6.1.1
Application
IED 670s can be equipped with communication devices for line differential communication and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same communication hardware is used for both purposes. Communication between two IEDs geographically on different locations is a fundamental part of the line differential function. Sending of binary signals between two IEDs, one in each end of a power line is used in teleprotection schemes and for direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are application possibilities like e.g. blocking/enabling functionality in the remote substation, changing setting group in the remote IED depending on the switching situation in the local substation etc. When equipped with an LDCM, a 64 kbit/s communication channel can be connected to the IED, which will then have the capacity of 192 binary signals to be communicated with a remote IED. For RED 670 the number of binary signals is limited to 8 because the line differential communication is included in the same telegrams.
REG 670
547

6.1.1.1 Communication hardware solutions
The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 207 . The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The maximum distance with this solution is approximately 150 km.
Max 150 km with long-range LDCM and single mode fibre
CM LD CM LD
DC L
CM LD
en06000519.vsd
Figure 207:
Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM.
The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703 converter or with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 converter as shown in figure 208. These solutions are aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network (e.g. SDH or PDH).
Multiplexer Telecom. Network Multiplexer
*)
*)
DC L L D
LD L
CM M
CM
DC
*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703 or X.21 alternatively

en05000527.vsd
Figure 208:
LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer.
When an external modem G.703 or X21 is used, the connection between LDCM and the modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km length. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.
548
REG 670
Alternatively, an LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole connector output can be used.
6.1.2
Setting guidelines
ChannelMode: This parameter can be set On or Off. Besides this, it can be set OutOfService which signifies that the local LDCM is out of service. Thus, with this setting, the communication channel is active and a message is sent to the remote IED that the local IED has its communication out of service. TerminalNo: This setting assigns a number to the local IED. Up to 256 IEDs can be assigned unique numbers. For a line differential protection, maximum 6 IEDs can be included. The possibility to use the large number of IED designations is reserved for the case where a high security against incorrect addressing in multiplexed systems is desired. RemoteTermNo: This setting assigns a number to the remote IED. DiffSync: Here the method of time synchronization, PingPong or GPS, for the line differential function is selected. GPSSyncErr: If GPS synchronization is lost, the synchronization of the line differential function will continue during 16 s. based on the stability in the local IED clocks. Thereafter the setting Block will block the line differential function or the setting PingPong will make it continue by using the PingPong synchronization method. It shall be noticed that using PingPong in this situation is only safe as long as there is no risk of varying transmission asymmetry. CommSync: This setting decides the Master/Slave relation in the communication system and shall not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current samples. When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other one as Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave, as the telecommunication system will provide the clock master. OptoPower: The setting LowPower is used for fibres 0 1 km and HighPower for fibres >1 km. TransmCurr: This setting decides which of 2 possible local currents that shall be transmitted, or if and how the sum of 2 local currents shall be transmitted, or finally if the channel shall be used as a redundant channel. In a 1 breaker arrangement, there will be 2 local currents, and the earthing on the CTs can be different for these. CT-SUM will transmit the sum of the 2 CT groups. CT-DIFF1 will transmit CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 will transmit CT group 2 minus CT group 1. CT-GRP1 or CT-GRP2 will transmit the respective CT group, and the setting RedundantChannel makes the channel be used as a backup channel.
REG 670
549
ComFailAlrmDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm. In communication systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration up to 50 ms. Thus, a too short time delay setting might cause nuisance alarms in these situations. ComFailResDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm reset. RedChSwTime: Time delay before switchover to a redundant channel in case of primary channel failure. RedChRturnTime: Time delay before switchback to a the primary channel after channel failure. AsymDelay: The asymmetry is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If a fixed asymmetry is known, the PingPong synchronization method can be used if the parameter AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that the asymmetry will always be positive in one end, and negative in the other end. MaxTransmDelay: Data for maximum 40 ms transmission delay can be buffered up. Delay times in the range of some ms are common. It shall be noticed that if data arrive in the wrong order, the oldest data will just be disregarded. CompRange: The set value is the current peak value over which truncation will be made. To set this value, knowledge of the fault current levels should be known. The setting is not overly critical as it considers very high current values for which correct operation normally still can be achieved.
6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 194:
Parameter ChannelMode
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
0 Echo GPS Block Echo
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
CommSync
Slave Master
Slave
550
REG 670

Parameter OptoPower Range LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500 Step Default LowPower Unit Description Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21
1 1 -
600 300 Off
us us -
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 195:
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
0 Echo GPS
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
REG 670
551

Parameter GPSSyncErr Range Block Echo Step Default Block Unit Description Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values
CommSync
Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChann el 5 - 500
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21
1 1 -
600 300 Off
us us -
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
552
REG 670
Table 196:
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 - 255 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication
TerminalNo
RemoteTermNo CommSync
0 - 255 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500
1 -
0 Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
ComFailAlrmDel
10
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
10
ms
InvertPolX21
Off On
Off
REG 670
553
554
Section 7 Configuration
Section 7
Configuration
About this chapter
This chapter describes the IED configurations.
7.1 7.2
7.2.1
7.2.1.1
Introduction Description of REG 670

Introduction
Description of configuration A20
Configuration 1MRK004826AA This configuration is used in applications where only generator protection within one IED is required. The REG 670-A20 is always delivered in 1/2 of 19" case size. Thus only 12 analogue inputs are available. This configuration includes generator low impedance, differential protection and all other typically required generator protection functions. Note that 100% stator earth fault function and Pole Slip protection function are optional. See figure 209, example of one possible application is shown.
REG 670
555
Gen Diff + Back-up 12AI
60FL SDD RFUF
81
f<
81
f>
SA PTUF
SA PTOF Meter. CV MMXU 78 Ucos
PSP PPAM 21 Z< 24 U/f>
51/67
3I>
50BF
3I> BF
OC4 PTOC
CC RBRF
ZMH PDIS 32 P
OEX PVPH 27 3U<
GOP PDOP
UV2 PTUV 59 3U>
U I
64R
Re<
CV GAPC
+ RXTTE4
87G
3Id/I
37
P<
GEN PDIF
GUP PDUP 40 F <
OV2 PTOV 59N UN>
LEX PDIS 46 I2> 49 Ith 50AE U/I>
ROV2 PTOV
CV GAPC
TR PTTR
CV GAPC
Option
59N UN> 59THD U3d/N STEF PHIZ
ROV2 PTOV
REG 670*1.1 A20 Other functions available from the function library
25 SES RSYN 52PD PD 50 3I>> 51/27 U 32N P0-> PH PIOC 51/67 3I> CV GAPC 51V I>/U SDE PSDE 87CT I2d/I
CC RPLD
OC4 PTOC
CV GAPC
CC RDIF
Function alternatives for 87G/GEN PDIF

87T 3Id/I 87 IdN
T2W PDIF
HZ PDIF
Please note that the use of function might require a different analog input!
en07000049.vsd
Figure 209:
Typical generator protection application with generator differential and back-up protection, including 12 analog input transformers and half 19 case size.
Note that inside the REG 670-A20 functional library additional functions are available, but not configured, such as additional Overcurrent protection, additional Multipurpose protection functions, Synchrocheck function, etc as shown in figure 209. It is as well possible to order optional 2-winding transformer differential or high impedance differential protection functions which than can be used instead of basic low-impedance generator differential protection. Note that REG 670-A20 must be re-configured if any additional or optional functions going to be used.
556
REG 670
7.2.1.2 Description of configuration B30
Configuration 1MRK004826BA This configuration is used in applications where generator protection and backup protection for surrounding primary equipment within one IED is required. The REG 670-B30 is always delivered in 1/1 of 19" case size. Thus 18 or 24 analogue inputs are available, depending on order type of TRMs. This configuration includes generator low impedance, differential protection and all other typically required generator protection functions. Note that 100% stator earth fault function is basic while the Pole Slip protection function is optional. In the figure 210, example of one possible application is shown.
Gen Diff + Back-up 24AI
51/67
3I>
50BF 3I> BF CC RBRF 87N IdN/I 87T 3Id/I
OC4 PTOC
51N/67N
IN->
EF4 PTOC
REF PDIF
T3W PDIF CT S
51/67
3I>
OC4 PTOC 51/67 3I>
OC4 PTOC 59N UN>
ROV2 PTOV
Back-up Protection Main Protection

60FL SDD RFUF 81 f< 81 f> SA PTUF SA PTOF Meter. CV MMXU 51/67 3I> 50BF 3I> BF CC RBRF 78 Ucos
PSP PPAM 21 Z< 24 U/f>
OC4 PTOC
ZMH PDIS 32 P
OEX PVPH 27 3U<
Auxiliary Bus U I
64R Re< 87G 3Id/I
GOP PDOP
UV2 PTUV 59 3U>
CV GAPC
+ RXTTE4
37
P<
GEN PDIF
GUP PDUP 40 F <
OV2 PTOV 59N UN>
LEX PDIS 46 I2> 49 Ith 50AE U/I>
ROV2 PTOV
CV GAPC
TR PTTR
CV GAPC
Option 59N UN> 59THD U3d/N STEF PHIZ
ROV2 PTOV
REG 670*1.1 B30

Other functions available from the function library 25 SES RSYN 52PD PD 50 3I>> 51/27 U CV GAPC 51V I>/U 87CT I2d/I 87T 3Id/I PH PIOC 51/67 3I> CCS RDIF
51N/67N
T2W PDIF 32N P0->
IN->
CC RPLD
OC4 PTOC
CV GAPC
EF4 PTOC
SDE PSDE
en07000050.vsd
Figure 210:
Block protection including generator and generator transformer protection with 24 analog input transformers and full 19 rack. The application is prepared to cover hydro as well as gas turbine arrangements.
REG 670
557
Note that inside the REG 670-B30 functional library additional functions are available, but not configured, such as additional Multipurpose protection functions, Synchrocheck function, second generator differential protection function etc., as shown in figure 210. It is as well possible to order optional 2- or 3- winding transformer differential protection function which than can be used as transformer or block (i.e. overall) differential protection. Note that REG 670-B30 must be reconfigured if any additional or optional functions going to be used.
7.2.1.3
Description of configuration C30

Configuration 1MRK004826CA This configuration is used in applications where generator-transformer block protection within one IED is required. The REG 670-B30 is always delivered in 1/1 of 19" case size. Thus 18 or 24 analogue inputs are available, depending on order type of TRMs. This configuration includes generator low impedance, differential protection, transformer differential protection and overall differential protection fuctions. Note that Pole Slip protection function is optional. See figure 211, example of one possible application is shown.
558
REG 670
Generator and block transformer protection 24AI
60FL SDD RFUF
59 IdN/I
3U> 51/67 87T 3Id/I

Meter. CV MMXU
OV2 PTOV 50BF 3I> BF CC RBRF T2W PDIF 3I> 49 Ith OC4 PTOC TR PTTR
87N
REF PDIF
51N/67N
IN-> EF4 PTOC CT S
87T 3Id/I T3W PDIF
51/67
3I>
OC4 PTOC
Option 59N UN> ROV2 PTOV

60FL SDD RFUF
81 3I>
f<
SA PTUF 50BF 3I> BF CC RBRF
78 Ucos PSP PPAM 21 32 Z 3U< 3U> ZMH PDIS GOP PDOP OEX PVPH UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV 81 f> SA PTOF
51/67
OC4 PTOC
U I
64R
Re<
CV GAPC
+ RXTTE4
87G
3Id/I
37
GEN PDIF
GUP PDUP 40 F < LEX PDIS
46 I2> CV GAPC
49 Ith TR PTTR
50AE U/I> CV GAPC
59N
UN>
59THD
U3d/N REG 670*1.1 C30
ROV2 PTOV
STEF PHIZ
Other functions available from the function library 25 SES RSYN 52PD PD CC RPLD 50 3I>> PH PIOC 51/67 3I> OC4 PTOC 51/27 U CV GAPC 51V I>/U CV GAPC 32N P0-> SDE PSDE 87CT I2d/I CCS RDIF
en07000051.vsd
Figure 211:
Block protection including generator and generator transformer protection with 24 analog input transformers and full 19 rack. The application is prepared to cover hydro as well as gas turbine arrangements.
Note that inside the REG 670-C30 functional library additional functions are available, but not configured, such as additional Multipurpose protection functions, Synchrocheck function, second generator differential protection function etc., as shown in figure 211. Note that REG 670-C30 must be re-configured if any additional or optional functions going to be used.
REG 670
559
560
Section 8 Setting examples
Section 8
Setting examples
About this chapter
In this section different setting examples are described
8.1
Setting examples
The correct setting of the IED is of vital importance for the correct operation of the protection function. The examples have been selected from an example power system as per figure 212. Note that all setting are based on primary values, either in per unit (percent) of primary base values or as primary values direct, e.g. primary ohms. The setting examples are typical and selected to show alternatives with communication schemes, single- and three phase tripping and auto-reclosing, multi- and single breaker arrangements. The settings of IED670 are shown in examples from a traditional power system. The following system structure has been defined for the examples.
REG 670
561
G
15000MVA Z1=0,9+j10.6 Z0=1.0+j12.0
400 kV 230 kV
132 kV
Station A
CTs 2000/1 CTs 2000/1A CVT 400/0,11kV
CTs 2500/1
Autotransformer Sn=1000MVA 415/230+/-9*1,67%kV ek=14% Z0=42,5ohm (415 base) ABC-N Z0=20ohm (415 base) ABC-abc Z0=5ohm (230 base) abc-N
5 km
0,028 +j 0,155 ohm/km 400 kV Cable data 0,030 + j0,120 ohm/km
Station B 100 km
400 kV OHL data 0,014 +j 0,3 ohm/km 0,16 + j0,9 ohm/km 0,09+ + j0,5 ohm/km
Station A
CTs 1200/1A CVT 230/0,11kV
230 kV OHL data 100 km 0,018 +j 0,34 ohm/km 0,52 + j1,1 ohm/km 0,32+ + j0,62 ohm/km
Generator Transformer Sn=600MVA, 18kV cos f =0,85 Sn=600MVA, 410/18kV Xd"=0,18 ek=14% Xd'=0,22 Z0=40ohm (400 base) Xd=2.0 102 km CTs 2000/1A CVT 400/0,11kV CTs 1000/1A CTs 2000/1A CVT 400/0,11kV
Station C
Load
150 km
60 km 25 km
CTs 1200/1A CVT 230/0,11kV Transformers Sn=500MVA 415/230+/-9*1,67%kV ek=12% Z0=60ohm (415 base)
Station E
CTs 600/1A CTs 1200/1A CVT 230/0,11kV
CTs 2000/1A
Station C
70 km
Transformer Sn=175MVA 242/132+/-9*1,67%kV ek=10% Z0=20ohm (230 base) CTs 1600/1A
35 km
80 km
CTs 1200/1A CVT 230/0,11kV
400 kV OHL data 0,014 +j 0,3 ohm/km 0,16 + j0,9 ohm/km 0,09+ + j0,5 ohm/km
300 km
Series Capacitor (mid line) -j 45 ohm -j 45 ohm
Station F
CTs 600/1A VT 132/0,11kV 132 kV OHL data 0,024 +j 0,38 ohm/km 12 km 0,92 + j1,2 ohm/km CTs 600/1A VT 132/0,11kV Station G Transformer Sn=175MVA 132/11+/-92*2,5%kV ek=12% Z0=10ohm (132 base) Generator Sn=160MVA, 11kV cos f =0,85 Xd"=0,18 Xd'=0,24 Xd=2.2
30 km
CTs 600/1A VT 132/0,11kV
CTs 2000/1A CVT 400/0,11kV Station D Transformers Sn=1000MVA, 410/18kV ek=12% Z0=30ohm (400 base) Generators Sn=800MVA, 18kV cos f =0,85 Xd"=0,18 Xd'=0,22 Xd=2.0 en05000836.vsd
Station H
Figure 212:
The typical power network with different objects are examples of how to set the IED670.
The setting has been performed for the 400 kV overhead power line between station A and C (REL 670), for the short 400 kV Cable feeder between station A and B (RED 670), for the Long 230 kV single power line between station A and E (REL 670), for the series compensated line between station C and D (REL 670) and for the short 132 kV power line between station F and G (REL 670). Setting of Transformers in Station C (400/230 kV) and station F 132/20 kV are also calculated.
562
REG 670
The complete setting examples for all IEDs as per above are available in separate documents, refer to section "Related documents". REL 670 Example 7 70 kV power line on a resonance earth system. Double bus, single breaker arrangement.
8.1.1
REG 670 Example 1

REG 670 Example 1 describes setting principle for a typical generator-transformer block.
REG 670
563
564
Section 9 Glossary
Section 9
Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
9.1
Glossary
AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool 565
REG 670
Section 9 Glossary
CB CBM CCITT
Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler REG 670
CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CO cycle Co-directional
COMTRADE Contra-directional
CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH 566
Section 9 Glossary
DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703
Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance
GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6
REG 670
567
Section 9 Glossary
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device REG 670
IED I-GIS IOM Instance
IP
IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD 568
Section 9 Glossary
LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach
Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX 569
PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC REG 670
Section 9 Glossary
RCA REVAL RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector SMS SNTP
Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD REG 670
SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP 570
Section 9 Glossary
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
U/I-PISA UTC
UV WEI VT X.21 3IO 3UO
REG 670
571
572

1MRK502016-UEN B en Application Manual Generator Protection IED REG 670 1.1a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1MRK502016-UEN B en Application Manual Generator Protection IED REG 670 1.1a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application manual Generator protection IED REG 670

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

Engineering of the IED...................................................15

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Introduction to the application manual

About the application manual

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Related documents

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Engineering of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

The Function selector options allows definition of the specific hardware.

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Virtual IO blocks SMBI and SMBO configured in an application configuration

The configurable LEDs.

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

The analog preprocessing block.

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

1MRK002801-BA 1MRK002801-CA 1MRK002801-DA 1MRK002801-EA

Adapting a configuration to satisfy special needs

Signal Matrix Tool (SMT)

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Application configuration tool CAP 531

Preparing a specific application configuration of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Open view for PCM 600

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Adding a new function block

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT)

Using the Event viewer tool

Setting of the IED

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

A typical view from the PCM 600 setting tool

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B

Section 2 Engineering of the IED

User type Guest SuperUser SPAGuest SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator

Authorization handling in the tool

Application manual 1MRK502016-UEN rev. B